Table of Contents
- GS2220 Series
- User’s Guide
- Getting to Know Your Switch
- Hardware Installation and Connection
- Hardware Overview
- The Web Configurator
- Initial Setup Example
- Tutorials
- Technical Reference
- Status
- Basic Setting
- VLAN
- Static MAC Forward Setup
- Static Multicast Forwarding
- Filtering
- Spanning Tree Protocol
- 13.1 Spanning Tree Protocol Overview
- 13.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen
- 13.3 Spanning Tree Configuration
- 13.4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
- 13.5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
- 13.6 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
- 13.7 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status
- 13.8 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
- 13.9 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
- 13.10 Technical Reference
- Bandwidth Control
- Broadcast Storm Control
- Mirroring
- Link Aggregation
- Port Authentication
- Port Security
- Time Range
- Classifier
- Policy Rule
- Queuing Method
- Multicast
- AAA
- IP Source Guard
- 26.1 IP Source Guard Overview
- 26.2 IP Source Guard
- 26.3 IPv4 Source Guard Setup
- 26.4 IPv4 Source Guard Static Binding
- 26.5 DHCP Snooping
- 26.6 DHCP Snooping Configure
- 26.7 ARP Inspection Status
- 26.8 ARP Inspection Configure
- 26.9 IPv6 Source Guard Overview
- 26.10 IPv6 Source Binding Status
- 26.11 IPv6 Static Binding Setup
- 26.12 IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup
- 26.13 IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup
- 26.14 IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup
- 26.15 IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup
- 26.16 IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup
- 26.17 Technical Reference
- Loop Guard
- VLAN Mapping
- Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
- PPPoE
- Error Disable
- Private VLAN
- Green Ethernet
- Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
- Anti-Arpscan
- BPDU Guard
- OAM
- ZULD
- Static Route
- Differentiated Services
- DHCP
- 41.1 DHCP Overview
- 41.2 DHCP Configuration
- 41.3 DHCPv4 Status
- 41.4 DHCPv4 Relay
- 41.4.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information
- 41.4.2 DHCPv4 Option 82 Profile
- 41.4.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Global Relay
- 41.4.4 DHCPv4 Global Relay Port Configure
- 41.4.5 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example
- 41.4.6 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings
- 41.4.7 DHCPv4 VLAN Port Configure
- 41.4.8 Example: DHCP Relay for Two VLANs
- 41.5 DHCPv6 Relay
- ARP Setup
- Maintenance
- Access Control
- Diagnostic
- System Log
- Syslog Setup
- Cluster Management
- MAC Table
- ARP Table
- Path MTU Table
- Configure Clone
- IPv6 Neighbor Table
- Port Status
- Troubleshooting and Appendices
Zyxel GS2220-28-EU0101F User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for GS2220-28-EU0101F by Zyxel which is a product in the Network Switches category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
Default Login Details
User’s Guide
GS2220 Series
8/24/44-Port GbE L2 Switch with 2/4 Dual Personality GbE Uplinks
8/24/44-Port GbE L2 PoE Switch with 2/4 Dual Personality GbE Uplinks
Copyright © 2019 Zyxel Communications Corporation
Management IP
Address
http://DHCP-assigned IP
or
http://192.168.1.1
User Name admin
Password 1234
Version 4.60 Edition 1, 11/2019
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
2
IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your
product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the
information in this manual is accurate.
Related Documentation
•CLI Reference Guide
This guide explains how to use the Command-Line Interface (CLI) to configure the Switch.
Note: It is recommended you use the Web Configurator to configure the Switch.
• Web Configurator Online Help
Click the help icon in any screen for help in configuring that screen and supplementary information.
•More Information
Go to https://businessforum.zyxel.com for product discussions.
Go to support.zyxel.com to find other information on the Switch.
Contents Overview
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
3
Contents Overview
User’s Guide ......................................................................................................................................20
Getting to Know Your Switch .............................................................................................................. 21
Hardware Installation and Connection ............................................................................................. 30
Hardware Overview ............................................................................................................................. 35
The Web Configurator ......................................................................................................................... 43
Initial Setup Example ............................................................................................................................ 59
Tutorials .................................................................................................................................................. 63
Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................73
Status ...................................................................................................................................................... 74
Basic Setting .......................................................................................................................................... 80
VLAN .................................................................................................................................................... 110
Static MAC Forward Setup ................................................................................................................ 131
Static Multicast Forwarding ............................................................................................................... 133
Filtering ................................................................................................................................................. 136
Spanning Tree Protocol ...................................................................................................................... 138
Bandwidth Control ............................................................................................................................. 159
Broadcast Storm Control ................................................................................................................... 161
Mirroring ............................................................................................................................................... 163
Link Aggregation ................................................................................................................................ 165
Port Authentication ............................................................................................................................ 172
Port Security ......................................................................................................................................... 181
Time Range ......................................................................................................................................... 183
Classifier ............................................................................................................................................... 185
Policy Rule ........................................................................................................................................... 194
Queuing Method ................................................................................................................................ 198
Multicast .............................................................................................................................................. 201
AAA ...................................................................................................................................................... 224
IP Source Guard .................................................................................................................................. 237
Loop Guard ......................................................................................................................................... 267
VLAN Mapping ................................................................................................................................... 270
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling ................................................................................................................ 273
PPPoE ................................................................................................................................................... 277
Error Disable ......................................................................................................................................... 285
Private VLAN ....................................................................................................................................... 291
Green Ethernet ................................................................................................................................... 293
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) ................................................................................................ 295
Anti-Arpscan ....................................................................................................................................... 317
Contents Overview
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
4
BPDU Guard ........................................................................................................................................ 322
OAM ..................................................................................................................................................... 325
ZULD ...................................................................................................................................................... 332
Static Route ......................................................................................................................................... 336
Differentiated Services ....................................................................................................................... 339
DHCP .................................................................................................................................................... 343
ARP Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 354
Maintenance ...................................................................................................................................... 358
Access Control .................................................................................................................................... 372
Diagnostic ........................................................................................................................................... 392
System Log .......................................................................................................................................... 394
Syslog Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 395
Cluster Management ......................................................................................................................... 398
MAC Table ........................................................................................................................................... 404
ARP Table ............................................................................................................................................ 407
Path MTU Table ................................................................................................................................... 409
Configure Clone ................................................................................................................................. 410
IPv6 Neighbor Table ........................................................................................................................... 413
Port Status ............................................................................................................................................ 415
Troubleshooting and Appendices .................................................................................................422
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 423
Table of Contents
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
5
Table of Contents
Contents Overview .............................................................................................................................3
Table of Contents.................................................................................................................................5
Part I: User’s Guide..........................................................................................20
Chapter 1
Getting to Know Your Switch ............................................................................................................21
1.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 21
1.1.1 Management Method ......................................................................................................... 22
1.1.2 Management Modes ........................................................................................................... 22
1.1.3 Mode Changing ................................................................................................................... 23
1.1.4 ZON Utility ............................................................................................................................... 24
1.1.5 PoE .......................................................................................................................................... 24
1.2 Example Applications .................................................................................................................... 25
1.2.1 PoE Example Application ..................................................................................................... 25
1.2.2 Backbone Example Application ......................................................................................... 26
1.2.3 Bridging/Fiber Uplink Example Application ........................................................................ 26
1.2.4 High Performance Switching Example ............................................................................... 27
1.2.5 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Application Example ............................................................................. 27
1.2.6 IPv6 Support ........................................................................................................................... 28
1.3 Ways to Manage the Switch ......................................................................................................... 28
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the Switch ........................................................................................29
Chapter 2
Hardware Installation and Connection ...........................................................................................30
2.1 Installation Scenarios ...................................................................................................................... 30
2.2 Desktop Installation Procedure .................................................................................................... 30
2.3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack .................................................................................................. 31
2.3.1 Installation Requirements ..................................................................................................... 31
2.3.2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch ............................................................... 32
2.3.3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack .......................................................................................... 32
2.4 Wall Mounting (GS2220-10 and GS2220-10HP Only) .................................................................. 33
2.4.1 Installation Requirement ...................................................................................................... 33
Chapter 3
Hardware Overview...........................................................................................................................35
3.1 Front Panel Connections .............................................................................................................. 35
Table of Contents
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
6
3.1.1 SFP Slots ................................................................................................................................. 36
3.1.2 Ethernet Ports ......................................................................................................................... 38
3.1.3 PoE (GS2220-10HP, GS2220-28HP and GS2220-50HP) ....................................................... 38
3.1.4 Dual Personality Interfaces .................................................................................................. 38
3.1.5 Console Port ......................................................................................................................... 39
3.2 Rear Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 39
3.2.1 Grounding .............................................................................................................................. 40
3.2.2 AC Power Connection ......................................................................................................... 40
3.3 LEDs .............................................................................................................................................. 41
Chapter 4
The Web Configurator........................................................................................................................43
4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 43
4.2 System Login ............................................................................................................................... 43
4.3 Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility ................................................................................................... 46
4.3.1 Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 46
4.3.2 Run the ZON Utility ................................................................................................................. 47
4.4 The Web Configurator Layout ...................................................................................................... 51
4.4.1 Change Your Password ..................................................................................................... 55
4.5 Saving Your Configuration ............................................................................................................. 56
4.6 Switch Lockout .............................................................................................................................. 56
4.7 Resetting the Switch .................................................................................................................... 56
4.7.1 Using the RESTORE Button ..................................................................................................... 56
4.7.2 Reload the Configuration File ............................................................................................. 57
4.8 Logging Out of the Web Configurator .......................................................................................57
4.9 Help ................................................................................................................................................. 58
Chapter 5
Initial Setup Example.........................................................................................................................59
5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 59
5.1.1 Creating a VLAN ................................................................................................................... 59
5.1.2 Setting Port VID ...................................................................................................................... 60
5.1.3 Configuring Switch Management IP Address .................................................................... 61
Chapter 6
Tutorials ...............................................................................................................................................63
6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 63
6.2 How to Use DHCPv4 Snooping on the Switch ............................................................................. 63
6.3 How to Use DHCPv4 Relay on the Switch .................................................................................... 66
6.3.1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction ........................................................................................ 67
6.3.2 Creating a VLAN ................................................................................................................... 67
6.3.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Relay .................................................................................................. 69
6.3.4 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... 70
Table of Contents
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
7
6.4 How to Use Auto Configuration via a DHCP Server on the Switch ........................................... 70
Part II: Technical Reference...........................................................................73
Chapter 7
Status...................................................................................................................................................74
7.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 74
7.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................. 74
7.2 Status ............................................................................................................................................... 74
7.2.1 Neighbor Screen .................................................................................................................. 76
7.2.2 Neighbor Detail ..................................................................................................................... 77
Chapter 8
Basic Setting .......................................................................................................................................80
8.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 80
8.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................. 80
8.2 System Information ...................................................................................................................... 80
8.3 General Setup ............................................................................................................................... 82
8.4 Introduction to VLANs ................................................................................................................... 84
8.5 Switch Setup ................................................................................................................................... 85
8.6 IP Setup ........................................................................................................................................... 86
8.6.1 Management IP Addresses ..................................................................................................86
8.7 Port Setup ....................................................................................................................................... 88
8.8 PoE Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 90
8.8.1 PoE Time Range Setup ......................................................................................................... 92
8.8.2 PoE Setup .............................................................................................................................. 93
8.9 Interface Setup ............................................................................................................................... 96
8.10 IPv6 ................................................................................................................................................. 97
8.10.1 IPv6 Interface Status ........................................................................................................... 97
8.10.2 IPv6 Configuration .............................................................................................................. 99
8.10.3 IPv6 Global Setup .............................................................................................................. 100
8.10.4 IPv6 Interface Setup .......................................................................................................... 101
8.10.5 IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup .......................................................................................... 102
8.10.6 IPv6 Global Address Setup ...............................................................................................103
8.10.7 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup ....................................................................................... 103
8.10.8 IPv6 Neighbor Setup ......................................................................................................... 104
8.10.9 DHCPv6 Client Setup ........................................................................................................ 106
8.11 DNS ............................................................................................................................................... 107
8.12 Cloud Management .................................................................................................................. 107
8.12.1 Nebula Control Center Discovery ................................................................................... 108
8.12.2 Nebula Switch Registration ..............................................................................................108
Table of Contents
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
8
Chapter 9
VLAN..................................................................................................................................................110
9.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 110
9.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................... 110
9.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................... 111
9.2 VLAN Status .................................................................................................................................. 114
9.2.1 VLAN Detail .......................................................................................................................... 115
9.3 VLAN Configuration .................................................................................................................... 115
9.4 Configure a Static VLAN ............................................................................................................ 116
9.5 Configure VLAN Port Setting ...................................................................................................... 118
9.6 Subnet Based VLANs .................................................................................................................... 119
9.6.1 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN ....................................................................................... 120
9.7 Protocol Based VLANs .................................................................................................................. 121
9.7.1 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN .................................................................................... 122
9.8 Voice VLAN Setup ........................................................................................................................ 123
9.9 MAC Based VLAN ......................................................................................................................... 125
9.10 Vendor ID Based VLAN .............................................................................................................. 126
9.11 Port-Based VLAN Setup ............................................................................................................. 128
9.11.1 Configure a Port Based VLAN ......................................................................................... 128
Chapter 10
Static MAC Forward Setup ..............................................................................................................131
10.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 131
10.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 131
10.2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding ....................................................................................... 131
Chapter 11
Static Multicast Forwarding.............................................................................................................133
11.1 Static Multicast Forward Setup Overview ............................................................................... 133
11.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 133
11.1.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 133
11.2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding .................................................................................. 134
Chapter 12
Filtering..............................................................................................................................................136
12.1 Filtering Overview ...................................................................................................................... 136
12.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 136
12.2 Configure a Filtering Rule .......................................................................................................... 136
Chapter 13
Spanning Tree Protocol ...................................................................................................................138
13.1 Spanning Tree Protocol Overview ........................................................................................... 138
13.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 138
Table of Contents
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
9
13.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 138
13.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen ..................................................................................... 141
13.3 Spanning Tree Configuration ................................................................................................... 142
13.4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol ............................................................................. 142
13.5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status ......................................................................................144
13.6 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol ......................................................................... 146
13.6.1 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Port Configuration .................................................... 149
13.7 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status ...................................................................................150
13.8 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol ................................................................. 153
13.9 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status ........................................................................ 155
13.10 Technical Reference ................................................................................................................ 156
13.10.1 MSTP Network Example .................................................................................................. 156
13.10.2 MST Region ....................................................................................................................... 157
13.10.3 MST Instance .................................................................................................................... 157
13.10.4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) ............................................................... 158
Chapter 14
Bandwidth Control ...........................................................................................................................159
14.1 Bandwidth Control Overview ................................................................................................... 159
14.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 159
14.2 Bandwidth Control Setup .......................................................................................................... 159
Chapter 15
Broadcast Storm Control .................................................................................................................161
15.1 Broadcast Storm Control Overview .........................................................................................161
15.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 161
15.2 Broadcast Storm Control Setup ................................................................................................ 161
Chapter 16
Mirroring............................................................................................................................................163
16.1 Mirroring Overview .................................................................................................................... 163
16.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 163
16.2 Port Mirroring Setup .................................................................................................................... 163
Chapter 17
Link Aggregation .......... .... .... .... .................. .... ... .... .................. .... .... ... ................... .... ... .... ...............165
17.1 Link Aggregation Overview ...................................................................................................... 165
17.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 165
17.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 165
17.2 Link Aggregation Status ............................................................................................................. 166
17.3 Link Aggregation Setting .......................................................................................................... 167
17.3.1 Link Aggregation Control Protocol .............................................................................. 169
17.4 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 170
Table of Contents
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
10
17.4.1 Static Trunking Example ................................................................................................... 170
Chapter 18
Port Authentication ..........................................................................................................................172
18.1 Port Authentication Overview ................................................................................................. 172
18.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 172
18.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 172
18.1.3 MAC Authentication ........................................................................................................ 173
18.2 Port Authentication Configuration ........................................................................................... 174
18.3 Activate IEEE 802.1x Security ................................................................................................... 174
18.3.1 Guest VLAN ....................................................................................................................... 176
18.4 Activate MAC Authentication ................................................................................................. 178
Chapter 19
Port Security......................................................................................................................................181
19.1 Port Security Overview .............................................................................................................. 181
19.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 181
19.2 Port Security Setup ...................................................................................................................... 181
Chapter 20
Time Range.......................................................................................................................................183
20.1 Time Range Overview ............................................................................................................... 183
20.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 183
20.2 Configuring Time Range ............................................................................................................ 183
Chapter 21
Classifier............................................................................................................................................185
21.1 Classifier Overview ..................................................................................................................... 185
21.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 185
21.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 185
21.2 Classifier Status ............................................................................................................................ 185
21.3 Classifier Configuration ............................................................................................................. 186
21.3.1 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration Summary ............................................... 190
21.4 Classifier Global Setting Configuration ................................................................................... 191
21.5 Classifier Example ....................................................................................................................... 192
Chapter 22
Policy Rule ........................................................................................................................................194
22.1 Policy Rules Overview ............................................................................................................... 194
22.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 194
22.2 Configuring Policy Rules ............................................................................................................ 194
22.3 Policy Example ............................................................................................................................ 197
Table of Contents
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
11
Chapter 23
Queuing Method..............................................................................................................................198
23.1 Queuing Method Overview ..................................................................................................... 198
23.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 198
23.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 198
23.2 Configuring Queuing ................................................................................................................. 199
Chapter 24
Multicast............................................................................................................................................201
24.1 Multicast Overview ..................................................................................................................... 201
24.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 201
24.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 201
24.2 Multicast Setup ........................................................................................................................... 205
24.3 IPv4 Multicast Status .................................................................................................................. 205
24.3.1 IGMP Snooping ................................................................................................................. 206
24.3.2 IGMP Snooping VLAN ...................................................................................................... 209
24.3.3 IGMP Filtering Profile ........................................................................................................ 210
24.4 IPv6 Multicast Status .................................................................................................................. 211
24.4.1 MLD Snooping-proxy ........................................................................................................ 212
24.4.2 MLD Snooping-proxy VLAN .............................................................................................. 212
24.4.3 MLD Snooping-proxy VLAN Port Role Setting ................................................................. 214
24.4.4 MLD Snooping-proxy Filtering .......................................................................................... 216
24.4.5 MLD Snooping-proxy Filtering Profile ............................................................................... 217
24.5 General MVR Configuration ..................................................................................................... 218
24.5.1 MVR Group Configuration .............................................................................................. 220
24.5.2 MVR Configuration Example ........................................................................................... 222
Chapter 25
AAA...................................................................................................................................................224
25.1 AAA Overview ........................................................................................................................... 224
25.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 224
25.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 225
25.2 AAA Screens ............................................................................................................................... 225
25.3 RADIUS Server Setup .................................................................................................................. 226
25.4 TACACS+ Server Setup .............................................................................................................. 227
25.5 AAA Setup .................................................................................................................................. 229
25.6 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 231
25.6.1 Vendor Specific Attribute ................................................................................................ 231
25.6.2 Supported RADIUS Attributes ........................................................................................... 233
25.6.3 Attributes Used for Authentication .................................................................................. 233
25.6.4 Attributes Used for Accounting ....................................................................................... 234
Table of Contents
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
12
Chapter 26
IP Source Guard...............................................................................................................................237
26.1 IP Source Guard Overview ........................................................................................................ 237
26.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 237
26.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................ 238
26.2 IP Source Guard .......................................................................................................................... 239
26.3 IPv4 Source Guard Setup .......................................................................................................... 240
26.4 IPv4 Source Guard Static Binding ............................................................................................. 240
26.5 DHCP Snooping .......................................................................................................................... 242
26.6 DHCP Snooping Configure ........................................................................................................ 245
26.6.1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure ...................................................................................... 246
26.6.2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure .................................................................................... 247
26.6.3 DHCP Snooping VLAN Port Configure ............................................................................ 248
26.7 ARP Inspection Status ................................................................................................................. 249
26.7.1 ARP Inspection VLAN Status ............................................................................................. 250
26.7.2 ARP Inspection Log Status ................................................................................................ 251
26.8 ARP Inspection Configure .......................................................................................................... 252
26.8.1 ARP Inspection Port Configure ........................................................................................ 253
26.8.2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure ..................................................................................... 255
26.9 IPv6 Source Guard Overview ................................................................................................... 255
26.10 IPv6 Source Binding Status ....................................................................................................... 256
26.11 IPv6 Static Binding Setup ........................................................................................................ 257
26.12 IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup ............................................................................................ 258
26.13 IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup ................................................................................................ 259
26.14 IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup .................................................................................................... 260
26.15 IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup ..................................................................................................... 261
26.16 IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup ............................................................................................................. 262
26.17 Technical Reference ................................................................................................................ 263
26.17.1 DHCP Snooping Overview ............................................................................................. 263
26.17.2 ARP Inspection Overview ............................................................................................... 265
Chapter 27
Loop Guard ......................................................................................................................................267
27.1 Loop Guard Overview .............................................................................................................. 267
27.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 267
27.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 267
27.2 Loop Guard Setup ...................................................................................................................... 269
Chapter 28
VLAN Mapping.................................................................................................................................270
28.1 VLAN Mapping Overview ......................................................................................................... 270
28.1.1 VLAN Mapping Example .................................................................................................. 270
28.1.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 270
Table of Contents
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
13
28.2 Enable VLAN Mapping .............................................................................................................. 271
28.2.1 VLAN Mapping Configure ............................................................................................... 271
Chapter 29
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling..............................................................................................................273
29.1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Overview ......................................................................................273
29.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 273
29.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 273
29.2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling ................................................................................... 274
Chapter 30
PPPoE.................................................................................................................................................277
30.1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Overview ..................................................................................... 277
30.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 277
30.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 277
30.2 PPPoE Screen .............................................................................................................................. 279
30.3 PPPoE Intermediate Agent ....................................................................................................... 280
30.3.1 PPPoE IA Per-Port .............................................................................................................. 281
30.3.2 PPPoE IA Per-Port Per-VLAN ............................................................................................ 282
30.3.3 PPPoE IA for VLAN ............................................................................................................ 283
Chapter 31
Error Disable......................................................................................................................................285
31.1 Error Disable Overview .............................................................................................................. 285
31.1.1 CPU Protection Overview ................................................................................................ 285
31.1.2 Error-Disable Recovery Overview .................................................................................... 285
31.1.3 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 285
31.2 Error Disable Screen .................................................................................................................... 286
31.3 Error-Disable Status .................................................................................................................... 286
31.4 CPU Protection Configuration .................................................................................................. 288
31.5 Error-Disable Detect Configuration ......................................................................................... 289
31.6 Error-Disable Recovery Configuration .....................................................................................290
Chapter 32
Private VLAN....... .... .... .................. .... .... ... ..................................... .... ... .... .........................................291
32.1 Private VLAN Overview ............................................................................................................. 291
32.2 Configuring Private VLAN .......................................................................................................... 291
Chapter 33
Green Ethernet.............. .... ................... ... .... .... .................. .... ... .... .................. .... .... .... ......................293
33.1 Green Ethernet Overview ......................................................................................................... 293
33.2 Configuring Green Ethernet ...................................................................................................... 293
Table of Contents
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
14
Chapter 34
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) .............................................................................................295
34.1 LLDP Overview ............................................................................................................................ 295
34.2 LLDP-MED Overview ................................................................................................................... 296
34.3 LLDP Screens ............................................................................................................................... 297
34.4 LLDP Local Status ....................................................................................................................... 298
34.4.1 LLDP Local Port Status Detail ..........................................................................................299
34.5 LLDP Remote Status ................................................................................................................... 302
34.5.1 LLDP Remote Port Status Detail ...................................................................................... 303
34.6 LLDP Configuration .................................................................................................................... 309
34.6.1 Basic TLV Setting ............................................................................................................... 310
34.6.2 Org-specific TLV Setting .................................................................................................. 311
34.7 LLDP-MED Configuration ........................................................................................................... 312
34.8 LLDP-MED Network Policy ......................................................................................................... 313
34.9 LLDP-MED Location ................................................................................................................... 314
Chapter 35
Anti-Arpscan ....................................................................................................................................317
35.1 Anti-Arpscan Overview .............................................................................................................. 317
35.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 317
35.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 317
35.2 Anti-Arpscan Status ................................................................................................................... 318
35.3 Anti-Arpscan Host Status ........................................................................................................... 318
35.4 Anti-Arpscan Trust Host ............................................................................................................. 319
35.5 Anti-Arpscan Configure ............................................................................................................ 320
Chapter 36
BPDU Guard......................................................................................................................................322
36.1 BPDU Guard Overview .............................................................................................................. 322
36.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 322
36.2 BPDU Guard Status ..................................................................................................................... 322
36.3 BPDU Guard Configuration ....................................................................................................... 323
Chapter 37
OAM..................................................................................................................................................325
37.1 OAM Overview .......................................................................................................................... 325
37.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 325
37.2 OAM Status .................................................................................................................................. 325
37.2.1 OAM Details ....................................................................................................................... 326
37.3 OAM Configuration .................................................................................................................... 329
37.4 OAM Remote Loopback ........................................................................................................... 331
Table of Contents
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
15
Chapter 38
ZULD...................................................................................................................................................332
38.1 ZULD Overview ........................................................................................................................... 332
38.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 332
38.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 332
38.2 ZULD Status .................................................................................................................................. 333
38.3 ZULD Configuration ................................................................................................................... 334
Chapter 39
Static Route.......................................................................................................................................336
39.1 Static Routing Overview .......................................................................................................... 336
39.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 336
39.2 Static Routing .............................................................................................................................. 337
39.3 IPv4 Static Route ........................................................................................................................ 337
Chapter 40
Differentiated Services ....................................................................................................................339
40.1 DiffServ Overview ...................................................................................................................... 339
40.1.1 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior ........................................................................................... 339
40.1.2 DiffServ Network Example ...............................................................................................339
40.2 Activating DiffServ ..................................................................................................................... 340
40.3 DSCP Settings .............................................................................................................................. 341
40.3.1 Configuring DSCP Settings ...............................................................................................341
Chapter 41
DHCP .................................................................................................................................................343
41.1 DHCP Overview .......................................................................................................................... 343
41.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 343
41.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 343
41.2 DHCP Configuration ................................................................................................................... 344
41.3 DHCPv4 Status ........................................................................................................................... 344
41.4 DHCPv4 Relay ............................................................................................................................ 344
41.4.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information ................................................................................... 345
41.4.2 DHCPv4 Option 82 Profile ................................................................................................. 346
41.4.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Global Relay ................................................................................. 347
41.4.4 DHCPv4 Global Relay Port Configure ........................................................................... 348
41.4.5 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example .................................................................. 349
41.4.6 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings ................................................................................. 349
41.4.7 DHCPv4 VLAN Port Configure ........................................................................................ 350
41.4.8 Example: DHCP Relay for Two VLANs ............................................................................. 351
41.5 DHCPv6 Relay ............................................................................................................................. 352
Table of Contents
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
16
Chapter 42
ARP Setup..........................................................................................................................................354
42.1 ARP Overview ............................................................................................................................ 354
42.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 354
42.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 354
42.2 ARP Setup .................................................................................................................................... 356
42.2.1 ARP Learning .................................................................................................................... 356
Chapter 43
Maintenance....................................................................................................................................358
43.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 358
43.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 358
43.2 The Maintenance Screen ......................................................................................................... 358
43.3 Erase Running-Configuration ................................................................................................... 360
43.4 Save Configuration .................................................................................................................... 360
43.5 Reboot System ............................................................................................................................ 361
43.5.1 Factory Default ................................................................................................................. 361
43.5.2 Custom Default ................................................................................................................ 362
43.6 Firmware Upgrade ..................................................................................................................... 362
43.7 Restore Configuration .............................................................................................................. 364
43.8 Backup Configuration .............................................................................................................. 364
43.9 Auto Configuration ................................................................................................................... 365
43.10 Tech-Support ............................................................................................................................ 366
43.10.1 Tech-Support Download ................................................................................................ 367
43.11 Certificates ................................................................................................................................ 368
43.11.1 HTTPS Certificates ............................................................................................................ 369
43.12 Technical Reference ................................................................................................................ 369
43.12.1 FTP Command Line ......................................................................................................... 369
43.12.2 Filename Conventions ................................................................................................... 370
43.12.3 FTP Command Line Procedure ..................................................................................... 370
43.12.4 GUI-based FTP Clients ..................................................................................................... 371
43.12.5 FTP Restrictions ................................................................................................................ 371
Chapter 44
Access Control.................................................................................................................................372
44.1 Access Control Overview ......................................................................................................... 372
44.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 372
44.2 The Access Control Main Screen .............................................................................................. 372
44.3 Configuring SNMP .................................................................................................................... 373
44.3.1 Configuring SNMP Trap Group ..................................................................................... 374
44.3.2 Enabling/Disabling Sending of SNMP Traps on a Port ................................................... 375
44.3.3 Configuring SNMP User .................................................................................................. 376
44.4 Logins .......................................................................................................................................... 378
Table of Contents
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
17
44.5 Service Access Control ............................................................................................................ 380
44.6 Remote Management ........................................................................................................... 380
44.7 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 381
44.7.1 About SNMP ...................................................................................................................... 382
44.7.2 SSH Overview ..................................................................................................................... 385
44.7.3 Introduction to HTTPS ........................................................................................................ 386
44.7.4 Google Chrome Warning Messages .............................................................................. 390
Chapter 45
Diagnostic.........................................................................................................................................392
45.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 392
45.2 Diagnostic .................................................................................................................................. 392
Chapter 46
System Log........................................................................................................................................394
46.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 394
46.2 System Log .................................................................................................................................. 394
Chapter 47
Syslog Setup .....................................................................................................................................395
47.1 Syslog Overview .......................................................................................................................... 395
47.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 395
47.2 Syslog Setup ................................................................................................................................ 395
Chapter 48
Cluster Management.......................................................................................................................398
48.1 Cluster Management Overview ..............................................................................................398
48.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 399
48.2 Cluster Management Status ..................................................................................................... 399
48.3 Clustering Management Configuration ................................................................................ 400
48.4 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 401
48.4.1 Cluster Member Switch Management .......................................................................... 402
Chapter 49
MAC Table........................................................................................................................................404
49.1 MAC Table Overview ................................................................................................................ 404
49.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 404
49.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 404
49.2 Viewing the MAC Table ............................................................................................................ 405
Chapter 50
ARP Table..........................................................................................................................................407
50.1 ARP Table Overview .................................................................................................................. 407
Table of Contents
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
18
50.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 407
50.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 407
50.2 Viewing the ARP Table ............................................................................................................... 407
Chapter 51
Path MTU Table.................................................................................................................................409
51.1 Path MTU Overview ................................................................................................................... 409
51.2 Viewing the Path MTU Table ..................................................................................................... 409
Chapter 52
Configure Clone............ .... .... .................. .... .... ... ..................................... .... ... .... ..............................410
52.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 410
52.2 Configure Clone ........................................................................................................................ 410
Chapter 53
IPv6 Neighbor Table.........................................................................................................................413
53.1 IPv6 Neighbor Table Overview ................................................................................................. 413
53.2 Viewing the IPv6 Neighbor Table ............................................................................................. 413
Chapter 54
Port Status .........................................................................................................................................415
54.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 415
54.2 Port Status ................................................................................................................................... 415
54.2.1 Port Details ...................................................................................................................... 416
54.2.2 DDMI ................................................................................................................................... 419
54.2.3 DDMI Details ...................................................................................................................... 419
54.2.4 Port Utilization ................................................................................................................. 421
Part III: Troubleshooting and Appendices..................................................422
Chapter 55
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................423
55.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ............................................................................... 423
55.2 Switch Access and Login ........................................................................................................... 424
55.3 Switch Configuration .................................................................................................................. 425
Appendix A Customer Support ..................................................................................................... 427
Appendix B Common Services...................................................................................................... 433
Appendix C IPv6.............................................................................................................................. 436
Appendix D Legal Information ...................................................................................................... 444
20
PART I
User’s Guide
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
21
CHAPTER 1
Getting to Know Your Switch
1.1 Introduction
This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Switch. The GS2220 Series consists of
the following models:
• GS2220-10
• GS2220-10HP
• GS2220-28
• GS2220-28HP
• GS2220-50
• GS2220-50HP
References to PoE model(s) in this User's Guide only apply to GS2220-10HP, GS2220-28HP and GS2220-
50HP.
The Switch is a layer-2 standalone Ethernet switch.
The Switch supports NebulaFlex which can set the Switch to operate in either standalone or Nebula
cloud management mode. When the Switch is in standalone mode, it can be configured and
managed by the web configurator. When the Switch is in Nebula cloud management mode, it can be
managed and provisioned by the Zyxel Nebula Control Center (NCC) (see Section 8.12 on page 107).
The following table describes the hardware features of the Switch by model.
Table 1 GS2220 Series Comparison Table
FEATURE GS2220-10 GS2220-10HP GS2220-28 GS2220-28HP GS2220-50 GS2220-50HP
GbE combo ports
(dual personality
interfaces)
22 44 4 4
1 Gbps SFP
interfaces
00 00 2 2
10/100/1000 Mbps
Ethernet ports
80 240 480
10/100/1000 Mbps
PoE ports
08 024 0 48
Fan 010212
Wall-mount Yes Yes No No No No
Rack-mount Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
22
Figure 1 Switch Application
1.1.1 Management Method
With its built-in web configurator, managing and configuring the Switch is easy. In addition, the Switch
can also be managed via Telnet, any terminal emulator program using the Command Line Interface
(CLI), or third-party SNMP management.
1.1.2 Management Modes
NebulaFlex means you can set the Switch to operate in either direct standalone or cloud mode (but not
both at the same time).
Use the web configurator to configure and manage the Switch directly in standalone mode or use
Nebula Control Center (NCC) to configure and manage the Switch in cloud mode. The Nebula Control
Center (NCC) is an alternative cloud-based network management system that allows you to remotely
manage and monitor the Switch. You may also access a minimized version of the web configurator in
cloud mode.
Nebula Cloud Management
To have Nebula manage the Switch, you must first register it at the Nebula web portal at https://
nebula.zyxel.com, and ensure that Nebula Control Center Discovery is enabled in Basic Setting > Cloud
Management > Nebula Control Center Discovery in the Switch web configurator.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
23
Note: See the Switch’s datasheet for the feature differences between standalone and
Nebula cloud management modes. You can find the Switch’s datasheet at the Zyxel
website.
See the NCC (Nebula Control Center) User’s Guide for how to configure the Switch using Nebula.
1.1.3 Mode Changing
This section describes how to change the Switch’s management mode.
Note: If you change the Switch’s management mode from standalone mode to Nebula-
managed mode, the configuration settings of the Switch will be overwritten with what
you have configured in Nebula.
Note: If you change the Switch’s management mode from Nebula-managed mode to
standalone mode, the Switch will reset to its factory-default settings
From Standalone to Nebula Cloud Management
To manage your Switch via Nebula, connect the Switch to the Internet, and register it to a site and
organization at the Nebula web portal (https://nebula.zyxel.com).
See the following steps or the Switch Quick Start Guide for how to do device registration.
Go to the NCC to Register the Switch
1Go to the Nebula web portal in one of three ways.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
24
• Type https://nebula.zyxel.com in a supported web browser. See the Nebula User’s Guide for more
information about supported browsers.
• Click Nebula Mode in the Switch’s login page.
• Click the Nebula icon in the upper right corner of the Switch’s web configurator.
2Click Login in the Nebula web portal. Enter your myZyxel account information. You’ll be redirected to
another screen where you can sign up for a myZyxel account if you don’t have one.
3Create an organization and a site or select an existing site.
4Register the Switch by entering its MAC address and serial number and assign it to the site. The serial
number and MAC address can be found in the Status screen or the device back label on the Switch.
Use the Zyxel Nebula Mobile App to Register the Switch
1Download and open the Zyxel Nebula Mobile app in your mobile device. Click Sign Up to create a
myZyxel account or enter your existing account information to log in.
2You should already have created an organization and a site.
3Select a site and scan the Switch's QR code to add it to the site. You can find the QR code:
• On a label on the Switch or
• On its box or
• In the web configurator at Basic > Cloud Management > Nebula Switch Registration.
See Section 3.3 on page 41 for more information about the CLOUD LED or Section 7.2 on page 74 for
more information about the Hybrid Mode field in the Status screen to see if the Switch goes into Nebula
cloud management mode successfully.
Note: The Switch goes into Nebula-managed mode automatically after it can access the
Nebula web portal and is successfully registered there. Its login password and settings
are then overwritten with what you have configured in the Nebula web portal.
From Nebula-managed to Standalone
To return to direct management standalone mode, just remove (unregister) the Switch from the
organization/site in the Nebula web portal. The Switch will reboot and restore the factory default
settings.
1.1.4 ZON Utility
You can view, manage, and configure the Switch and its neighboring devices using its built-in web
configurator, including the Neighbor Management feature(Section 7.2.1 on page 76).
In addition, Zyxel offers a proprietary software program called Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility, It is a tool
that assists you to set up and maintain network devices in a more simple and efficient way. You can
download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on a PC (Windows operation system). For more
information on ZON Utility, see Section 4.3 on page 46.
1.1.5 PoE
The Switch is a Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) because it provides a source of power via its Ethernet
ports. Each device that receives power through an Ethernet port is a Powered Device (PD).
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
25
The Switch can adjust the power supplied to each PD according to the PoE standard the PD supports.
PoE standards are:
• IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE)
• IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet (PoE) Plus
The following table describes the PoE features of the Switch by model.
1.2 Example Applications
This section shows a few examples of using the Switch in various network environments. Note that the
Switch in the figure is just an example Switch and not your actual Switch.
1.2.1 PoE Example Application
The following example figure shows a Switch supplying PoE (Power over Ethernet) to Powered Devices
(PDs) such as an IP camera, a wireless router, an IP telephone and a general outdoor router that are not
within reach of a power outlet.
Figure 2 PoE Example Application
Table 2 Models and PoE Features
POE FEATURES GS2220-10HP GS2220-28HP GS2220-50HP
IEEE 802.3af PoE Yes Yes Yes
IEEE 802.3at PoE Plus Yes Yes Yes
Power Management Mode Consumption
Classification
Consumption
Classification
Consumption
Classification
PoE Power Budget 180W 375W 375W
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
26
1.2.2 Backbone Example Application
The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future.
The Switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users. You can connect computers and
servers directly to the Switch’s port or connect other switches to the Switch.
In this example, all computers can share high-speed applications on the server. To expand the network,
simply add more networking devices such as switches, routers, computers, print servers etc.
Figure 3 Backbone Example Application
1.2.3 Bridging/Fiber Uplink Example Application
In this example, the Switch connects different company departments (RD and Sales) to the corporate
backbone. It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks. All
users that need high bandwidth can connect to high-speed department servers via the Switch. You can
provide a super-fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet/SFP port on the Switch.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
27
Figure 4 Bridging/Fiber Uplink Example Application
1.2.4 High Performance Switching Example
The Switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth. In the following example, use
link aggregation (trunking) to connect these two networks. The Switch can provide high bandwidth at
much lower cost while still being able to use existing network adapters and switches. Moreover, the
current LAN structure can be retained as all ports can freely communicate with each other.
This helps you switch to higher-speed LANs without the need for replacing all existing Ethernet cables
and adapter cards, restructuring your network and complex maintenance.
Figure 5 High Performance Switching
1.2.5 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Application Example
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Stations on a logical network belong to one or more groups. With VLAN, a station cannot
directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group(s) unless such traffic first goes through
a router.
For more information on VLANs, refer to Chapter 9 on page 110.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
28
1.2.5.1 Tag-based VLAN Example
Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain, thus increasing network
performance by reducing broadcast traffic. VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding,
moving or changing ports without any re-cabling.
Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server. In the
following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1. Ports can belong to
other VLAN groups too.
Figure 6 Shared Server Using VLAN Example
1.2.6 IPv6 Support
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in
IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. At the time
of writing, the Switch supports the following features.
• Static address assignment and stateless auto-configuration
• Neighbor Discovery Protocol (a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices in a network)
• Remote Management using ping SNMP, SSH, telnet, HTTP and FTP services
• ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform diagnostic functions, such as
"ping”
• IPv4/IPv6 dual stack; the Switch can run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time
• DHCPv6 client and relay
• Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping and proxy
For more information on IPv6, refer to Appendix C on page 436 and the CLI Reference Guide.
1.3 Ways to Manage the Switch
Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a (supported)
web browser. See Chapter 4 on page 43.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
29
• Command Line Interface. Line commands offer an alternative to the Web Configurator and may be
necessary to configure advanced features. See the CLI Reference Guide.
• FTP. Use File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore. See Section
43.12.1 on page 369.
• SNMP. The device can be monitored and/or managed by an SNMP manager. See Section 44.7 on
page 381.
• Cluster Management. Cluster Management allows you to manage multiple switches through one
switch, called the cluster manager. See Chapter 48 on page 398.
• ZON Utility. ZON Utility is a program designed to help you deploy and perform initial setup on a
network more efficiently. See Section 4.3 on page 46.
• NCC (Zyxel Nebula Control Center). With the NCC, you can remotely manage and monitor the
Switch through a cloud-based network management system. See Section 8.12 on page 107 or the
NCC User’s Guide for detailed information about how to access the NCC and manage your Switch
via the NCC. See the NCC User’s Guide for how to configure Nebula managed devices.
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the Switch
Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more
effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of
characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working
configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your
password, you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier
configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the Switch. You could simply restore your
last configuration.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
30
CHAPTER 2
Hardware Installation and
Connection
2.1 Installation Scenarios
This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch.
The Switch can be:
• Placed on a desktop.
• Wall-mounted on a wall.
• Rack-mounted on a standard EIA rack.
Note: Ask an authorized technician to attach the Switch to the rack/wall. See the Installation
Requirements sections in this chapter to know the types of screws and screw drivers for
each mounting method.
WARNING! Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit.
WARNING! This Switch is not suitable for use in locations where children
are likely to be present.
See Table 1 on page 21 for the comparison table of the hardware installation methods for each model.
2.2 Desktop Installation Procedure
1Make sure the Switch is clean and dry.
2Set the Switch on a smooth, level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and the
connected cables. Make sure there is a power outlet nearby.
3Make sure there is at least 40 mm of clearance from the bottom to the Switch, and make sure there is
enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the
power cord. This is especially important for enclosed rack installations.
4Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet.
5Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the Switch. These rubber feet help protect the
Switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
31
Figure 7 Attaching Rubber Feet
Note: Do NOT block the ventilation holes.
Note: Do NOT store things on the Switch, and allow clearance next to the ventilation holes to
prevent your Switch from overheating. This is especially crucial when your Switch
doesn’t have fan modules.
Do NOT block the ventilation holes nor store things on the Switch. Allow
clearance for the ventilation holes to prevent your Switch from
overheating. Overheating could affect the performance of your Switch,
or even damage it.
2.3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
The Switch can be mounted on an EIA standard size, 19-inch rack or in a wiring closet with other
equipment. Follow the steps below to mount your Switch on a standard EIA rack using a rack-mounting
kit.
Note: Make sure there is enough clearance between each equipment on the rack for air
circulation.
2.3.1 Installation Requirements
• Two mounting brackets.
• Eight M3 flat head screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver.
• Four M5 flat head screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver.
Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit.
2.3.1.1 Precautions
• Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains. The
maximum weight a bracket can hold is 21.5 Kg.
• Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top-heavy. Take all
necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
32
2.3.2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch
1Position a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch, lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with
the screw holes on the side of the Switch.
Figure 8 Attaching the Mounting Brackets
2Using a #2 Philips screwdriver, install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into
the Switch.
3Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch.
4You may now mount the Switch on a rack. Proceed to the next section.
2.3.3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
1Position a mounting bracket (that is already attached to the Switch) on one side of the rack, lining up
the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack.
Figure 9 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
2Using a #2 Philips screwdriver, install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into
the rack.
Note: Make sure you tighten all the four screws to prevent the Switch from getting slanted.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
33
3Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack.
2.4 Wall Mounting (GS2220-10 and GS2220-10HP Only)
The GS2220-10 and GS2220-10HP can be mounted on a wall. You may need screw anchors if mounting
on a concrete or brick wall.
2.4.1 Installation Requirement
• Distance between holes: 78mm
• Two M4 screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver
• Two screw anchors (optional)
1Select a position free of obstructions on a wall strong enough to hold the weight of the Switch.
2Mark two holes on the wall at the appropriate distance apart for the screws.
WARNING! Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside
the wall when drilling holes for the screws.
3If using screw anchors, drill two holes for the screw anchors into the wall. Push the anchors into the full
depth of the holes, then insert the screws into the anchors. Do not insert the screws all the way in - leave
a small gap of about 0.5 cm.
If not using screw anchors, use a screwdriver to insert the screws into the wall. Do not insert the screws all
the way in - leave a gap of about 0.5 cm.
4Make sure the screws are fastened well enough to hold the weight of the Switch with the connection
cables.
5Align the holes on the back of the Switch with the screws on the wall. Hang the Switch on the screws.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
34
Note: Make sure there is enough clearance between the wall and the Switch to allow
ventilation.
WARNING! The Switch should be wall-mounted horizontally, and make
sure the front panel is facing down. The Switch's side panels with
ventilation slots should not be facing up or down as this position is less
safe.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
35
CHAPTER 3
Hardware Overview
This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the
hardware connections.
3.1 Front Panel Connections
The figure below shows the front panel of the Switch.
Figure 10 Front Panel: GS2220-10
Figure 11 Front Panel: GS2220-10HP
Figure 12 Front Panel: GS2220-28
Figure 13 Front Panel: GS2220-28HP
Figure 14 Front Panel: GS2220-50
Figure 15 Front Panel: GS2220-50HP
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
36
The following table describes the ports.
3.1.1 SFP Slots
These are slots for SFP (Small Form-Factor Pluggable) transceivers. A transceiver is a single unit that
houses a transmitter and a receiver. The Switch does not come with transceivers. You must use
transceivers that comply with the Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) Transceiver MultiSource Agreement
(MSA). See the SFF committee’s INF-8074i specification Rev 1.0 for details.
You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating. You can use different transceivers to
connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber-optic or even copper cable connectors.
• Type: SFP connection interface
• Connection speed: 100/1000 Mbps per second
To avoid possible eye injury, do not look into an operating fiber-optic
module’s connectors.
3.1.1.1 Transceiver Installation
Use the following steps to install a transceiver.
Table 3 Panel Connections
CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION
2 SFP Slots Use SFP transceivers in these ports for high-bandwidth backbone connections.
8/24/48 1000Base-T
RJ-45 Ethernet Ports
These are 1000Base-T auto-negotiating and auto-crossover Ethernet ports.
Connect these ports to a computer, a hub, a router, or an Ethernet switch.
2/4 GbE Combo
Ports (Dual
Personality
Interfaces)
Each interface has one 1000Base-T copper RJ-45 port and one SFP slot, with one port active
at a time.
• 1000Base-T Ports:
Connect these ports to a computer, an Ethernet switch or router.
•SFP Slots:
Use Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) transceivers in these ports for fiber-optic
connections to an Ethernet switch or router.
Reset Press the RESET button to reboot the Switch without turning the power off. See Section 3.3 on
page 40 for more information about the LED behavior.
Restore Press the RESTORE button for three to six seconds to have the Switch automatically reboot
and restore the last-saved custom default file. See Section 3.3 on page 41 for more
information about the LED behavior.
Press the RESTORE button for more than seven seconds to have the Switch automatically
reboot and restore the factory default file. See Section 3.3 on page 41 for more information
about the LED behavior.
PoE Mode
(only available for
GS2220-50HP)
Push or release this button to change how the Link/ACT LED works.
• Each Ethernet port’s LED is changed to act as a PoE Mode LED by pushing the PoE MODE
button on the front panel.
• Each Ethernet port’s LED is changed back to act as a Link/ACT LED by releasing the PoE
MODE button on the front panel.
View the LEDs to ensure proper functioning of the Switch and as an aid in troubleshooting
(see Section 3.3 on page 41).
Console Port Only connect this port to your computer (using an RS-232 cable) if you want to configure the
Switch using the command line interface (CLI) via the console port.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
37
1Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down.
Figure 16 Transceiver Installation Example
2Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place.
3The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver. Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning
properly.
Figure 17 Installed Transceiver
3.1.1.2 Transceiver Removal
Use the following steps to remove a transceiver.
1Open the transceiver’s latch (latch styles vary).
Figure 18 Opening the Transceiver’s Latch Example
2Pull the transceiver out of the slot.
Figure 19 Transceiver Removal Example
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
38
3.1.2 Ethernet Ports
The Switch has 1000Base-T auto-negotiating, auto-crossover Ethernet ports. In 10/100/1000 Mbps
Gigabit, the speed can be 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex
or full duplex.
An auto-negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed (10/100 Mbps and 1
Gbps) and full duplex mode of the connected device.
An auto-crossover (auto-MDI/MDI-X) port automatically works with a straight-through or crossover
Ethernet cable.
When auto-negotiation is turned on, an Ethernet port negotiates with the peer automatically to
determine the connection speed and duplex mode. If the peer Ethernet port does not support auto-
negotiation or turns off this feature, the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal
on the cable. When the Switch’s auto-negotiation is turned off, an Ethernet port uses the pre-configured
speed and duplex mode when making a connection, thus requiring you to make sure that the settings
of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to connect.
3.1.2.1 Default Ethernet Negotiation Settings
The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the Switch are:
• Speed: Auto
•Duplex: Auto
• Flow control: Off
• Dual Personality Interface: Fiber-optic module first
3.1.2.2 Auto-Crossover
All ports support auto-crossover, that is auto-MDIX ports (Media Dependent Interface Crossover), so you
may use either a straight-through Ethernet cable or crossover Ethernet cable for all Gigabit port
connections. Auto-crossover ports automatically sense whether they need to function as crossover or
straight ports, so crossover cables can connect both computers and switches/hubs.
3.1.3 PoE (GS2220-10HP, GS2220-28HP and GS2220-50HP)
The Switch supports the IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE) and IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet
(PoE) plus. The Switch is a Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) because it provides a source of power via its
Ethernet ports. Each device that receives power through an Ethernet port is a Powered Device (PD).
3.1.4 Dual Personality Interfaces
A combo port is for uplink connections. It consists of a Gigabit Ethernet port for Ethernet connection,
and a SFP transceiver slot for fiber connection. The fiber connection takes priority if the corresponding
Gigabit port is also connected.
• 100 Mbps/1 Gbps - Connect these ports to high-bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches.
• Transceiver Slots - Use SFP transceivers in these slots for connections to backbone Ethernet switches.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
39
Figure 20 Combo Port Example: Gigabit Port and SFP Transceiver Slot
3.1.5 Console Port
For local management, you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the
following parameters:
• VT100 terminal emulation
• 115200 bps
• No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
• No flow control
Connect the male 9-pin end of the RS-232 console cable to the console port of the Switch. Connect the
female end to a serial port (COM1, COM2 or other COM port) of your computer.
3.2 Rear Panel
The following figures show the rear panels of the Switch. The rear panels contain:
Figure 21 Rear Panel: GS2220-10
Figure 22 Rear Panel: GS2220-10HP
Figure 23 Rear Panel: GS2220-28
Figure 24 Rear Panel: GS2220-28HP
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
40
Figure 25 Rear Panel: GS2220-50
Figure 26 Rear Panel: GS2220-50HP
3.2.1 Grounding
Grounding is a safety measure to have unused electricity return to the ground. It prevents damage to
the Switch, and protects you from electrocution.
Note: The Switch must be grounded by qualified service personnel.
1Remove the M4 ground screw from the Switch’s rear panel.
2Secure a green/yellow ground cable (16 AWG or smaller) to the Switch's rear panel using the M4 ground
screw.
3Attach the other end of the cable to the ground, either to the same ground electrode as the rack you
installed the device on or to the main grounding electrode of the building.
Follow your country's regulations and safety instructions to electrically ground the device properly.
Warning! Connect the ground cable before you connect any other
cables or wiring.
Figure 27 Grounding
3.2.2 AC Power Connection
Make sure you are using the correct power source and that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
41
The Switch uses two power supply modules, one of which is redundant, so if one power module fails the
system can operate on the remaining module.
Connecting the Power
Use the following procedures to connect the Switch to a power source after you have installed it in a
rack.
Note: Use the included power cord for the AC power connection.
1Connect the female end of the power cord to the AC power socket.
2Connect the other end of the cord to a power outlet.
Disconnecting the Power
The power input connectors can be disconnected from the power source individually.
1Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet.
2Disconnect the power cord from the AC power socket.
3.3 LEDs
The following table describes the LEDs.
Table 4 LEDs
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
PWR Green On The Switch is receiving power from the power source.
Blinking The Switch is returning to the last-saved custom default configuration settings.
Amber On The Switch is returning to its factory default configuration settings.
Off The Switch is not receiving power from the power source.
SYS (System) Green On The Switch is on and functioning properly.
Blinking The Switch is rebooting and performing self-diagnostic tests.
Red On The Switch is functioning abnormally.
Off The power is off or the system is not ready/malfunctioning.
CLOUD Green On The Switch has successfully connected to the NCC (Nebula Control Center).
Blinking The Switch cannot connect to the NCC because it is not registered.
Amber On The Switch is registered at the NCC but cannot connect to the NCC. Please
check the Internet connection of the Switch.
Blinking The Switch is not registered at the NCC and cannot connect to the NCC. Please
check the Internet connection of the Switch and register the Switch at NCC.
Off The Switch is operating in standalone mode. Nebula Control Center Discovery is
disabled in Basic > Cloud Management > Nebula Control Center Discovery in the
Switch Web Configurator.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
42
LOCATOR Blue On The Switch is uploading firmware. While the Switch is doing this, don’t turn off the
power.
Blinking Shows the actual location of the Switch between several devices in a rack. The
default timer is 30 minutes when you are configuring the Switch.
Off The locator is not functioning or malfunctioning.
PoE Usage MAX
(GS2220-10HP)
Bar1 is the bar at
the bottom; bar 5
is the bar at the
top.
Green
(Bar1-
Bar3)
On Each bar represents 20% of PoE Power consumption.
Bar 1: PoE power usage is below 20 percent of the power supplied budget.
Bar 2: PoE power usage is below 40 percent of the power supplied budget, but
over 20 percent of the power supplied budget.
Bar 3: PoE power usage is below 60 percent of the power supplied budget, but
over 40 percent of the power supplied budget.
Yellow
(Bar4)
On PoE power usage is below 80 percent of the power supplied budget, but over 60
percent of the power supplied budget.
Red
(Bar5)
On PoE power usage is more than 80 percent of the power supplied budget.
Blinking Less than 5 percent of the power supplied budget remains. 5 percent is the
default value.
Off PoE power usage is 0 percent of the power supplied budget.
PoE MAX
(GS2220-28HP
and GS2220-
50HP)
Amber On Less than 5 percent of the power supplied budget remains. 5 percent is the
default value.
Off The Switch has a sufficient power supplied budget.
RJ-45 Ethernet Port
LINK/ACT Green On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
Blinking The Switch is transmitting/receiving to/from a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network.
Amber On The link to a 100/10 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
Blinking The Switch is transmitting/receiving to/from a 100/10 Mbps Ethernet network.
Off The link to an Ethernet network is down.
PoE Mode
(GS2220-10HP,
GS2220-28HP
and GS2220-
50HP)
Green On Power supplied to all PoE Ethernet ports meets the IEEE 802.3at standard.
Amber On Power supplied to all PoE Ethernet ports meets the IEEE 802.3af standard.
Off There is no power supplied.
SFP Slots
LINK/ACT Green On The port has a successful 1000 Mbps connection.
Blinking The port is transmitting or receiving data at 1000 Mbps.
Amber On The port has a successful 100 Mbps connection.
Blinking The port is transmitting or receiving data at 100 Mbps.
Off This link is disconnected.
Table 4 LEDs (continued)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
43
CHAPTER 4
The Web Configurator
4.1 Overview
This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator.
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and
management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 9.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 21 and
later versions, Safari 6.0 and later versions or Google Chrome 26.0 and later versions. The recommended
screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in
Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
4.2 System Login
1Start your web browser.
2The Switch is a DHCP client by default. Type “http://DHCP-assigned IP” in the Location or Address field.
Press [ENTER].
If the Switch is not connected to a DHCP server, type “http://” and the static IP address of the Switch (for
example, the default management IP address is 192.168.1.1) in the Location or Address field. Press
[ENTER]. Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access this website address.
Also, you can use the ZON Utility to check your Switch’s IP address. See Section 4.3 on page 46 for more
information on the ZON utility.
3The following screen appears.
You can click the play icon to watch a tutorial video on how to create an NCC account or click the link
to access the NCC portal. The NCC is a cloud- based network management system that allows you to
remotely manage and monitor the Switch in Nebula cloud management mode. Click Standalone Mode
to go back to the login screen and continue with the next step.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
44
Figure 28 Web Configurator > Login: Nebula Mode
4Click Login to log into the web configurator to manage the Switch directly. The default username is
admin and associated default password is 1234.
Figure 29 Web Configurator > Login
5After you log into the web configurator, you will see the following screen encouraging you to use NCC.
The screen has a QR code containing the Switch’s serial number and MAC address for NCC registration
of the Switch using the Nebula Mobile app. First, download the app from the Google Play store for
Android devices or the App Store for iOS devices and create an organization and site at NCC.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
45
Figure 30 Web Configurator: Message
You may also access this screen at Basic Setting > Cloud Management > Nebula Switch Registration.
6If you didn’t change the default administrator password and/or SNMP community values, a warning
screen displays each time you log into the web configurator. Click Password / SNMP to open a screen
where you can change the administrator and SNMP passwords simultaneously. Otherwise, click Ignore
to close it.
Figure 31 Web Configurator: Warning
Figure 32 Web Configurator: Password
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
46
Change the default administrator and/or SNMP passwords, and then click Apply to save your changes.
4.3 Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility
ZON Utility is a program designed to help you deploy and manage a network more efficiently. It detects
devices automatically and allows you to do basic settings on devices in the network without having to
be near it.
The ZON Utility issues requests via Zyxel Discovery Protocol (ZDP) and in response to the query, the device
responds back with basic information including IP address, firmware version, location, system and model
name in the same broadcast domain. The information is then displayed in the ZON Utility screen and you
can perform tasks like basic configuration of the devices and batch firmware upgrade in it. You can
download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on a PC (Windows operating system).
4.3.1 Requirements
Before installing the ZON Utility on your PC, please make sure it meets the requirements listed below.
Table 5 Web Configurator: Password/SNMP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Administrator
This is the default administrator account with the “admin” user name. You cannot change the default administrator
user name.
Old Password Type the existing system password (1234 is the default password when shipped).
New Password Enter your new system password.
Retype to Confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation.
General Setting
Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community (password) values.
Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch. The SNMP version on the Switch must match the
version on the SNMP manager. Choose SNMP version 2c (v2c), SNMP version 3 (v3) or both
(v3v2c).
Note: SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1.
Get Community Enter the Get Community string, which is the password for the Incoming Get- and GetNext-
requests from the management station.
The Get Community string is only used b SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower.
Set Community Enter the Set Community string, which is the password for the incoming Set- requests from the
management station.
The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower.
Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP
managers.
The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower,.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory, The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
47
Operating System
At the time of writing, the ZON Utility is compatible with:
• Windows 7 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)
• Windows 8 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)
• Windows 8.1 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)
• Window 10 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)
Note: To check for your Windows operating system version, right-click on My Computer >
Properties. You should see this information in the General tab.
Note: It is suggested that you install Npcap, the packet capture library for Windows operating
systems, and remove WinPcap or any other installed packet capture tools before you
install the ZON utility.
Hardware
Here are the minimum hardware requirements to use the ZON Utility on your PC.
• Core i3 processor
•2GB RAM
• 100MB free hard disk
• WXGA (Wide XGA 1280x800)
4.3.2 Run the ZON Utility
1Double-click the ZON Utility to run it.
2The first time you run the ZON Utility, you will see if your device and firmware version support the ZON
Utility. Click the OK button to close this screen.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
48
Figure 33 Supported Devices and Versions
If you want to check the supported models and firmware versions later, you can click the Show
information about ZON icon in the upper right hand corner of the screen. Then select the Supported
model and firmware version link. If your device is not listed here, see the device release notes for ZON
utility support. The release notes are in the firmware zip file on the Zyxel web site.
Figure 34 ZON Utility Screen
3Select a network adapter to which your supported devices are connected.
4Click the Go button for the ZON Utility to discover all supported devices in your network.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
49
Figure 35 Discovery
5The ZON Utility screen shows the devices discovered.
Figure 36 ZON Utility Screen
6Select a device and then use the icons to perform actions. Some functions may not be available for
your devices.
Note: You must know the selected device admin password before taking actions on the
device using the ZON utility icons.
Figure 37 Password Prompt
The following table describes the icons numbered from left to right in the ZON Utility screen.
12345678910 11 12 13
Table 6 ZON Utility Icons
ICON DESCRIPTION
1 IP configuration Change the selected device’s IP address.
2 Renew IP Address Update a DHCP-assigned dynamic IP address.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
50
The following table describes the fields in the ZON Utility main screen.
3 Reboot Device Use this icon to restart the selected device(s). This may be useful when troubleshooting
or upgrading new firmware.
4 Reset Configuration to
Default
If you forget your password or cannot access the Web Configurator, you can use this
icon to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all
configurations that you had previously.
5 Locator LED Use this icon to locate the selected device by causing its Locator LED to blink.
6 Web GUI Use this to access the selected device web configurator from your browser. You will
need a username and password to log in.
7 Firmware Upgrade Use this icon to upgrade new firmware to selected device(s) of the same model.
Online upgrade: If there’s the latest firmware available, it’ll show in the drop-down
menu. You don’t need to download the firmware first to upgrade firmware.
Local upgrade: Make sure you have downloaded the firmware from the Zyxel website
to your computer and unzipped it in advance.
8 Change Password Use this icon to change the admin password of the selected device. You must know
the current admin password before changing to a new one.
9 Configure NCC
Discovery
You must have Internet access to use this feature. Use this icon to enable or disable the
Nebula Control Center (NCC) discovery feature on the selected device. If it’s
enabled, the selected device will try to connect to the NCC. Once the selected
device is connected to and has registered in the NCC, it’ll go into the Nebula cloud
management mode.
10 ZAC Use this icon to run the Zyxel AP Configurator of the selected AP.
11 Clear and Rescan Use this icon to clear the list and discover all devices on the connected network again.
12 Save Configuration Use this icon to save configuration changes to permanent memory on a selected
device.
13 Settings Use this icon to select a network adaptor for the computer on which the ZON utility is
installed, and the utility language.
Table 7 ZON Utility Fields
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Type This field displays an icon of the kind of device discovered.
Model This field displays the model name of the discovered device.
Firmware Version This field displays the firmware version of the discovered device.
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the discovered device.
IP Address This field displays the IP address of an internal interface on the discovered device that first
received an ZDP discovery request from the ZON utility.
System Name This field displays the system name of the discovered device.
Location This field displays where the discovered device is.
Status This field displays whether changes to the discovered device have been done
successfully. As the Switch does not support IP Configuration, Renew IP address and
Locator LED, this field displays “Update failed”, “Not support Renew IP address” and “Not
support Flash Locator LED” respectively.
NCC Discovery This field displays if the discovered device supports the Nebula Control Center (NCC)
discovery feature. If it’s enabled, the selected device will try to connect to the NCC. Once
the selected device is connected to and has registered in the NCC, it’ll go into the Nebula
cloud management mode.
Table 6 ZON Utility Icons
ICON DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
51
4.4 The Web Configurator Layout
The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator.
The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen.
Figure 38 The Web Configurator Layout
A - Click the menu items to open submenu links, and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in
the main window.
B, C, D, E, F, G- These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you
are currently working in.
B - Click this link to update the information in the screen you are viewing currently.
C - Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch’s nonvolatile memory. Nonvolatile memory is
saved in the configuration file from which the Switch booted from and it stays the same even if the
Switch’s power is turned off. See Section 43.4 on page 360 for information on saving your settings to a
specific configuration file.
Serial Number Enter the admin password of the discovered device to display its serial number.
Hardware Version This field displays the hardware version of the discovered device.
Table 7 ZON Utility Fields
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
52
D - Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch.
E - Click this link to log out of the web configurator.
F - Click this link to display web help pages. The help pages provide descriptions for all of the
configuration screens.
G - Click this link to go to the NCC (Nebula Control Center) portal website.
H - Click this link to go to the Neighbor screen where you can see and manage neighbor devices
learned by the Switch.
In the navigation panel, click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links.
Table 8 Navigation Panel Sub-links Overview
BASIC SETTING ADVANCED
APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
53
The following table describes the links in the navigation panel.
Table 9 Navigation Panel Links
LINK DESCRIPTION
Basic Settings
System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring
information.
General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information and
time settings for the Switch.
Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as VLAN
type, MAC address learning, GARP and priority queues.
IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address, subnet mask
(necessary for Switch management) and set up to 64 IP routing domains.
Port Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure speed, flow control and priority settings
for individual Switch ports.
PoE Setup For PoE model(s).
This link takes you to a screen where you can set priorities, PoE power-up settings and
schedule so that the Switch is able to reserve and allocate power to certain PDs.
Interface Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can create virtual interfaces on the Switch.
IPv6 This link takes you to a screen where you can enable an IPv6 interface and configure the IPv6
settings on the Switch.
DNS This link takes you to a screen where you can configure DNS (domain name server) IP
addresses.
Cloud
Management
This screen displays a link to a screen where you can enable or disable the Nebula Control
Center Discovery feature. If it’s enabled, you can have the Switch search for the NCC
(Nebula Control Center). Another link takes you to the Nebula Switch Registration screen
which has a QR code containing the Switch’s serial number and MAC address for handy
registration of the Switch at NCC.
Advanced Application
VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port-based or 802.1Q VLAN
(depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu). You can also configure a
protocol based VLAN or a subnet based VLAN in these screens.
Static MAC
Forwarding
This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC addresses for a port. These
static MAC addresses do not age out.
Static Multicast
Forwarding
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static multicast MAC addresses for
port(s). These static multicast MAC addresses do not age out.
Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules.
Spanning Tree
Protocol
This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP/MRSTP/MSTP to prevent
network loops.
Bandwidth Control This link takes you to screens where you can cap the maximum bandwidth allowed on a port.
Broadcast Storm
Control
This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters.
Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port
in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference.
Link Aggregation This link takes you to screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one
logical, higher-bandwidth link.
Port Authentication This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802.1x port authentication as well
as MAC authentication for clients communicating via the Switch.
Port Security This link takes you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and set the
maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
54
Time Range This link takes you to a screen where you can configure time range for time-oriented features
like Classifier.
Classifier This link takes you to screens where you can configure the Switch to group packets based on
the specified criteria.
Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to perform special
treatment on the grouped packets.
Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with associated queue
weights for each port.
Multicast This link takes you to screen where you can configure various multicast features, IGMP
snooping, MLD snooping-proxy and create multicast VLANs.
AAA This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication, authorization and
accounting services via external servers. The external servers can be either RADIUS (Remote
Authentication Dial-In User Service) or TACACS+ (Terminal Access Controller Access-Control
System Plus).
IP Source Guard This link takes you to screens where you can configure filtering of unauthorized DHCP and ARP
packets in your network.
Loop Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops that
occur on the edge of your network.
VLAN Mapping This link takes you to screens where you can configure VLAN mapping settings on the Switch.
Layer 2 Protocol
Tunneling
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure L2PT (Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling)
settings on the Switch.
PPPoE This link takes you to screens where you can configure how the Switch gives a PPPoE
termination server additional subscriber information that the server can use to identify and
authenticate a PPPoE client.
Errdisable This link takes you to a screens where you can view errdisable status and configure errdisable
settings in CPU protection, errdisable detect, and errdisable recovery.
Private VLAN This link takes you to a screen where you can block traffic between ports in a VLAN on the
Switch.
Green Ethernet This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to reduce port power
consumption.
LLDP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure LLDP settings.
Anti-Arpscan This link takes you to screens where you can enable anti-arpscan on the Switch and ports,
and view the port state. You can also create trusted hosts, view blocked hosts and unblock
them.
BPDU Guard This link takes you to screens where you can enable BPDU guard on the Switch and ports, and
view the port state.
OAM This link takes you to screens where you can enable Ethernet OAM on the Switch, view the
configuration of ports on which Ethernet OAM is enabled and perform remote-loopback
tests.
ZULD This link takes you to screens where you can enable ZULD on a port and configure related
settings.
IP Application
Static Routing This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static routes. A static route defines
how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP/IP parameters manually.
DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ, configure marking rules and set
DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mappings.
DHCP This link takes you to screens where you can configure the DHCP settings.
ARP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure ARP learning mode on a per-port
basis and create static ARP entries which do not age out.
Table 9 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
55
4.4.1 Change Your Password
After you log in for the first time, it is recommended you change the default administrator password.
Click Management > Access Control > Logins to display the next screen.
Figure 39 Change Administrator Login Password
Management
Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file
maintenance as well as reboot the system.
Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure
SNMP and remote management.
Diagnostic This link takes you to screens where you can ping IP addresses, run traceroute, test port(s).
System Log This link takes you to a screen where you can view system logs.
Syslog Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can setup system logs and a system log server.
Cluster
Management
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering management and view its
status.
MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address and VLAN ID of a device
attach to a port. You can also view what kind of MAC address it is.
ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address – IP address resolution
table.
Path MTU Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the IPv6 path MTU table.
Configure Clone This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port to (an)other port(s).
IPv6 Neighbor
Table
This link takes you to a screen where you can view the Switch’s IPv6 neighbor table.
Port Status This link takes you to a screen where you can view the port statistics.
Table 9 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
56
4.5 Saving Your Configuration
When you are done modifying the settings in a screen, click Apply to save your changes back to the
run-time memory. Settings in the run-time memory are lost when the Switch’s power is turned off.
Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to
nonvolatile memory. Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch’s storage that remains even if the Switch’s
power is turned off.
Note: Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session.
4.6 Switch Lockout
You could block yourself (and all others) from using in-band-management (managing through the data
ports) if you do one of the following:
1Delete the management VLAN (default is VLAN 1).
2Delete all port-based VLANs with the CPU port as a member. The “CPU port” is the management port of
the Switch.
3Filter all traffic to the CPU port.
4Disable all ports.
5Misconfigure the text configuration file.
6Forget the password and/or IP address.
7Prevent all services from accessing the Switch.
8Change a service port number but forget it.
9You forgot to log out of the Switch from a computer before logging in again on another computer.
Note: Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch.
4.7 Resetting the Switch
If you lock yourself (and others) from the Switch or forget the administrator password, you will need to
reload the factory-default configuration file or reset the Switch back to the factory defaults.
4.7.1 Using the RESTORE Button
See Table 3 on page 36 to see how to use the RESTORE button to restore the factory default file.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
57
4.7.2 Reload the Configuration File
Uploading the factory-default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory-
default configuration file. This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the
console port will be reset to the default of 115200 bps with 8 data bit, no parity, one stop bit and flow
control set to none. The password will also be reset to “1234” and the IP address to 192.168.1.1 or DHCP-
assigned IP.
To upload the configuration file, do the following:
1Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software. See Section 3.2 on
page 39 for details.
2Disconnect and reconnect the Switch’s power to begin a session. When you reconnect the Switch’s
power, you will see the initial screen.
3When you see the message “Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds ...” press
any key to enter debug mode.
4Type atlc after the “Enter Debug Mode” message.
5Wait for the “Starting XMODEM upload” message before activating XMODEM upload on your
terminal.
6After a configuration file upload, type atgo to restart the Switch.
Figure 40 Resetting the Switch: Via the Console Port
The Switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of “1234”.
4.8 Logging Out of the Web Configurator
Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator. You have to log in with your password again after
you log out. This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons.
Bootbase Version: V1.00 | 02/21/2016 15:43:29
RAM: Size = 1048576 Kbytes
FLASH: 64M
ZyNOS Version: V4.60(ABML.0) | 04/18/2017 11:41:8
Press any key to enter debug mode within 1 second.
.....................................
Enter Debug Mode
ras> atlc
Starting XMODEM upload (CRC mode)....
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Total 393216 bytes received.
Erasing..
................................................................
OK
ras> atgo
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
58
Figure 41 Web Configurator: Logout Screen
4.9 Help
The web configurator’s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary
information.
Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
59
CHAPTER 5
Initial Setup Example
5.1 Overview
This chapter shows how to set up the Switch for an example network.
The following lists the configuration steps for the initial setup:
•Creating a VLAN
•Setting Port VID
•Configuring Switch Management IP Address
5.1.1 Creating a VLAN
VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port(s) belongs. You can do this with
port-based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members.
In this example, you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2.
Figure 42 Initial Setup Network Example: VLAN
1Click Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration in the navigation panel and click the Static
VLAN Setup link.
Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
60
2In the Static VLAN screen, select ACTIVE, enter a descriptive name in the Name field and enter 2 in the
VLAN Group ID field for the VLAN2 network.
Note: The VLAN Group ID field in this
screen and the VID field in the IP
Setup screen refer to the same
VLAN ID.
3Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 1 on the Switch, select Fixed to configure port 1 to be a
permanent member of the VLAN only.
4To ensure that VLAN-unaware devices (such as computers and hubs) can receive frames properly, clear
the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending.
5Click Add to save the settings to the run-time memory. Settings in the run-time memory are lost when the
Switch’s power is turned off.
5.1.2 Setting Port VID
Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are
forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.
In the example network, configure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so that any untagged frames received on
that port get sent to VLAN 2.
Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
61
Figure 43 Initial Setup Network Example: Port VID
1Click Advanced Applications > VLAN > VLAN
Configuration in the navigation panel. Then
click the VLAN Port Setup link.
2Enter 2 in the PVID field for port 1 and click
Apply to save your changes back to the run-
time memory. Settings in the run-time memory
are lost when the Switch’s power is turned off.
5.1.3 Configuring Switch Management IP Address
If the Switch fails to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server, the Switch will use 192.168.1.1 as the
management IP address. You can configure another IP address in a different subnet for management
purposes. The following figure shows an example.
Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
62
Figure 44 Initial Setup Example: Management IP Address
1Connect your computer to any Ethernet port on the Switch. Make sure your computer is in the same
subnet as the Switch.
2Open your web browser and enter 192.168.1.1 (the default IP address) in the address bar to access the
web configurator. See Section 4.2 on page 43 for more information.Click Basic Setting > IP Setup in the
navigation panel.
3Configure the related fields in the IP Setup screen.
4For the VLAN2 network, enter 192.168.2.1 as the IP address and 255.255.255.0 as the subnet mask.
5In the VID field, enter the ID of the VLAN group to which you want this management IP address to
belong. This is the same as the VLAN ID you configure in the Static VLAN screen.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
63
CHAPTER 6
Tutorials
6.1 Overview
This chapter provides some examples of using the web configurator to set up and use the Switch. The
tutorials include:
•How to Use DHCPv4 Snooping on the Switch
•How to Use DHCPv4 Relay on the Switch
•How to Use Auto Configuration via a DHCP Server on the Switch
6.2 How to Use DHCPv4 Snooping on the Switch
You only want DHCP server A connected to port 5 to assign IP addresses to all devices in VLAN network
(V). Create a VLAN containing ports 5, 6 and 7. Connect a computer M to the Switch for management.
Figure 45 Tutorial: DHCP Snooping Tutorial Overview
Note: For related information about DHCP snooping, see Section 26.5 on page 242.
The settings in this tutorial are as the following.
1Access the Switch through http://192.168.1.1 by default. Log into the Switch by entering the username
(default: admin) and password (default: 1234).
Table 10 Tutorial: Settings in this Tutorial
HOST PORT CONNECTED VLAN PVID DHCP SNOOPING PORT TRUSTED
DHCP Server (A) 5 1 and 100 100 Yes
DHCP Client (B) 6 1 and 100 100 No
DHCP Client (C) 7 1 and 100 100 No
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
64
2Go to Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup, and create a VLAN with
ID of 100. Add ports 5, 6 and 7 in the VLAN by selecting Fixed in the Control field as shown.
Deselect Tx Tagging because you don’t want outgoing traffic to contain this VLAN tag.
Click Add.
Figure 46 Tutorial: Create a VLAN and Add Ports to It
3Go to Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN Port Setup, and set the PVID of the
ports 5, 6 and 7 to 100. This tags untagged incoming frames on ports 5, 6 and 7 with the tag 100.
Figure 47 Tutorial: Tag Untagged Frames
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
65
4Go to Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping >
Configure, activate and specify VLAN 100 as the DHCP VLAN as shown. Click Apply.
Figure 48 Tutorial: Specify DHCP VLAN
5Click the Port link at the top right corner.
6The DH CP Snooping Port Configure screen appears. Select Trusted in the Server Trusted state field for port
5 because the DHCP server is connected to port 5. Keep ports 6 and 7 Untrusted because they are
connected to DHCP clients. Click Apply.
Figure 49 Tutorial: Set the DHCP Server Port to Trusted
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
66
7Go to Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping >
Configure > VLAN, show VLAN 100 by entering 100 in the Start VID and End VID fields and click Apply.
Then select Yes in the Enabled field of the VLAN 100 entry shown at the bottom section of the screen.
If you want to add more information in the DHCP request packets such as source VLAN ID or system
name, you can also select an Option82 Profile in the entry. See Section 26.17.1.3 on page 264.
Figure 50 Tutorial: Enable DHCP Snooping on this VLAN
8Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the
configuration permanently.
9Connect your DHCP server to port 5 and a computer (as DHCP client) to either port 6 or 7. The computer
should be able to get an IP address from the DHCP server. If you put the DHCP server on port 6 or 7, the
computer will not able to get an IP address.
10 To check if DHCP snooping works, go to Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard
Setup, you should see an IP assignment with the type DHCP-Snooping as shown.
Figure 51 Tutorial: Check the Binding If DHCP Snooping Works
You can also telnet. Use the command “show dhcp snooping binding” to see the DHCP snooping
binding table as shown next.
6.3 How to Use DHCPv4 Relay on the Switch
This tutorial describes how to configure your Switch to forward DHCP client requests to a specific DHCP
server. The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the information in the DHCP
requests.
sysname# show dhcp snooping binding
MacAddress IpAddress Lease Type VLAN Port
----------------- --------------- ------------ ------------- ---- -----
00:02:00:00:00:1c 10.10.1.16 6d23h59m20s dhcp-snooping 100 7
Total number of bindings: 1
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
67
6.3.1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction
In this example, you have configured your DHCP server (192.168.2.3) and want to have it assign a
specific IP address (say 172.16.1.18) to DHCP client A based on the system name, VLAN ID and port
number in the DHCP request. Client A connects to the Switch’s port 2 in VLAN 102.
Figure 52 Tutorial: DHCP Relay Scenario
6.3.2 Creating a VLAN
Follow the steps below to configure port 2 as a member of VLAN 102.
1Access the web configurator through the Switch’s management port.
2Go to Basic Setting > Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802.1Q. Click Apply to save the settings to
the run-time memory.
Figure 53 Tutorial: Set VLAN Type to 802.1Q
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
68
3Click Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup.
4In the Static VLAN screen, select ACTIVE, enter a descriptive name (VLAN 102 for example) in the Name
field and enter 102 in the VLAN Group ID field.
5Select Fixed to configure port 2 to be a permanent member of this VLAN.
6Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending.
7Click Add to save the settings to the run-time memory. Settings in the run-time memory are lost when the
Switch’s power is turned off.
Figure 54 Tutorial: Create a Static VLAN
8Click the VLAN Configuration link in the Static VLAN Setup screen and then the VLAN Port Setup link in the
VLAN Configuration screen.
Figure 55 Tutorial: Click the VLAN Port Setting Link
9Enter 102 in the PVID field for port 2 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so
that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.
10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run-time memory.
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
69
Figure 56 Tutorial: Add Tag for Frames Received on Port 2
11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration
permanently.
6.3.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Relay
Follow the steps below to enable DHCP relay on the Switch and allow the Switch to add relay agent
information (such as the VLAN ID) to DHCP requests.
1Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 and then the Global link to open the DHCP Relay screen.
2Select the Active check box.
3Enter the DHCP server’s IP address (192.168.2.3 in this example) in the Remote DHCP Server 1 field.
4Select default1 or default2 in the Option 82 Profile field.
5Click Apply to save your changes back to the run-time memory.
Figure 57 Tutorial: Set DHCP Server and Relay Information
6Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration
permanently.
7The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the DHCP request.
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
70
6.3.4 Troubleshooting
Check the client A’s IP address. If it did not receive the IP address 172.16.1.18, make sure:
1Client A is connected to the Switch’s port 2 in VLAN 102.
2You configured the correct VLAN ID, port number and system name for DHCP relay on both the DHCP
server and the Switch.
3You clicked the Save link on the Switch to have your settings take effect.
6.4 How to Use Auto Configuration via a DHCP Server on
the Switch
Follow the steps below to set up configurations on a DHCP server, TFTP server, and the Switch, so you
can load an auto configuration file automatically from a TFTP server when you reboot the Switch.
Note that you can set up a DHCP server and TFTP server either on the same device or different devices.
Also, make sure the Switch can communicate with the TFTP server.
Note: Steps order could vary according to different programs you use.
Note: You need to set up configurations on a DHCP server and TFTP server first to use auto
configuration.
Setting up a DHCP Server
1Set up a dynamic IP addresses pool so the DHCP server will assign an IP address to the Switch in that
range.
2Set up a TFTP server IP address, so the Switch will know where to load the auto configuration file.
3Set up the filename of the auto configuration file, so the Switch will know which file to load when you
reboot the Switch.
• Enter the filename of an auto configuration file. The Switch will load this auto configuration file
when rebooting with DHCP option 60 disabled.
• If you want to load the auto configuration file with DHCP option 60 enabled and a Vendor Class
Identifier assigned when you reboot the Switch, follow the instruction below. Otherwise, skip this
step.
Enter the filename of the an auto configuration file. Set up a Vendor Class Identifier. To have the
Switch load this auto configuration file, two conditions listed above must be met. Please refer to
the following steps to see how to set up a Vendor Class Identifier on the Switch.
Setting up a TFTP Server
1Select a directory on the TFTP server.
2Put the configuration files in that directory.
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
71
Setting up the Switch
1Open the web configurator. Go to the Management > Maintenance screen, and click the Click Here
button next to the Auto Configuration field.
Figure 58 Tutorial: Auto Configuration Screen
2Select the check box in the Active field to enable auto configuration. Select DHCP in the Mode field,
Click Apply to save your changes. See Section 43.9 on page 365 for more information about auto
configuration.
Figure 59 Tutorial: Enable Auto Configuration
3You need to save the current configuration in a configuration file, so the Switch will load the auto
configuration file from the TFTP server automatically when rebooting. Go to the Management >
Maintenance screen. Click the Config 1, Config2, or Custom Default button next to the Save
Configuration field. See Section 43.4 on page 360 for more information.
4Click the same button next to Reboot System field to reboot the Switch, and load the auto configuration
setting as configured before. For example, if you save the auto configuration setting to Config 1, you
need to click the Config 1 button next to the Reboot System field. See Section 43.5 on page 361 for more
information.
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
72
Figure 60 Tutorial: Save Configuration & Reboot System
5Go to the Management > System Log screen to see if auto configuration was performed successfully.
Figure 61 Tutorial: Log
6Check the screens to see if it’s the configuration file you want to load. If it’s not, go through the steps
above to check your configurations. If it is, click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to
save the configuration permanently.
Figure 62 Tutorial: Save
73
PART II
Technical Reference
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
74
CHAPTER 7
Status
7.1 Overview
This chapter describes the screens for System Status and Neighbor.
7.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Status screen (Section 7.2 on page 74) to see the Switch’s general device information, system
status, and IP addresses. You can also display other status screens for more information.
• Use the Neighbor screen (Section 7.2.1 on page 76) to view and manage Switch’s neighbor devices.
7.2 Status
The Status screen displays when you log into the Switch or click Status at the top right corner of the web
configurator. The Status screen displays general device information, system status, and its IP addresses.
Figure 63 Status
Chapter 7 Status
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
75
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 11 Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Device Information
Device Type This field displays the model name of this Switch.
System Name This field displays the name used to identify the Switch on any network.
Boot Version This field displays the version number and date of the boot module that is currently on the
Switch.
System Location This field displays the geographic location of your Switch. You can change the setting in the
Basic Setting > General Setup screen.
Firmware
Version
This field displays the version number and date of the firmware the Switch is currently running.
System Time This field displays the current date and time in the Switch. The format is mm-dd-yyyy hh:mm:ss.
Hardware
Version
This field displays the hardware version number of the Switch. The integer is the generation
number of the Switch series, and the decimal is the version of the hardware change. For
example, V1.0 is a hardware version for the Switch where 1 identifies the first generation of the
Switch series, and .0 is the first hardware change.
System Up Time This field displays how long the Switch has been running since it last restarted or was turned on.
MAC Address This field displays the MAC addresses of the Switch.
Login Timeout This field displays how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the session
times out. After it times out you have to log in with your password again.
Serial Number This field displays the serial number of this Switch. The serial number is used for device tracking
and control.
Registration
MAC Address
This field displays the MAC address of the Switch that you must use to register at myZyxel or the
NCC (Nebula Control Center).
Hybrid Mode This field displays whether the Switch is in Standalone mode or Cloud mode. In Standalone mode
you can see a link to a QR code to register the Switch to use NCC (Nebula Control Center).
Cloud Control
Status
This field displays the registration and connection status between the Switch and the NCC
(Nebula Control Center). See Section 3.3 on page 41 for more information on the Cloud LED.
In Standalone mode, the status will display Disconnected or Unregistered. In Cloud mode the
status will display Connected or Disconnected.
Connected - The Switch is registered with and connected to the NCC.
Disconnected - The Switch is not connected to the NCC.
Unregistered - The Switch is not registered with the NCC.
PoE Usage This field displays the amount of power the Switch is currently supplying to the connected PoE-
enabled devices and the total power the Switch can provide to the connected PDs. It also
shows the percentage of PoE power usage.
When PoE usage reaches 100%, the Switch will shut down PDs one-by-one according to the PD
priority which you configured in Basic Setting > PoE Setup.
Detail Click this link to go to the Basic Setting > System Info screen to check other detailed information,
such as system resource usage and the Switch temperature, fan speeds or voltage.
IP Address Information
IPv4 Address This field displays the Switch’s current IPv4 address.
Subnet Mask This field displays the Switch’s subnet mask.
Default
Gateway
This field displays the IP address of the Switch’s default gateway.
IP Setup Click the link to go to the Basic Setting > IP Setup screen.
Chapter 7 Status
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
76
7.2.1 Neighbor Screen
The Neighbor screen allows you to view and manage the Switch’s neighboring devices more
conveniently. It uses Layer Link Discovery Protocol (LLDP) to discover all neighbor devices connected to
the Switch including non-Zyxel devices. You can perform tasks on the neighboring devices like login,
reboot (turn the power off and then back on again), and reset to factory default settings in the
Neighbor screen. For more information on LLDP, see Section 34.1 on page 295.
Click Status > Neighbor to see the following screen.
Figure 64 Status > Neighbor
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
IPV6 Global
Unicast Address
This field displays the Switch’s IPv6 global unicast address
IPV6 Link-Local
Address
This field displays the Switch’s IPv6 link-local address.
IPv6
configuration
Click the link to go to the Basic Setting > IPv6 screen.
Device Status
and Quick
Configuration
This section shows whether a feature is enabled or not on the Switch. You can click a feature’s
Setting link to go to the configuration screen for the feature.
Hover your cursor over a red exclamation mark to display information about the feature.
Quick Links This section provides the shortcut link to a specific configuration screen.
Table 11 Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 12 Status > Neighbor
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This shows the port of the Switch, on which the neighboring device is discovered.
Port Name This shows the port description of the Switch.
Link This shows the speed (either 100M for 100Mbps or 1G for 1 Gbps) and the duplex (F for full
duplex or H for half). This field displays Down if the port is not connected to any device.
PoE Draw (W) This shows the consumption that the neighboring device connected to this port draws from
the Switch. This allows you to plan and use within the power budget of the Switch.
System Name This shows the system name of the neighbor device.
Chapter 7 Status
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
77
7.2.2 Neighbor Detail
Use this screen to view detailed information about the neighboring devices. Device information is
displayed in gray when the neighboring device is currently offline.
Up to 10 neighboring device records per Ethernet port can be retained in this screen even when the
devices are offline. When the maximum number of neighboring device records per Ethernet port is
reached, new device records automatically overwrite existing offline device records, starting with the
oldest existing offline device record first.
Click the Neighbor Detail link in the Status > Neighbor screen to see the following screen.
IP This shows the IP address of the neighbor device. The IP address is a hyper link that you can
click to log into and manage the neighbor device through its web configurator.
PWR Cycle Click the Cycle button to turn OFF the power of the neighboring device and turn it back ON
again. A count down button (from 5 to 0) starts.
Note: The Cycle button is clickable only when the neighboring device is a powered
device (PD) and able to receive power from the Switch.
Reset to Default Click the Reset button to reset the neighbor device to its factory default settings. A warning
message “Are you sure you want to load factory default?” appears prompting you to confirm
the action. After confirming the action a count down button (from 5 to 0) starts.
Note:
• The Switch must be a Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) and the neighboring device is a
powered device (PD).
• If multiple neighbor devices use the same port, the Reset button is not available and will
show “-” instead.
• You can only reset Zyxel powered devices that support the ZON utility.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific port. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all ports.
Flush Click the Flush button to remove information about neighbors learned on the selected ports.
Table 12 Status > Neighbor
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Status
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
78
Figure 65 Status > Neighbor > Neighbor Detail
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 13 Status > Neighbor > Neighbor Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local Port This shows the port of the Switch, on which the neighboring device is discovered.
Desc. This shows the port description of the Switch.
Link This shows the speed (either 100M for 100Mbps or 1G for 1 Gbps) and the duplex (F for full
duplex or H for half). This field displays Down if the port is not connected to any device.
PoE Draw (W) This shows the consumption that the neighboring device connected to this port draws from the
Switch. This allows you to plan and use within the power budget of the Switch.
PWR Cycle Click the Cycle button to turn OFF the power of the neighboring device and turn it back ON
again. A count down button (from 5 to 0) starts.
Note: The Cycle button is clickable only when the neighboring device is a powered
device (PD) and able to receive power from the Switch.
Remote
System Name This shows the system name of the neighbor device.
Model This shows the model name of the neighbor device. This field will show “--” for devices that do
not support the ZON utility.
Firmware This shows the firmware version of the neighbor device. This field will show “--” for devices that
do not support the ZON utility.
IP This shows the IP address of the neighbor device. The IP address is a hyper link that you can click
to log into and manage the neighbor device through its web configurator.
Port This shows the number of the neighbor device’s port which is connected to the Switch.
Desc. This shows the description of the neighbor device’s port which is connected to the Switch.
Location This shows the geographic location of the neighbor device. This field will show “--” for devices
that do not support the ZON utility.
Chapter 7 Status
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
79
MAC This shows the MAC address of the neighbor device.
Reset to Default Click the Reset button to reset the neighboring device to its factory default settings. A warning
message “Are you sure you want to load factory default?” appears, prompting you to confirm
the action. After confirming the action a count down button (from 5 to 0) starts.
Note:
• The Switch must be a Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) and the neighboring device is a
powered device (PD).
• If multiple neighbor devices use the same port, the Reset button is not available.
• You can only reset Zyxel powered devices that support the ZON utility.
Table 13 Status > Neighbor > Neighbor Detail (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
80
CHAPTER 8
Basic Setting
8.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to configure the System Info, General Setup, Switch Setup, IP Setup, Port
Setup, PoE Setup, Interface Setup, IPv6, DNS and Cloud Management screens.
8.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the System Info screen (Section 8.2 on page 80) to check the firmware version number and
monitor the Switch temperature, fan speeds and voltage.
• Use the General Setup screen (Section 8.3 on page 82) to configure general settings such as the
system name and time.
• Use the Switch Setup screen (Section 8.5 on page 85) to choose your VLAN type, set the GARP timers
and assign priorities to queues.
• Use the IP Setup screen (Section 8.6 on page 86) to configure the Switch IP address, default gateway
device, and the management VLAN ID.
• Use the Port Setup screen (Section 8.7 on page 88) to configure Switch port settings.
• Use the PoE Setup screens (Section 8.8 on page 90) to view the current amount of power that PDs are
receiving from the Switch and set the priority levels for the Switch in distributing power to PDs. This
screen is available for PoE model(s) only.
• Use the Interface Setup screens (Section 8.9 on page 96) to configure Switch interface type and
interface ID settings.
• Use the IPv6 screens (Section 8.10 on page 97) to view IPv6 status and IPv6 configuration.
• Use the DNS screen (Section 8.11 on page 107) to configure the default domain name server.
• Use the Cloud Management screen (Section 8.12 on page 107) to display links to Nebula Control
Center Discovery and Nebula Switch Registration screens.
8.2 System Information
In the navigation panel, click Basic Setting > System Info to display the screen as shown. Use this screen
to view general system information. You can check the firmware version number and monitor the Switch
temperature, fan speeds and voltage in this screen.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
81
Figure 66 Basic Setting > System Info
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 14 Basic Setting > System Info
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes.
Product Model This field displays the product model of the Switch. Use this information when searching for
firmware upgrade or looking for other support information in the website.
ZyNOS F/W
Version
This field displays the version number of the Switch 's current firmware including the date created.
Ethernet
Address
This field refers to the Ethernet MAC (Media Access Control) address of the Switch.
CPU Utilization CPU utilization quantifies how busy the system is. Current (%) displays the current percentage of
CPU utilization.
Memory
Utilization
Memory utilization shows how much DRAM memory is available and in use. It also displays the
current percentage of memory utilization.
Name This field displays the name of memory pool.
Total (byte) This field displays the total number of bytes in this memory pool.
Used (byte) This field displays the number of bytes being used in this memory pool.
Utilization
(%) This field displays the percentage (%) of memory being used in this memory pool.
Hardware Monitor
Temperature
Unit
The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the
temperature rises above the threshold. You may choose the temperature unit (Centigrade or
Fahrenheit) in this field.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
82
8.3 General Setup
Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time. Click Basic Setting >
General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Temperature
(C)
BOARD, MAC and PHY refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch printed
circuit board.
Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor.
MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor.
MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor.
Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor.
Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above.
FAN Speed
(RPM)
A properly functioning fan is an essential component (along with a sufficiently ventilated, cool
operating environment) in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold. Each fan
has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold
shown.
Current This field displays this fan's current speed in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
MAX This field displays this fan's maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
MIN This field displays this fan's minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). "<41" is
displayed for speeds too small to measure (under 2000 RPM).
Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work.
Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed. Error indicates that this
fan is functioning below the minimum speed.
Voltage(V) The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the
voltage falls out of the tolerance range.
Current This is the current voltage reading.
MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point.
MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point.
Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the Switch still works.
Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point;
otherwise Error is displayed.
Table 14 Basic Setting > System Info (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
83
Figure 67 Basic Setting > General Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 15 Basic Setting > General Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes. This name consists of up to 64 printable
characters; spaces are allowed.
Location Enter the geographic location of your Switch. You can use up to 128 printable ASCII
characters; spaces are allowed.
Contact Person's
Name
Enter the name of the person in charge of this Switch. You can use up to 32 printable ASCII
characters; spaces are allowed.
Use Time Server
when Bootup
Enter the time service protocol that your time server uses. Not all time servers support all
protocols, so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works. The main
differences between them are the time format.
When you select the Daytime (RFC 867) format, the Switch displays the day, month, year and
time with no time zone adjustment. When you use this format it is recommended that you use a
Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone.
Time (RFC-868) format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 2016/
1/1 at 0:0:0.
NTP (RFC-1305) is similar to Time (RFC-868).
None is the default value. Enter the time manually. Each time you turn on the Switch, the time
and date will be reset to 2016-1-1 0:0:0.
Time Server IP
Address
Enter the IP address or domain name of your timeserver. The Switch searches for the timeserver
for up to 60 seconds. If you select a timeserver that is unreachable, then this screen will appear
locked for 60 seconds. Please wait.
Time Server Sync
Interval
Enter the frequency you would like the Zyxel Device to sync with the NTP server.
Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu (or refresh the menu).
New Time
(hh:min:ss)
Enter the new time in hour, minute and second format. The new time then appears in the
Current Time field after you click Apply.
Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
84
8.4 Introduction to VLANs
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same
group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
In MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the
subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network
resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user
in the same building.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable
logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and
every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain.
New Date (yyyy-
mm-dd)
Enter the new date in year, month and day format. The new date then appears in the Current
Date field after you click Apply.
Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated, formerly known as GMT,
Greenwich Mean Time) and your time zone from the drop-down list box.
Daylight Saving
Time
Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks
ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.
Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving
Time. The time is displayed in the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March.
Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in
the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and 2:00.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time
zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT
or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March and the last field
depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2:00 because
Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving
Time. The time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time
zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United
States you would select First, Sunday, November and 2:00.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time
zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT
or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October and the last field
depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2:00 because
Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 15 Basic Setting > General Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
85
Note: VLAN is unidirectional; it only governs outgoing traffic.
See Chapter 9 on page 110 for information on port-based and 802.1Q tagged VLANs.
8.5 Switch Setup
Click Basic Setting > Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. The VLAN
setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802.1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in
this screen. Refer to Chapter 9 on page 110 for more information on VLAN.
Figure 68 Basic Setting > Switch Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 16 Basic Setting > Switch Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Type Choose 802.1Q or Port Based. The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you
choose 802.1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen. See Chapter 9 on page 110 for
more information.
MAC Address
Learning
MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts. For MAC address learning to occur
on a port, the port must be active.
Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 1000000 seconds. This is how long all dynamically learned MAC
addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out (and must be relearned).
ARP Aging Time
Aging Time Enter a time from 60 to 1000000 seconds. This is how long dynamically learned ARP entries
remain in the ARP table before they age out (and must be relearned). The setting here applies
to ARP entries which are newly added in the ARP table after you click Apply.
GARP Timer: Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using
GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All message terminates all registrations.
GARP timers set declaration timeout values. See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information.
Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a Join
Period timer. The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds; the default is
200 milliseconds. See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
86
8.6 IP Setup
Use the IP Setup screen to configure the Switch IP address, default gateway device, and the
management VLAN ID. The default gateway specifies the IP address of the default gateway (next hop)
for outgoing traffic.
8.6.1 Management IP Addresses
The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network. When the Switch fails to obtain
an IP address from a DHCP server, the static IP address 192.168.1.1 will be automatically added and
used as the Switch’s management IP address.
You can configure up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the Switch from the
ports belonging to the pre-defined VLAN(s).
Note: You must configure a VLAN first. Each VLAN can only have one management IP
address.
Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a
single Leave Period timer. Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer; the default is 600
milliseconds.
Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port
has a single Leave All Period timer. Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer.
Priority Queue Assignment
IEEE 802.1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to
define class of service. Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port. Use
the next fields to configure the priority level-to-physical queue mapping.
The Switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels. On the Switch, traffic assigned to
higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Priority Level (The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which
incorporates the 802.1p).
Priority 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Priority 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay).
Priority 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.
Priority 4 Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network
Architecture) transactions.
Priority 3 Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important
business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Priority 2 This is for “spare bandwidth”.
Priority 1 This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed
but that should not affect other applications and users.
Priority 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Table 16 Basic Setting > Switch Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
87
Figure 69 Basic Setting > IP Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 17 Basic Setting > IP Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Default Management IP Address
DHCP Client Select this option if you have a DHCP server that can assign the Switch an IP address,
subnet mask, a default gateway IP address and a domain name server IP address
automatically.
Option-60 DHCP Option 60 is used by the Switch for identification to the DHCP server using the VCI
(Vendor Class Identifier) on the DHCP server. The Switch adds it in the initial DHCP discovery
message that a DHCP client broadcasts in search of an IP address. The DHCP server can
assign different IP addresses or options to clients with the specific VCI or reject the request
from clients without the specific VCI.
Select this and enter the device identity you want the Switch to add in the DHCP discovery
frames that go to the DHCP server. This allows the Switch to identify itself to the DHCP server.
Class-ID Type a string of up to 32 characters to identify this Switch to the DHCP server. For example,
Zyxel-TW.
Static IP Address Select this option if you don’t have a DHCP server or if you wish to assign static IP address
information to the Switch. You need to fill in the following fields when you select this option.
IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192.168.1.1.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example
255.255.255.0.
Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for
example 192.168.1.254.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
88
8.7 Port Setup
Use this screen to configure Switch port settings. Click Basic Setting > Port Setup in the navigation panel
to display the configuration screen.
VID Enter the VLAN identification number associated with the Switch IP address. This is the VLAN
ID of the CPU and is used for management only. The default is "1". All ports, by default, are
fixed members of this "management VLAN" in order to manage the device from any port. If
a port is not a member of this VLAN, then users on that port cannot access the device. To
access the Switch make sure the port that you are connected to is a member of
Management VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Management IP Addresses
You can create up to 64 IP addresses, which are used to access and manage the Switch from the ports belonging
to the pre-defined VLAN(s). You must configure a VLAN first.
IP Address Enter the IP address for managing the Switch by the members of the VLAN specified in the
VID field below.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.
VID Type the VLAN group identification number.
Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation.
Add Click Add to insert the entry to the summary table below and save your changes to the
Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so
use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile
memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to edit the rule.
IP Address This field displays the IP address.
IP Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Default Gateway This field displays the IP address of the default gateway.
Delete Check the management IP addresses that you want to remove in the Delete column, then
click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes in the Delete column.
Table 17 Basic Setting > IP Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
89
Figure 70 Basic Setting > Port Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 Basic Setting > Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This is the port index number. * means all ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable a port. The factory default for all ports is enabled. A port must be
enabled for data transmission to occur.
Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port. You can enter up to 64 alpha-numerical
characters.
Note: Due to space limitation, the port name may be truncated in some web
configurator screens.
Type This field displays the capacity that the port can support.
Speed/Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port. The choices are:
•10M/Half Duplex, 100M/Half Duplex, 10M/Full Duplex and 100M/Full Duplex for a 100Base-T
connection
•1G/Full Duplex for 1000Base-T and 1000Base-X connections
Selecting Auto (auto-negotiation) allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically
to obtain the connection speed (of up to 1000M) and duplex mode that both ends support.
When auto-negotiation is turned on, a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer
automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode. If the peer port does
not support auto-negotiation or turns off this feature, the Switch determines the connection
speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode. When the Switch’s
auto-negotiation is turned off, a port uses the pre-configured speed and duplex mode when
making a connection, thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are
the same in order to connect.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
90
8.8 PoE Setup
Note: The following screens are available for the PoE model(s) only.
A powered device (PD) is a device such as an access point or a switch, that supports PoE (Power over
Ethernet) so that it can receive power from another device through an Ethernet port.
In the figure below, the IP camera and IP phone get their power directly from the Switch. Aside from
minimizing the need for cables and wires, PoE removes the hassle of trying to find a nearby electric
outlet to power up devices.
Figure 71 Powered Device Examples
You can also set priorities so that the Switch is able to reserve and allocate power to certain PDs.
Note: The PoE (Power over Ethernet) devices that supply or receive power and their
connected Ethernet cables must all be completely indoors.
To view the current amount of power that PDs are receiving from the Switch, click Basic Setting > PoE
Setup.
Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory
causing packet discards and frame losses. Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals
to match the bandwidth of the receiving port.
The Switch uses IEEE802.3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half
duplex mode.
IEEE802.3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port,
causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill.
Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a "collision" signal to the
sending port (mimicking a state of packet collision) causing the sending port to temporarily stop
sending signals and resend later. Select Flow Control to enable it.
802.1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a (802.1p) priority queue tag. See Priority
Queue Assignment in Table 16 on page 85 for more information.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 18 Basic Setting > Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
91
Figure 72 Basic Setting > PoE Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 19 Basic Setting > PoE Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PoE Status
PoE Mode This field displays the power management mode used by the Switch, whether it is in
Classification or Consumption mode.
Total Power (W) This field displays the total power the Switch can provide to the connected PoE-enabled
devices on the PoE ports.
PoE Usage (%) This field displays the amount of power currently being supplied to connected PoE devices (PDs)
as a percentage of the total PoE power the Switch can supply.
When PoE usage reaches 100%, the Switch will shut down PDs one-by-one according to the PD
priority which you configured in Basic Setting > PoE Setup.
PoE Usage
Threshold (%)
This field displays the percentage of PoE usage. The Switch will generate a trap and/or a log
when the usage exceeds the specified threshold.
Consuming
Power (W)
This field displays the amount of power the Switch is currently supplying to the connected PoE-
enabled devices.
Allocated Power
(W)
This field displays the total amount of power the Switch has reserved for PoE after negotiating
with the connected PoE device(s).
Consuming Power (W) can be less than or equal but not more than the Allocated Power (W).
Remaining
Power (W)
This field displays the amount of power the Switch can still provide for PoE.
Port This is the port index number.
State This field shows which ports can receive power from the Switch. You can set this in Section 8.8.2
on page 93.
•Disable - The PD connected to this port cannot get power supply.
•Enable - The PD connected to this port can receive power.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
92
8.8.1 PoE Time Range Setup
Use this screen to apply a schedule to the port(s) on the Switch. You must first configure a schedule in
the Advanced Application > Time Range screen.
Click the PoE Time Range Setup link in the Basic Setting > PoE Setup screen. The following screen opens.
Class This shows the power classification of the PD. Each PD has a specified maximum power that fall
under one of the classes.
The Class is a number from 0 to 4, where each value represents the range of power that the
Switch provides to the PD. The power ranges in PoE standards are as follows.
•Class 0 - default: 0.44 W to 15.4 W.
•Class 1 - default: 0.44 W to 4 W.
•Class 2 - default: 0.44 W to 7 W.
•Class 3 - default: 0.44 W to 15.4 W.
•Class 4 - default: 0.44 W to 30 W.
Note: You can set a limit on the maximum power the connected PD can use on a
port in Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Setup.
PD Priority When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the Switch,
you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with higher priority first.
•Critical has the highest priority.
•High has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical priority ports are served.
•Low has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical and high priority ports are
served.
Power-Up This field displays the PoE standard the Switch uses to provide power on this port.
Consuming
Power (W)
This field displays the current amount of power consumed by the PD from the Switch on this port.
Max Power (W) This field displays the maximum amount of power the PD could use from the Switch on this port.
Time Range
State
This field shows whether or not the port currently receives power from the Switch according to its
schedule.
• It shows “In” followed by the time range name if PoE is currently enabled on the port.
• It shows “Out” if PoE is currently disabled on the port.
• It shows “-” if no schedule is applied to the port. PoE is enabled by default.
Table 19 Basic Setting > PoE Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
93
Figure 73 Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Time Range Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.8.2 PoE Se tup
Use this screen to set the PoE power management mode, priority levels, power-up mode and the
maximum amount of power for the connected PDs.
Click the PoE Setup link in the Basic Setting > PoE Setup screen. The following screen opens.
Table 20 Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Time Range Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Time Range Setup
Port Enter the port number you want to configure.
Time
Range Select one or more time range profiles that determine when PoE will be enabled in this port. You
can configure time range profiles in Advanced Application > Time Range.
You can select multiple profiles by holding the Ctrl key before clicking on multiple profiles, or by
clicking on one profile and dragging your mouse to select the desired profiles.
Note: The schedules you assign to one port must not have any overlap.
Apply Click this button to apply the selected time range profile(s) on the specified port.
Cancel Click this button to reset the Port and Time Range fields.
Port This is the number of the port on the Switch. Click this number to configure the PoE time range of
this port.
Time Range
Profiles
This field displays the name of the schedule(s) applied to the port. If a schedule is assigned to a
port, PoE is enabled only at the time/date specified in the time range profile(s). If no schedule is
assigned, PoE is enabled by default.
Click a check box to select a corresponding port. Select the topmost check box to select all
ports.
Delete Click this button to delete the time range profile of the selected port(s).
Cancel Click this button to clear all check boxes.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
94
Figure 74 Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 21 Basic Setting > PoE Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PoE Mode Select the power management mode you want the Switch to use.
•Classification - Select this if you want the Switch to reserve the maximum power for each PD
according to the PD’s power class and priority level. If the total power supply runs out, PDs
with lower priority do not get power to function. In this mode, the maximum power is reserved
based on what you configure in Max Power or the standard power limit for each class.
•Consumption - Select this if you want the Switch to supply the actual power that the PD
needs. The Switch also allocates power based on a port’s M ax Power and the PD’s power
class and priority level. The Switch puts a limit on the maximum amount of power the PD can
request and use. In this mode, the default maximum power that can be delivered to the PD is
33 W (IEEE 802.3at Class 4) or 22 W (IEEE 802.3af Classes 0 to 3).
PoE Usage
Threshold (%)
Enter a number ranging from 1 to 99 to set the threshold. The Switch will generate a trap and/or
log when the actual PoE usage is higher than the specified threshold.
Port This is the port index number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
PD Select this to provide power to a PD connected to the port.
If left unchecked, the PD connected to the port cannot receive power from the Switch.
PD Priority When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the Switch,
you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with higher priority.
Select Critical to give the highest PD priority on the port.
Select High to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical priority
ports are served.
Select Low to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical and high
priority ports are served.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
95
Power-Up Set how the Switch provides power to a connected PD at power-up.
802.3af - the Switch follows the IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet standard to supply power to the
connected PDs during power-up.
Legacy - the Switch can provide power to the connected PDs that require high inrush currents at
power-up. Inrush current is the maximum, instantaneous input current drawn by the PD when first
turned on.
Pre-802.3at - the Switch initially offers power on the port according to the IEEE 802.3af standard,
and then switches to support the IEEE 802.3at standard within 75 milliseconds after a PD is
connected to the port. Select this option if the Switch is performing 2-event Layer-1 classification
(PoE+ hardware classification) or the connected PD is NOT performing Layer 2 power
classification using Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).
802.3at - the Switch supports the IEEE 802.3at High Power over Ethernet standard and can supply
power of up to 30W per Ethernet port. IEEE 802.3at is also known as PoE+ or PoE Plus. An IEEE
802.3at compatible device is referred to as Type 2. Power Class 4 (High Power) can only be used
by Type 2 devices. If the connected PD requires a Class 4 current when it is turned on, it will be
powered up in this mode.
Force-802.3at - the Switch offers power of up to 33W on the port without performing PoE
hardware classification. Select this option if the connected PD doesn’t comply with any PoE
standard and requests power higher than a standard power limit.
Max Power
(mW)
Specify the maximum amount of power the PD could use from the Switch on this port. If you leave
this field blank, the Switch refers to the standard or default maximum power for each class.
Wide Range
Detection
Select this to let the Switch have a wider detection range for the PD.
The Switch detects whether a connected device is a powered device or not before supplying
power to the port. For the PD detection, the Switch applies a fixed voltage to the device and
then receives returned current. If the returned current is within the IEEE 802.3AF/AT standard
range, the device will be considered as a valid PD by the Switch.
However, in real cases, environmental interferences might easily cause the returned current to be
out of the standard range.
LLDP Power Via
MDI
Select this to have the Switch negotiate PoE power with the PD connected to the port by
transmitting LLDP Power Via MDI TLV frames. This helps the Switch allocate less power to the PD on
this port. The connected PD must be able to request PoE power through LLDP.
The Power Via MDI TLV allows PoE devices to advertise and discover the MDI power support
capabilities of the sending port on the remote device.
• Port Class
• MDI Supported
•MDI Enabled
• Pair Controllable
• PSE Power Pairs
•Power Class
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 21 Basic Setting > PoE Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
96
8.9 Interface Setup
An IPv6 address is configured on a per-interface basis. The interface can be a physical interface (for
example, an Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, a VLAN). The Switch supports the VLAN
interface type for IPv6 at the time of writing.
Use this screen to set IPv6 interfaces on which you can configure an IPv6 address to access and
manage the Switch. Click Basic Setting > Interface Setup in the navigation panel to display the
configuration screen.
Figure 75 Basic Setting > Interface Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 22 Basic Setting > Interface Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Type Select the type of IPv6 interface for which you want to configure. The Switch supports the VLAN
interface type for IPv6 at the time of writing.
Interface ID Specify a unique identification number (from 1 to 4094) for the interface.
To have IPv6 function properly, you should configure a static VLAN with the same ID number in the
Advanced Application > VLAN screens.
Add Click this to create a new entry.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Index This field displays the index number of an entry.
Interface Type This field displays the type of interface.
Interface ID This field displays the identification number of the interface.
Interface This field displays the interface’s descriptive name which is generated automatically by the
Switch. The name is from a combination of the interface type and ID number.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
97
8.10 IPv6
Use this screen to view the IPv6 interface status and configure Switch’s management IPv6 addresses.
Click Basic Setting > IPv6 in the navigation panel to display the IPv6 status screen as shown next.
Figure 76 Basic Setting > IPv6
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.1 IPv6 Interface Status
Use this screen to view a specific IPv6 interface status and detailed information. Click an interface index
number in the Basic Setting > IPv6 screen. The following screen opens.
Table 23 Basic Setting > IPv6
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of an IPv6 interface. Click on an index number to view more
interface details.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
Active This field displays whether the IPv6 interface is activated or not.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
98
Figure 77 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Interface Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 24 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Interface Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Active This field displays whether the IPv6 interface is activated or not.
MTU Size This field displays the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size for IPv6 packets on this
interface.
ICMPv6 Rate Limit Bucket
Size
This field displays the maximum number of ICMPv6 error messages which are
allowed to transmit in a given time interval. If the bucket is full, subsequent error
messages are suppressed.
ICMPv6 Rate Limit Error
Interval
This field displays the time period (in milliseconds) during which ICMPv6 error
messages of up to the bucket size can be transmitted. 0 means no limit.
Stateless Address
Autoconfig
This field displays whether the Switch’s interface can automatically generate a link-
local address via stateless autoconfiguration.
Link Local Address This field displays the Switch’s link-local IP address and prefix generated by the
interface. It also shows whether the IP address is preferred, which means it is a valid
address and can be used as a sender or receiver address.
Global Unicast Address(es) This field displays the Switch’s global unicast address to identify this interface.
Joined Group Address(es) This field displays the IPv6 multicast addresses of groups the Switch’s interface joins.
ND DAD Active This field displays whether Neighbor Discovery (ND) Duplicate Address Detection
(DAD) is enabled on the interface.
Number of DAD Attempts This field displays the number of consecutive neighbor solicitations the Switch sends
for this interface.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
99
8.10.2 IPv6 Configuration
Use this screen to configure IPv6 settings on the Switch. Click the IPv6 Configuration link in the Basic
Setting > IPv6 screen. The following screen opens.
NS-Interval (millisecond) This field displays the time interval (in milliseconds) at which neighbor solicitations are
re-sent for this interface.
ND Reachable Time
(millisecond)
This field displays how long (in milliseconds) a neighbor is considered reachable for
this interface.
DHCPv6 Client Active This field displays whether the Switch acts as a DHCPv6 client to get an IPv6 address
from a DHCPv6 server.
Identity Association An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client,
through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each
IA must be associated with exactly one interface.
IA Type The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA
means an identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity
association for temporary addresses.
IAID Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information.
T1 This field displays the DHCPv6 T1 timer. After T1, the Switch sends the DHCPv6 server a
Renew message.
An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The
DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with
the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes
expire.
T2 This field displays the DHCPv6 T2 timer. If the time T2 is reached and the server does
not respond, the Switch sends a Rebind message to any available server.
State This field displays the state of the TA. It shows
Active when the Switch obtains addresses from a DHCpv6 server and the TA is
created.
Renew when the TA’s address lifetime expires and the Switch sends out a Renew
message.
Rebind when the Switch doesn’t receive a response from the original DHCPv6 server
and sends out a Rebind message to another DHCPv6 server
SID This field displays the DHCPv6 server’s unique ID.
Address This field displays the Switch’s global address which is assigned by the DHCPv6
server.
Preferred Lifetime This field displays how long (in seconds) that the global address remains preferred.
Valid Lifetime This field displays how long (in seconds) that the global address is valid.
DNS This field displays the DNS server address assigned by the DHCPv6 server.
Domain List This field displays the address record when the Switch queries the DNS server to
resolve domain names.
Restart DHCPv6 Client Click Click Here to send a new DHCP request to the DHCPv6 server and update the
IPv6 address and DNS information for this interface.
Table 24 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Interface Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
100
Figure 78 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.3 IPv6 Global Setup
Use this screen to configure the global IPv6 settings. Click the link next to IPv6 Global Setup in the IPv6
Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 79 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Setup
Table 25 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Global
Setup
Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the global IPv6 settings on the Switch.
IPv6 Interface
Setup
Click the link to go to a screen where you can enable an IPv6 interface on the Switch.
IPv6 Addressing
IPv6 Link-
Local
Address
Setup
Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the IPv6 link-local address for an
interface.
IPv6 Global
Address
Setup
Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the IPv6 global address for an interface.
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery
IPv6
Neighbor
Discovery
Setup
Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the IPv6 neighbor discovery settings.
IPv6 Neighbor
Setup
Click the link to go to a screen where you can create a static IPv6 neighbor entry in the Switch’s
IPv6 neighbor table.
DHCPv6 Client
Setup
Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the Switch DHCP settings.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
101
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.4 IPv6 Interface Setup
Use this screen to turn on or off an IPv6 interface and enable stateless auto-configuration on it. Click the
link next to IPv6 Interface Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 80 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Interface Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 26 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Hop Limit Specify the maximum number of hops (from 1 to 255) in router advertisements. This is the
maximum number of hops on which an IPv6 packet is allowed to transmit before it is discarded by
an IPv6 router, which is similar to the TTL field in IPv4.
ICMPv6 Rate
Limit Bucket
Size
Specify the maximum number of ICMPv6 error messages (from 1 to 200) which are allowed to
transmit in a given time interval. If the bucket is full, subsequent error messages are suppressed.
ICMPv6 Rate
Limit Error
Interval
Specify the time period (from 0 to 2147483647 milliseconds) during which ICMPv6 error messages
of up to the bucket size can be transmitted. 0 means no limit.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Table 27 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Interface Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
Active Select this option to enable the interface.
Address
Autoconfig
Select this option to allow the interface to automatically generate a link-local address via
stateless autoconfiguration.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
102
8.10.5 IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a “private IP
address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a device. A link-
local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10.
Use this screen to configure the interface’s link-local address and default gateway. Click the link next to
IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 81 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Active This field displays whether the IPv6 interface is activated or not.
Address
Autoconfig
This field displays whether stateless autoconfiguration is enabled on the interface.
Table 27 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Interface Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 28 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
Link-Local
Address
Manually configure a static IPv6 link-local address for the interface.
Default
Gateway
Set the default gateway IPv6 address for the interface. When an interface cannot find a routing
information for a frame’s destination, it forwards the packet to the default gateway.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
IPv6 Link-Local
Address
This is the static IPv6 link-local address for the interface.
IPv6 Default
Gateway
This is the default gateway IPv6 address for the interface.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
103
8.10.6 IPv6 Global Address Setup
Use this screen to configure the interface’s IPv6 global address. Click the link next to IPv6 Global Address
Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 82 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Address Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.7 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup
Use this screen to configure neighbor discovery settings for each interface. Click the link next to IPv6
Neighbor Discovery Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Table 29 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Address Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
IPv6 Global
Address
Manually configure a static IPv6 global address for the interface.
Prefix Length Specify an IPv6 prefix length that specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in
the address compose the network address.
EUI-64 Select this option to have the interface ID be generated automatically using the EUI-64 format.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
IPv6 Global
Address/Prefix
Length
This field displays the IPv6 global address and prefix length for the interface.
EUI-64 This shows whether the interface ID of the global address is generated using the EUI-64 format.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click Delete to remove the selected
entry(ies) from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
104
Figure 83 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.8 IPv6 Neighbor Setup
Use this screen to create a static IPv6 neighbor entry in the Switch’s IPv6 neighbor table to store the
neighbor information permanently. Click the link next to IPv6 Neighbor Setup in the IPv6 Configuration
screen to display the screen as shown next.
Table 30 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
DAD Attempts The Switch uses Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) with neighbor solicitation and advertisement
messages to check whether an IPv6 address is already in use before assigning it to an interface,
such as the link-local address it creates through stateless address autoconfiguration.
Specify the number of consecutive neighbor solicitations (from 0 to 600) the Switch sends for this
interface. Enter 0 to turn off DAD.
NS Interval Specify the time interval (from 1000 to 3600000 milliseconds) at which neighbor solicitations are re-
sent for this interface.
Reachable
Time
Specify how long (from 1000 to 3600000 milliseconds) a neighbor is considered reachable for this
interface.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
DAD Attempts This field displays the number of consecutive neighbor solicitations the Switch sends for this
interface.
NS Interval This field displays the time interval (in milliseconds) at which neighbor solicitations are re-sent for
this interface.
Reachable
Time
This field displays how long (in milliseconds) a neighbor is considered reachable for this interface.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
105
Figure 84 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 31 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Type Select the type of IPv6 interface for which you want to configure. The Switch supports the VLAN
interface type for IPv6 at the time of writing.
Interface ID Specify a unique identification number (from 1 to 4094) for the interface.
A static IPv6 neighbor entry displays in the Management > Neighbor Table screen only when the
interface ID is also created in the Basic Setup > Interface Setup screen.
To have IPv6 function properly, you should configure a static VLAN with the same ID number in the
Advanced Application > VLAN screens.
Neighbor
Address
Specify the IPv6 address of the neighboring device which can be reached through the interface.
MAC Specify the MAC address of the neighboring device which can be reached through the
interface.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
Neighbor
Address
This field displays the IPv6 address of the neighboring device which can be reached through the
interface
MAC This field displays the MAC address of the neighboring device which can be reached through the
interface.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the table
heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click Delete to remove the selected
entry(ies) from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
106
8.10.9 DHCPv6 Client Setup
Use this screen to configure the Switch’s DHCP settings when it is acting as a DHCPv6 client. Click the link
next to DHCPv6 Client Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 85 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > DHCPv6 Client Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 32 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > DHCPv6 Client Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
IA Type Select IA-NA to set the Switch to get a non-temporary IP address from the DHCPv6 server for this
interface.
Optionally, you can also select Rapid-Commit to have the Switch send its DHCPv6 Solicit message
with a Rapid Commit option to obtain information from the DHCPv6 server by a rapid two-
message exchange. The Switch discards any Reply messages that do not include a Rapid
Commit option. The DHCPv6 server should also support the Rapid Commit option to have it work
well.
Options Select DNS to have the Switch obtain DNS server IPv6 addresses and/or select Domain-List to
have the Switch obtain a list of domain names from the DHCP server.
Information
Refresh
Minimum
Specify the time interval (from 600 to 4294967295 seconds) at which the Switch exchanges other
configuration information with a DHCPv6 server again.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
IA-NA This field displays whether the Switch obtains a non-temporary IP address from the DHCPv6 server.
Rapid-Commit This field displays whether the Switch obtains information from the DHCPv6 server by a rapid two-
message exchange.
DNS This field displays whether the Switch obtains DNS server IPv6 addresses from the DHCPv6 server.
Domain-List This field displays whether the Switch obtains a list of domain names from the DHCP server.
Information
Refresh
Minimum
This field displays the time interval (in seconds) at which the Switch exchanges other configuration
information with a DHCPv6 server again.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
107
8.11 DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice
versa. Use the DNS screen to configure and view the default DNS servers on the Switch.
Figure 86 Basic Setting > DNS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.12 Cloud Management
The Zyxel Nebula Control Center (NCC) is a cloud-based network management system that allows you
to remotely manage and monitor Zyxel Nebula APs, Ethernet switches and security gateways.
The Switch is managed and provisioned automatically by the NCC (Nebula Control Center) when:
• It is connected to the Internet
• The Nebula Control Center Discovery feature is enabled
• It has been registered in the NCC.
Table 33 Basic Setting > DNS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Static Domain Name Server
Preference This is the priority of the DNS server address.
Server Address Enter a domain name server IPv6/IPv4 address in order to be able to use a domain name
instead of an IP address.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Domain Name Server Table
Index This field displays priority of the DNS server address.
Server Address This field displays the IP address of the DNS server.
Source This field displays whether the DNS server address is configured manually (Static) or
obtained automatically using DHCPv4 or DHCPv6.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
108
This screen displays links to Nebula Control Center Discovery where you can have the Switch search for
the NCC (Nebula Control Center) and to Nebula Switch Registration which has a QR code containing
the Switch’s serial number and MAC address for handy registration of the Switch at NCC.
Click Basic Setting > Cloud Management in the navigation panel to display this screen.
Figure 87 Basic Setting > Cloud Management
8.12.1 Nebula Control Center Discovery
Click Basic Setting > Cloud Management > Nebula Control Center Discovery to display this screen.
Figure 88 Basic Setting > Cloud Management > Nebula Control Center Discovery
Select Active to turn on NCC discovery on the Switch. If the Switch has Internet access and has been
registered in the NCC, it will go into cloud management mode.
In cloud management mode, then NCC will first check if the firmware on the Switch needs to be
upgraded. If it does, the Switch will upgrade the firmware immediately. If the firmware doesn’t need to
be upgraded, but there is newer firmware available for the Switch, then it will be upgraded according
to the firmware upgrade schedule for the Switch on the NCC. Below is the process for upgrading
firmware:
1Download firmware via the NCC
2Upgrade the firmware and reboot.
Note: While the Switch is rebooting, don’t turn off the power.
Clear Active to turn off NCC discovery on the Switch. The Switch will not discover the NCC and remain in
standalone mode. See Section 1.1.2 on page 22 for more information.
8.12.2 Nebula Switch Registration
Click Basic Setting > Cloud Management > Nebula Switch Registration to display this screen.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
109
Figure 89 Basic Setting > Cloud Management > Nebula Switch Registration
This screen has a QR code containing the Switch’s serial number and MAC address for handy NCC
registration of the Switch using the Nebula Mobile app. First, download the app from the Google Play
store for Android devices or the App Store for iOS devices and create an organization and site.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
110
CHAPTER 9
VLAN
9.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure 802.1Q tagged and port-based VLANs. The type of screen you
see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen.
Note: If you've enabled CLV mode in the Command Line Interface (CLI) to configure the
Switch's VLAN settings, further VLAN changes you make via the web configurator will
not be saved and applied completely. You can still use the web configurator to view
the VLAN status.
If you want to configure VLAN settings in both the web configurator and the CLI, just
return to Zyxel configuration mode by turning off CLV mode. See the CLI Reference
Guide for more information about CLV mode.
9.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the VLAN Status screen (Section 9.2 on page 114) to view and search all VLAN groups.
• Use the VLAN Detail screen (Section 9.2.1 on page 115) to view detailed port settings and status of the
VLAN group.
• Use the Static VLAN Setup screen (Section 9.4 on page 116) to configure and view 802.1Q VLAN
parameters for the Switch.
• Use the VLAN Port Setup screen (Section 9.5 on page 118) to configure the static VLAN (IEEE 802.1Q)
settings on a port.
• Use the Subnet Based VLAN Setup screen (Section 9.6 on page 119) to set up VLANs that allow you to
group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you specify.
• Use the Protocol Based VLAN Setup screen (Section 9.7 on page 121) to set up VLANs that allow you
to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify.
• Use the Voice VLAN Setup screen (Section 9.8 on page 123) to set up VLANs that allow you to group
voice traffic with defined priority and enable the switch port to carry the voice traffic separately from
data traffic to ensure the sound quality does not deteriorate.
• Use the MAC Based VLAN Setup screen (Section 9.9 on page 125) to set up VLANs that allow you to
group untagged packets into logical VLANs based on the source MAC address of the packet. This
eliminates the need to reconfigure the switch when you change ports. The switch will forward the
packets based on the source MAC address you setup previously.
• Use the Vendor ID Based VLAN Setup screen (Section 9.10 on page 126) to set up VLANs that allow
you to group untagged packets into logical VLANs based on the source MAC address of the packet.
You can specify a mask for the MAC address to create a MAC address filter and enter a weight to set
the VLAN rule’s priority.
• Use the Port-Based VLAN screen (Section 9.11 on page 128) to set up VLANs where the packet
forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
111
9.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read this section to know more about VLAN and how to configure the screens.
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLANs
A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a
frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can
be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a
specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network.
A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag
Protocol Identifier, residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag
Control Information, starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame).
The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If a
frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to
an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of
4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A frame with VID
(VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and
the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is
used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN
configurations are 4,094.
Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames
Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. To forward a frame from an
802.1Q VLAN-aware switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware switch, the Switch first decides where to
forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware
switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch, the Switch first decides where to forward the frame, and then
inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port's default VID. The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports, but this
can be changed.
A broadcast frame (or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system) is duplicated
only on ports that are members of the VID (except the ingress port itself), thus confining the broadcast to
a specific domain.
9.1.2.1 Automatic VLAN Registration
GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches.
GARP
GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) allows network switches to register and de-register
attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN. GARP is a protocol that provides a
generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application, for example, GVRP.
TPID
2 Bytes
User Priority
3 Bits
CFI
1 Bit
VLAN ID
12 bits
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
112
GARP Timers
Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using
GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All message terminates all
registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values.
GVRP
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to
register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network. Enable this function to permit VLAN
groups beyond the local Switch.
Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802.1Q VLAN terminology.
9.1.2.2 Port VLAN Trunking
Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through
that port. This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the
same VLAN groups on intermediary devices.
Refer to the following figure. Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 (V1 and V2) on devices
A and B. Without VLAN Trunking, you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C,
D and E; otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags. However, with VLAN Trunking
enabled on a port(s) in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end
devices (A and B). C, D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 (VLAN groups
that are unknown to those switches) to pass through their VLAN trunking port(s).
Table 34 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Terminology
VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION
VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually.
Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration/deregistration
process.
VLAN Administrative
Control
Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members.
Registration
Forbidden
Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the specified
VLAN.
Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP.
VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames
transmitted.
Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don't tag all outgoing frames
transmitted.
VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port
received.
Acceptable Frame
Type
You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming
frames, just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming
frames on a port.
Ingress filtering If set, the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not
have this port as a member
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
113
Figure 90 Port VLAN Trunking
9.1.2.3 VLAN Priority
At the time of writing, you can create Static VLANs, Voice VLANs, Vendor ID-based VLANs, Subnet Based
VLANs, Protocol Based VLANs and MAC Based VLANs on the Switch when the VLAN type is set to 802.1Q.
When a packet is received, the Switch processes the VLAN rules in sequence. The sequence (priority) of
the VLANs is:
1Vendor ID Based VLAN
2Voice VLAN
3Subnet Based VLAN
4Protocol Based VLAN
5MAC Based VLAN
If the packet matches a VLAN rule that has a higher priority, for example, an entry with weight 250 in the
vendor ID to VLAN mapping table, the Switch assigns the corresponding VLAN ID to the packet and
stops checking the subsequent VLAN rules.
9.1.2.4 Select the VLAN Type
Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting > Switch Setup screen.
Figure 91 Switch Setup > Select VLAN Type
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
114
Static VLAN
Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be
• sent to a VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag.
• sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not.
• blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag.
You can also tag all outgoing frames (that were previously untagged) from a port with the specified
VID.
9.2 VLAN Status
Use this screen to view and search all VLAN groups. Click Advanced Application > VLAN from the
navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next.
Figure 92 Advanced Application > VLAN: VLAN Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 35 Advanced Application > VLAN: VLAN Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Search by
VID
Enter an existing VLAN ID number(s) (separated by a comma) and click Search to display only
the specified VLAN(s) in the list below.
Leave this field blank and click Search to display all VLANs configured on the Switch.
The Number of
VLAN
This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch.
The Number of
Search Results
This is the number of VLANs that match the searching criteria and display in the list below.
This field displays only when you use the Search button to look for certain VLANs.
Index This is the VLAN index number. Click on an index number to view more VLAN details.
VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen.
Name This fields shows the descriptive name of the VLAN.
Tagged Port This field shows the tagged ports that are participating in the VLAN.
Untagged Port This field shows the untagged ports that are participating in the VLAN.
Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was
set up.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
115
9.2.1 VLAN Detail
Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group. Click on an index number in
the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details.
Figure 93 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Detail
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
9.3 VLAN Configuration
Use this screen to view IEEE 802.1Q VLAN parameters for the Switch. Click Advanced Application > VLAN
> VLAN Configuration to see the following screen.
Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch.
Dynamic: using GVRP
Static: added as a permanent entry
Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous/next screen if all status information cannot be seen in
one screen.
Table 35 Advanced Application > VLAN: VLAN Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 36 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen.
VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen.
Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN. A tagged port is marked as T, an
untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as “–“.
Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was
set up.
Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch.
Dynamic: using GVRP
Static: added as a permanent entry
Voice: manually added as a Voice VLAN
MVR: added via multicast VLAN registration
MAC-based: manually added as MAC-based VLAN
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
116
Figure 94 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration
The following table describes the labels in the above screen.
9.4 Configure a Static VLAN
Use this screen to configure a static VLAN for the Switch. Click the Static VLAN Setup link in the VLAN
Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Table 37 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Static VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the Static VLAN for the Switch.
VLAN Port Setup Click Click Here to configure the VLAN Port for the Switch.
Subnet Based VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the Subnet Based VLAN for the Switch.
Protocol Based VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the Protocol Based VLAN for the Switch.
Voice VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the Voice VLAN for the Switch.
MAC Based VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the MAC Based VLAN for the Switch.
Vendor ID Based VLAN
Setup
Click Click Here to configure the Vendor ID Based VLAN for the Switch.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
117
Figure 95 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 38 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings.
Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes. This name consists of up
to 64 printable characters. Spaces are allowed.
VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.
Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP. This is the default
selection.
Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group.
Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group.
Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN
Group ID.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
118
9.5 Configure VLAN Port Setting
Use the VLAN Port Setup screen to configure the static VLAN (IEEE 802.1Q) settings on a port. Click the
VLAN Port Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen.
Figure 96 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN Port Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group. Click the number to edit the VLAN settings.
Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled (Yes) or disabled (No).
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 38 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 39 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration> VLAN Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GVRP GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a way for
switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network.
Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
119
9.6 Subnet Based VLANs
Subnet based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you
specify. When a frame is received on a port, the Switch checks if a tag is added already and the IP
subnet it came from. The untagged packets from the same IP subnet are then placed in the same
subnet based VLAN. One advantage of using subnet based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to
traffic from the same IP subnet.
For example, an ISP (Internet Services Provider) may divide different types of services it provides to
customers into different IP subnets. Traffic for voice services is designated for IP subnet 172.16.1.0/24,
video for 192.168.1.0/24 and data for 10.1.1.0/24. The Switch can then be configured to group incoming
traffic based on the source IP subnet of incoming frames.
You configure a subnet based VLAN with priority 6 and VID of 100 for traffic received from IP subnet
172.16.1.0/24 (voice services). You also have a subnet based VLAN with priority 5 and VID of 200 for
traffic received from IP subnet 192.168.1.0/24 (video services). Lastly, you configure VLAN with priority 3
and VID of 300 for traffic received from IP subnet 10.1.1.0/24 (data services). All untagged incoming
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Ingress Check If this check box is selected, the Switch discards incoming frames on a port for VLANs that do
not include this port in its member set.
Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering.
PVID A PVID (Port VLAN ID) is a tag that adds to incoming untagged frames received on a port so
that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.
Enter a number between 1and 4094 as the port VLAN ID.
GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port.
Acceptable
Frame Type
Specify the type of frames allowed on a port. Choices are All, Tag Only and Untag Only.
Select All from the drop-down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port.
This is the default setting.
Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port. All untagged frames will be
dropped.
Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port. All tagged frames will be
dropped.
VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers (but not ports directly
connected to end users) to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through
the Switch.
Isolation Select this to allows this port to communicate only with the CPU management port and the
ports on which the isolation feature is not enabled.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 39 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration> VLAN Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
120
frames will be classified based on their source IP subnet and prioritized accordingly. That is video
services receive the highest priority and data the lowest.
Figure 97 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example
9.6.1 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN
Click the Subnet Based VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to display the configuration
screen as shown.
Note: Subnet based VLAN applies to un-tagged packets and is applicable only when you use
IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN.
Figure 98 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Subnet Based VLAN Setup
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
121
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
9.7 Protocol Based VLANs
Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify.
When an upstream frame is received on a port (configured for a protocol based VLAN), the Switch
checks if a tag is added already and its protocol. The untagged packets of the same protocol are then
placed in the same protocol based VLAN. One advantage of using protocol based VLANs is that priority
can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol.
Table 40 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Subnet Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Check this box to activate this subnet based VLANs on the Switch.
DHCP-Vlan
Override
When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP clients can renew their IP address through the DHCP
VLAN or via another DHCP server on the subnet based VLAN.
Select this check box to force the DHCP clients in this IP subnet to obtain their IP addresses
through the DHCP VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Active Check this box to activate the IP subnet VLAN you are creating or editing.
Name Enter up to 32 alpha numeric characters to identify this subnet based VLAN.
IP Enter the IP address of the subnet for which you want to configure this subnet based VLAN.
Mask-Bits Enter the bit number of the subnet mask. To find the bit number, convert the subnet mask to
binary format and add all the 1’s together. Take “255.255.255.0” for example. 255 converts to
eight 1s in binary. There are three 255s, so add three eights together and you get the bit
number (24).
VID Enter Enter the ID of a VLAN with which the untagged frames from the IP subnet specified in this
subnet based VLAN are tagged. This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the
Advanced Applications > VLAN screens.
Priority Select the priority level that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index This is the index number identifying this subnet based VLAN. Click on any of these numbers to
edit an existing subnet based VLAN.
Active This field shows whether the subnet based VLAN is active or not.
Name This field shows the name the subnet based VLAN.
IP This field shows the IP address of the subnet for this subnet based VLAN.
Mask-Bits This field shows the subnet mask in bit number format for this subnet based VLAN.
VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the frames which belong to this subnet based VLAN.
Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this subnet based VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click this to delete the subnet based VLANs which you marked for deletion.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
122
Note: Protocol based VLAN applies to un-tagged packets and is applicable only when you
use IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN.
For example, port 1, 2, 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100, and port 4, 5, 6, 7 belong to static VLAN 120.
You configure a protocol based VLAN A with priority 3 for ARP traffic received on port 1, 2 and 3. You
also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 2 for Apple Talk traffic received on port 6 and 7. All
upstream ARP traffic from port 1, 2 and 3 will be grouped together, and all upstream Apple Talk traffic
from port 6 and 7 will be in another group and have higher priority than ARP traffic, when they go
through the uplink port to a backbone switch C.
Figure 99 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example
9.7.1 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN
Click the Protocol Based VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to display the configuration
screen as shown.
Note: Protocol-based VLAN applies to un-tagged packets and is applicable only when you
use IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN.
Figure 100 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Protocol Based VLAN Setup
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
123
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
9.8 Voice VLAN Setup
Voice VLAN ensures that the sound quality of an IP phone is preserved from deteriorating when the data
traffic on the Switch ports is high. It groups the voice traffic with defined priority into an assigned VLAN
which enables the separation of voice and data traffic coming onto the Switch port.
You can set priority level to the Voice VLAN and add MAC address of IP phones from specific
manufacturers by using its ID from the Organizationally Unique Identifiers (OUI).
Click the Voice VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to display the configuration screen as
shown.
Table 41 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Protocol Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Check this box to activate this protocol based VLAN.
Port Type a port to be included in this protocol based VLAN.
This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based VLAN. See
Chapter 9 on page 110 for more details on setting up VLANs.
Name Enter up to 32 alpha numeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN.
Ethernet-type Use the drop down list box to select a predefined protocol to be included in this protocol
based VLAN or select Others and type the protocol number in hexadecimal notation. For
example the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800, and Novell IPX protocol is 8137.
Note: Protocols in the hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to 0x05ff are not
allowed to be used for protocol based VLANs.
VID Enter the ID of a VLAN to which the port belongs. This must be an existing VLAN which you
defined in the Advanced Applications > VLAN screens.
Priority Select the priority level that the Switch will assign to frames belonging to this VLAN.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN. Click on any of these numbers
to edit an existing protocol based VLAN.
Active This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not.
Port This field shows which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN.
Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN.
Ethernet-type This field shows which Ethernet protocol is part of this protocol based VLAN.
VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port.
Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based
VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click this to delete the protocol based VLANs which you marked for deletion.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
124
Figure 101 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Voice VLAN Setup
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 42 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Voice VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Voice VLAN Global Setup
Voice VLAN Click the second radio button if you want to enable the Voice VLAN feature. Type a
VLAN ID number in the box next to the radio button that is associated with the Voice
VLAN. You also need to create a static VLAN with the same VID in the Static VLAN Setup
screen, and then connect the IP phone with the specified OUI MAC address to a port
that joins the static VLAN
Click the Disable radio button if you do not want to enable the Voice VLAN feature.
Priority Select the priority level of the Voice VLAN from 0 to 7. Default setting is 5.The higher the
numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this Voice VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to default settings.
Voice VLAN OUI Setup
OUI address Type the IP Phone manufacturer’s OUI MAC address. The first three byes is the
manufacturer identifier, the last three bytes is a unique station ID.
OUI mask Type the mask for the specified IP Phone manufacturer’s OUI MAC address to determine
which bits a packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should
match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any
hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00
and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56
matches this criteria.
Description Type an description up to 32 characters for the Voice VLAN device. For example:
Siemens.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
125
9.9 MAC Based VLAN
The MAC-based VLAN feature assigns incoming untagged packets to a VLAN and classifies the traffic
based on the source MAC address of the packet. When untagged packets arrive at the switch, the
source MAC address of the packet is looked up in a MAC to VLAN mapping table. If an entry is found,
the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. The assigned VLAN ID is verified against the VLAN
table. If the VLAN is valid, ingress processing on the packet continues; otherwise, the packet is dropped.
This feature allows users to change ports without having to reconfigure the VLAN. You can assign priority
to the MAC-based VLAN and define a MAC to VLAN mapping table by entering a specified source
MAC address in the MAC-based VLAN setup screen. You can also delete a MAC-based VLAN entry in
the same screen.
Click the MAC Based VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to see the following screen.
Figure 102 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > MAC Based VLAN Setup
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index This field displays the index number of the Voice VLAN.
OUI address This field displays the OUI address of the Voice VLAN.
OUI mask This field displays the OUI mask address of the Voice VLAN.
Description This field displays the description of the Voice VLAN with OUI address.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 42 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Voice VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
126
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
9.10 Vendor ID Based VLAN
The Vendor ID based VLAN feature assigns incoming untagged packets to a VLAN and classifies the
traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet. When untagged packets arrive at the switch,
the source MAC address of the packet is looked up in a Vendor ID to VLAN mapping table. If an entry is
found, the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. The assigned VLAN ID is verified against the
VLAN table. If the VLAN is valid, ingress processing on the packet continues; otherwise, the packet is
dropped.
This feature allows users to change ports without having to reconfigure the VLAN. You can assign a
802.1p priority to the vendor ID based VLAN and define a vendor ID to VLAN mapping table by entering
a specified source MAC address and mask in the vendor ID based VLAN setup screen. You can also
delete a vendor ID based VLAN entry in the same screen.
For every vendor ID based VLAN rule you set, you can specify a weight number to define the rule’s
priority level. As rules are processed one after the other, stating a priority order will let you choose which
rule has to be applied first and which second.
Click the Vendor ID Based VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to see the following screen.
Table 43 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > MAC Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Type a name up to 32 alpha numeric characters for the MAC-based VLAN entry.
MAC Address Type a MAC address that is bind to the MAC-based VLAN entry. This is the source MAC
address of the data packet that is looked up when untagged packets arrive at the Switch.
VID Type an ID (from 1 to 4094) for the VLAN ID that is associated with the MAC-based VLAN
entry.
Priority Type a priority (0-7) for the MAC-based VLAN entry.The higher the numeric value you
assign, the higher the priority for this MAC-based VLAN entry.
Add Click Add to save the new MAC-based VLAN entry.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the fields in the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Index This field displays the index number of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Name This field displays the name of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address that is bind to the MAC-based VLAN entry.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Priority This field displays the priority level of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
127
Figure 103 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Vendor ID Based VLAN Setup
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 44 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Vendor ID Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Type a name up to 32 alpha numeric characters for the vendor ID based VLAN entry.
MAC address Type a MAC address that is bind to the vendor ID-based VLAN entry. This is the source MAC
address of the data packet that is looked up when untagged packets arrive at the Switch.
Mask Type the mask for the specified source MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s
MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should
match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any
hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00
and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches
this criteria.
VLAN Type an ID (from 1 to 4094) for the VLAN that is associated with the vendor ID based VLAN
entry.
Priority Select the priority level that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN. The higher
the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this vendor ID based VLAN entry.
Weight Enter a number between 0 and 255 to specify the rule’s weight. This is to decide the priority
in which the rule is applied. The higher the number, the higher the rule’s priority.
Add Click Add to save the new vendor ID based VLAN entry.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the fields in the vendor ID based VLAN entry.
Index This field displays the index number of the vendor ID based VLAN entry.
Name This field displays the name of the vendor ID based VLAN entry.
MAC address This field displays the source MAC address that is bind to the vendor ID based VLAN entry.
Mask This field displays the mask for the source MAC address that is bind to the vendor ID based
VLAN entry.
VLAN This field displays the VLAN ID of the vendor ID based VLAN entry.
Priority This field displays the priority level which is assigned to frames belonging to this vendor ID
based VLAN.
Weight This field displays the weight of the vendor ID based VLAN entry.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
128
9.11 Port-Based VLAN Setup
Port-based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC
address and its associated port.
Port-based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port. Therefore, if you wish to
allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, for example, between conference rooms in a hotel, you
must define the egress (an egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port through which a data packet
leaves) for both ports.
Port-based VLANs are specific only to the Switch on which they were created.
Note: When you activate port-based VLAN, the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1. You
cannot change it.
Note: In screens (such as IP Setup and Filtering) that require a VID, you must enter 1 as the VID.
The port-based VLAN setup screen is shown next. The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all
Ethernet ports.
9.11.1 Configure a Port Based VLAN
Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Basic Setting > Switch Setup screen and then click Advanced
Application > VLAN from the navigation panel to display the next screen.
Figure 104 Advanced Application > VLAN: Port Based VLAN Setup (All Connected)
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
129
Figure 105 Advanced Application > VLAN: Port Based VLAN Setup (Port Isolation)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 45 Advanced Application > VLAN: Port Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Setting Wizard Choose All conne cted or Port isolation.
All connected means all ports can communicate with each other, that is, there are no virtual
LANs. All incoming and outgoing ports are selected. This option is the most flexible but also the
least secure.
Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port
and cannot communicate with each other. All incoming ports are selected while only the
CPU outgoing port is selected. This option is the most limiting but also the most secure.
After you make your selection, click Apply (top right of screen) to display the screens as
mentioned above. You can still customize these settings by adding/deleting incoming or
outgoing ports, but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen.
Incoming These are the ingress ports; an ingress port is an incoming port, that is, a port through which a
data packet enters. If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, you must
define the ingress port for both ports. The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for
the corresponding port listed on the left (its outgoing port). CPU refers to the Switch
management port. By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports. If it does not form a VLAN
with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port
Outgoing These are the egress ports; an egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port through which a
data packet leaves. If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, you must
define the egress port for both ports. CPU refers to the Switch management port. By default it
forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports. If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the
Switch cannot be managed from that port.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
130
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 45 Advanced Application > VLAN: Port Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
131
CHAPTER 10
Static MAC Forward Setup
10.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on your
network.
Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding.
10.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Static MAC Forwarding screen (Section 10.2 on page 131) to assign static MAC addresses for a
port.
10.2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding
A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table. Static
MAC addresses do not age out. When you set up static MAC address rules, you are setting static MAC
addresses for a port. This may reduce the need for broadcasting.
Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MAC address
table on a port to access the Switch. See Chapter 19 on page 181 for more information on port security.
Click Advanced Application > Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the
configuration screen as shown.
Figure 106 Advanced Application > Static MAC Forwarding
Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
132
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 46 Advanced Application > Static MAC Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule without
deleting it by clearing this check box.
Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule.
MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs.
Note: Static MAC addresses do not age out.
VID Enter the VLAN identification number.
Port Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically
forwarded.
Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses this rule if it is turned
off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the
non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port.
Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active (Yes) or not (No). You
may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address-
forwarding rule.
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to
which the MAC address belongs.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the table
heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
133
CHAPTER 11
Static Multicast Forwarding
11.1 Static Multicast Forward Setup Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on multicast MAC addresses of devices
on your network.
Use these screens to configure static multicast address forwarding.
11.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Static Multicast Forwarding screen (Section 11.2 on page 134) to configure rules to forward
specific multicast frames, such as streaming or control frames, to specific port(s).
11.1.2 What You Need To Know
A multicast MAC address is the MAC address of a member of a multicast group. A static multicast
address is a multicast MAC address that has been manually entered in the multicast table. Static
multicast addresses do not age out. Static multicast forwarding allows you (the administrator) to forward
multicast frames to a member without the member having to join the group first.
If a multicast group has no members, then the switch will either flood the multicast frames to all ports or
drop them. Figure 107 on page 133 shows such unknown multicast frames flooded to all ports. With static
multicast forwarding, you can forward these multicasts to port(s) within a VLAN group. Figure 108 on
page 134 shows frames being forwarded to devices connected to port 3. Figure 109 on page 134 shows
frames being forwarded to ports 2 and 3 within VLAN group 4.
Figure 107 No Static Multicast Forwarding
Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forwarding
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
134
Figure 108 Static Multicast Forwarding to A Single Port
Figure 109 Static Multicast Forwarding to Multiple Ports
11.2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding
Use this screen to configure rules to forward specific multicast frames, such as streaming or control
frames, to specific port(s).
Click Advanced Application > Static Multicast Forwarding to display the configuration screen as shown.
Figure 110 Advanced Application > Static Multicast Forwarding
Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forwarding
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
135
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 47 Advanced Application > Static Multicast Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule without
deleting it by clearing this check box.
Name Type a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for this static multicast MAC
address forwarding rule. This is for identification only.
MAC Address Enter a multicast MAC address which identifies the multicast group. The last binary bit of the first
octet pair in a multicast MAC address must be 1. For example, the first octet pair 00000001 is 01
and 00000011 is 03 in hexadecimal, so 01:00:5e:00:00:0A and 03:00:5e:00:00:27 are valid multicast
MAC addresses.
VID You can forward frames with matching destination MAC address to port(s) within a VLAN group.
Enter the ID that identifies the VLAN group here. If you don’t have a specific target VLAN, enter 1.
Port Enter the port(s) where frames with destination MAC address that matched the entry above are
forwarded. You can enter multiple ports separated by (no space) comma (,) or hyphen (-). For
example, enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses this rule if it is turned
off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the
non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index Click an index number to modify a static multicast MAC address rule for port(s).
Active This field displays whether a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule is active (Yes) or not
(No). You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for a static multicast MAC
address-forwarding rule.
MAC Address This field displays the multicast MAC address that identifies a multicast group.
VID This field displays the ID number of a VLAN group to which frames containing the specified
multicast MAC address will be forwarded.
Port This field displays the port(s) within a identified VLAN group to which frames containing the
specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
136
CHAPTER 12
Filtering
12.1 Filtering Overview
This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering.
Filtering means sifting traffic going through the Switch based on the source and/or destination MAC
addresses and VLAN group (ID).
12.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Filtering screen (Section 12.2 on page 136) to create rules for traffic going through the Switch.
12.2 Configure a Filtering Rule
Use this screen to create rules for traffic going through the Switch. Click Advanced Application > Filtering
in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 111 Advanced Application > Filtering
Chapter 12 Filtering
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
137
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 48 Advanced Application > Filtering
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule
without deleting it by deselecting this check box.
Name Type a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for this rule. This is for identification
only.
Action Select Discard source to drop the frames from the source MAC address (specified in the MAC field).
The Switch can still send frames to the MAC address.
Select Discard destination to drop the frames to the destination MAC address (specified in the MAC
address). The Switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address.
Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to/from the MAC address specified in
the MAC field.
MAC Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs.
VID Type the VLAN group identification number.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to change the settings.
Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
MAC Address This field displays the source/destination MAC address with the VLAN identification number to
which the MAC address belongs.
VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number.
Action This field displays Discard source, Discard destination, or Discard both depending on what you
configured above.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the table
heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es).
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
138
CHAPTER 13
Spanning Tree Protocol
13.1 Spanning Tree Protocol Overview
The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) and Multiple
Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) as defined in the following standards.
• IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations (or trees). Ports can then be assigned to
the trees.
13.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen (Section 13.2 on page 141) to view the STP status in the
different STP modes (RSTP, MRSTP or MSTP) you can configure on the Switch.
• Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen (Section 13.3 on page 142) to activate one of the STP
modes on the Switch.
• Use the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol screen (Section 13.4 on page 142) to configure RSTP settings.
• Use the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen (Section 13.5 on page 144) to view the RSTP status.
• Use the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol screen (Section 13.6 on page 146) to configure MSTP.
• Use the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen (Section 13.7 on page 150) to view the MSTP
status.
• Use the Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol screen (Section 13.8 on page 153) to configure MRSTP.
• Use the Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen (Section 13.9 on page 155) to view the
MRSTP status.
13.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on STP that can help you configure the screens in this chapter.
(Rapid) Spanning Tree Protocol
(R)STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches, bridges or
routers. It allows a switch to interact with other (R)STP -compliant switches in your network to ensure that
only one path exists between any two stations on the network.
The Switch uses IEEE 802.1w RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) that allows faster convergence of the
spanning tree than STP (while also being backwards compatible with STP-only aware bridges). In RSTP,
topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that
generates the topology change. In STP, a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
139
change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the network. Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted
learned addresses from the filtering database. In RSTP, the port states are Discarding, Learning, and
Forwarding.
Note: In this user’s guide, “STP” refers to both STP and RSTP.
STP Terminology
The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree.
Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port. The recommended cost is
assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached. The slower the media, the
higher the cost.
On each bridge, the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root. It is the
port on this switch with the lowest path cost to the root (the root path cost). If there is no root port, then
this switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network.
For each LAN segment, a designated bridge is selected. This bridge has the lowest cost to the root
among the bridges connected to the LAN.
How STP Works
After a bridge determines the lowest cost-spanning tree with STP, it enables the root port and the ports
that are the designated ports for connected LANs, and disables all other ports that participate in STP.
Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports, eliminating any possible
network loops.
STP-aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) periodically. When the bridged LAN
topology changes, a new spanning tree is constructed.
Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs (Bridge Protocol
Data Units) transmitted from the root bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined
interval (Max Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down. This bridge then initiates
negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re-establish a valid network topology.
Table 49 STP Path Costs
LINK SPEED RECOMMENDED VALUE RECOMMENDED RANGE ALLOWED RANGE
Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535
Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535
Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535
Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535
Path Cost 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535
Path Cost 10Gbps 2 1 to 5 1 to 65535
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
140
STP Port States
STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping. A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from
blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops.
Multiple STP
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s) is backward compatible with STP/RSTP and addresses the
limitations of existing spanning tree protocols (STP and RSTP) in networks to include the following
features:
• One Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) that represents the entire network’s connectivity.
• Grouping of multiple bridges (or switching devices) into regions that appear as one single bridge on
the network.
• A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI). MSTI allows multiple
VLANs to use the same spanning tree.
• Load-balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region.
Multiple RSTP
MRSTP (Multiple RSTP) is Zyxel’s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP. With MRSTP, you
can have more than one spanning tree on your Switch and assign port(s) to each tree. Each spanning
tree operates independently with its own bridge information.
In the following example, there are two RSTP instances (MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2) on switch A.
To set up MRSTP, activate MRSTP on the Switch and specify which port(s) belong to which spanning tree.
Note: Each port can belong to one STP tree only.
Table 50 STP Port States
PORT STATE DESCRIPTION
Disabled STP is disabled (default).
Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed.
Listening All BPDUs are received and processed.
Note: The listening state does not exist in RSTP.
Learning All BPDUs are received and processed. Information frames are submitted to the learning process
but not forwarded.
Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed. All information frames are received and forwarded.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
141
Figure 112 MRSTP Network Example
Multiple STP
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s) is backward compatible with STP/RSTP and addresses the
limitations of existing spanning tree protocols (STP and RSTP) in networks to include the following
features:
• One Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) that represents the entire network’s connectivity.
• Grouping of multiple bridges (or switching devices) into regions that appear as one single bridge on
the network.
• A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI). MSTI allows multiple
VLANs to use the same spanning tree.
• Load-balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region.
13.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen
The Spanning Tree Protocol status screen changes depending on what standard you choose to
implement on your network. Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol to see the screen as
shown.
Figure 113 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol
This screen differs depending on which STP mode (RSTP or MSTP) you configure on the Switch. This screen
is described in detail in the section that follows the configuration section for each STP mode. Click
Configuration to activate one of the STP standards on the Switch.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
142
13.3 Spanning Tree Configuration
Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen to activate one of the STP modes on the Switch. Click
Configuration in the Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol.
Figure 114 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
13.4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
Use this screen to configure RSTP settings, see Section 13.1 on page 138 for more information on RSTP.
Click RSTP in the Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol screen.
Table 51 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Spanning Tree
Mode
You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch.
Select Rapid Spanning Tree, Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree or Multiple Spanning Tree. See
Section 13.1 on page 138 for background information on STP.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
143
Figure 115 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > RSTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 52 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > RSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen (see Figure 116 on page 145).
Active Select this check box to activate RSTP. Clear this check box to disable RSTP.
Note: You must also activate Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application >
Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration screen to enable RSTP on the Switch.
Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch, root port and designated port. The switch
with the highest priority (lowest numeric value) becomes the STP root switch. If all switches
have the same priority, the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root
switch. Select a value from the drop-down list box.
The lower the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this bridge.
Bridge Priority determines the root bridge, which in turn determines Hello Time, Max Age and
Forwarding Delay.
Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) configuration
message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds.
Max Age This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before
attempting to reconfigure. All Switch ports (except for designated ports) should receive BPDUs
at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last BPDU)
becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is
selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network. The allowed range is 6 to 40
seconds.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
144
13.5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status
screen as shown next. See Section 13.1 on page 138 for more information on RSTP.
Note: This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the Switch.
Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch will wait before changing states. This delay is
required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information
that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.
The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds.
As a general rule:
Note: 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port.
Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a
computer. An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding
state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is
configured as an edge port or when its link status changes.
Note: An edge port becomes a non-edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge
Protocol Data Unit (BPDU).
Root Guard Select this check box to enable root guard on this port in order to prevent the switch(es)
attached to the port from becoming the root bridge.
With root guard enabled, a port is blocked when the Switch receives a superior BPDU on it. The
Switch allows traffic to pass through this port again when the switch connected to the port
stops to send superior BPDUs.
Priority Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a
switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range is
between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is recommended
to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the media, the higher the
cost - see Table 49 on page 139 for more information.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 52 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > RSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
145
Figure 116 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: RSTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 53 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: RSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate. Click RSTP to edit RSTP
settings on the Switch.
Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree (the root bridge). Our Bridge is this switch. This
Switch may also be the root bridge.
Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address. This ID
is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch.
Hello Time
(second)
This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a configuration
message. The root bridge determines Hello Time, Max Age and Forwarding Delay.
Max Age (second) This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch can wait without receiving a configuration
message before attempting to reconfigure.
Forwarding Delay
(second)
This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states (that is, listening to
learning to forwarding).
Note: The listening state does not exist in RSTP.
Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch.
Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must
communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree.
Topology
Changed Times
This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
Time Since Last
Change
This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
Instance These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mapping. In other words, which VLANs run on each
spanning tree instance.
Port This field displays the number of the port on the Switch.
Port State This field displays the port state in STP.
•Discarding - The port does not forward/process received frames or learn MAC addresses,
but still listens for BPDUs.
•Learning - The port learns MAC addresses and processes BPDUs, but does not forward
frames yet.
•Forwarding - The port is operating normally. It learns MAC addresses, processes BPDUs and
forwards received frames.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
146
13.6 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
To configure MSTP, click MSTP in the Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol screen. See
Multiple STP on page 140 for more information on MSTP.
Port Role This field displays the role of the port in STP.
•Root - A forwarding port on a non-root bridge, which has the lowest path cost and is the
best port from the non-root bridge to the root bridge. A root bridge does not have a root
port.
•Designated - A forwarding port on the designated bridge for each connected LAN
segment. A designated bridge has the lowest path cost to the root bridge among the
bridges connected to the LAN segment. All the ports on a root bridge (root switch) are
designated ports.
•Alternate - A blocked port, which has a best alternate path to the root bridge. This path is
different from using the root port. The port moves to the forwarding state when the
designated port for the LAN segment fails.
•Backup - A blocked port, which has a backup/redundant path to a LAN segment where
a designated port is already connected when a switch has two links to the same LAN
segment.
•Disabled - Not strictly part of STP. The port can be disabled manually.
Designated Bridge
ID
This field displays the identifier of the designated bridge to which this port belongs when the
port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the identifier of the designated bridge for the
LAN segment to which this port is connected.
Designated Port ID This field displays the priority and number of the bridge port (on the designated bridge),
through which the designated bridge transmits the stored configuration messages.
Designated Cost This field displays the path cost to the LAN segment to which the port is connected when the
port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the path cost to the root bridge from the
designated port for the LAN segment to which this port is connected,
Root Guard State This field displays the state of the port on which root guard is enabled.
•Root-inconsistent - the Switch receives superior BPDUs on the port and blocks the port.
•Forwarding - the Switch unblocks and allows the port to forward frames again.
Table 53 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: RSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
147
Figure 117 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 54 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status Click Status to display the MSTP Status screen (see Figure 119 on page 151).
Port Click Port to display the MST P Port screen (see Figure 118 on page 149).
Active Select this to activate MSTP on the Switch. Clear this to disable MSTP on the Switch.
Note: You must also activate Multip le Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application >
Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration screen to enable MSTP on the Switch.
Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) configuration
message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
148
Max Age This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before
attempting to reconfigure. All Switch ports (except for designated ports) should receive BPDUs
at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last BPDU)
becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is
selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network. The allowed range is 6 to 40
seconds.
Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch will wait before changing states. This delay is
required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information
that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.
The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds. As a general rule:
Note: 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
Maximum hops Enter the number of hops (between 1 and 255) in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded
and the port information is aged.
Configuration
Name
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 characters) of an MST region.
Revision Number Enter a number to identify a region’s configuration. Devices must have the same revision
number to belong to the same region.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Instance Use this section to configure MSTI (Multiple Spanning Tree Instance) settings.
Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch.
Note: The Switch supports instance numbers 0-16.
Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance. The lower the number, the
more likely the Switch will be chosen as the root bridge within the spanning tree instance.
Enter priority values between 0 and 61440 in increments of 4096 (thus valid values are 4096,
8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344 and
61440).
VLAN Range Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit
area in the Start field. Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove
from the VLAN range edit area in the End field.
Next click:
•Add - to add this range of VLAN(s) to be mapped to the MST instance.
•Remove - to remove this range of VLAN(s) from being mapped to the MST instance.
•Clear - to remove all VLAN(s) from being mapped to this MST instance.
Enabled VLAN(s) This field displays which VLAN(s) are mapped to this MST instance.
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST instance.
Table 54 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
149
13.6.1 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Port Configuration
Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP > Port in the navigation panel to display
the status screen as shown next. See Multiple STP on page 140 for more information on MSTP.
Figure 118 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Priority Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a
switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range is
between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is recommended
to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the media, the higher the
cost - see Table 49 on page 139 for more information.
Add Click Add to save this MST instance to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses this
change if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance. Click this number to modify its settings.
VLAN This field displays the VID (or VID ranges) to which the MST instance is mapped.
Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es).
Table 54 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 55 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MSTP Click MSTP to edit MSTP settings on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
150
13.7 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status
Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status
screen as shown next. See Multiple STP on page 140 for more information on MSTP.
Note: This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to
set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a
computer. An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding
state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is
configured as an edge port or when its link status changes.
Note: An edge port becomes a non-edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge
Protocol Data Unit (BPDU).
Root Guard Select this check box to enable root guard on this port in order to prevent the switch(es)
attached to the port from becoming the root bridge.
With root guard enabled, a port is blocked when the Switch receives a superior BPDU on it.
The Switch allows traffic to pass through this port again when the switch connected to the
port stops to send superior BPDUs.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 55 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
151
Figure 119 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MSTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 56 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate. Click MSTP to edit MSTP
settings on the Switch.
CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings.
Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree (the root bridge). Our Bridge is this switch. This
Switch may also be the root bridge.
Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address. This ID
is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch.
Hello Time
(second)
This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a configuration
message. The root bridge determines Hello Time, Max Age and Forwarding Delay.
Max Age (second) This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch can wait without receiving a configuration
message before attempting to reconfigure.
Forwarding Delay
(second)
This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states (that is, listening to
learning to forwarding).
Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch.
Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must
communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree.
Configuration
Name
This field displays the configuration name for this MST region.
Revision Number This field displays the revision number for this MST region.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
152
Configuration
Digest
A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN-MSTI mapping information.
This field displays the 16-octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU. This field displays the
digest when MSTP is activated on the system.
Topology
Changed Times
This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
Time Since Last
Change
This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
Instance These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mapping. In other words, which VLANs run on each
spanning tree instance.
Instance This field displays the MSTI ID.
VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI.
MSTI Select the MST instance settings you want to view.
Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance. Our Bridge is this switch. This Switch may also be
the root bridge.
Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address. This ID
is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch.
Internal Cost This is the path cost from the root port in this MST instance to the regional root switch.
Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must
communicate with the root of the MST instance.
Port This field displays the number of the port on the Switch.
Port State This field displays the port state in STP.
•Discarding - The port does not forward/process received frames or learn MAC addresses,
but still listens for BPDUs.
•Learning - The port learns MAC addresses and processes BPDUs, but does not forward
frames yet.
•Forwarding - The port is operating normally. It learns MAC addresses, processes BPDUs and
forwards received frames.
Port Role This field displays the role of the port in STP.
•Root - A forwarding port on a non-root bridge, which has the lowest path cost and is the
best port from the non-root bridge to the root bridge. A root bridge does not have a root
port.
•Designated - A forwarding port on the designated bridge for each connected LAN
segment. A designated bridge has the lowest path cost to the root bridge among the
bridges connected to the LAN segment. All the ports on a root bridge (root switch) are
designated ports.
•Alternate - A blocked port, which has a best alternate path to the root bridge. This path is
different from using the root port. The port moves to the forwarding state when the
designated port for the LAN segment fails.
•Backup - A blocked port, which has a backup/redundant path to a LAN segment where
a designated port is already connected when a switch has two links to the same LAN
segment.
•Disabled - Not strictly part of STP. The port can be disabled manually.
Designated Bridge
ID
This field displays the identifier of the designated bridge to which this port belongs when the
port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the identifier of the designated bridge for the
LAN segment to which this port is connected.
Designated Port ID This field displays the priority and number of the bridge port (on the designated bridge),
through which the designated bridge transmits the stored configuration messages.
Table 56 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
153
13.8 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
To configure MRSTP, click MRSTP in the Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol screen. See
Section 13.1 on page 138 for more information on MRSTP.
Figure 120 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MRSTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Designated Cost This field displays the path cost to the LAN segment to which the port is connected when the
port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the path cost to the root bridge from the
designated port for the LAN segment to which this port is connected.
Root Guard State This field displays the state of the port on which root guard is enabled.
•Root-inconsistent - the Switch receives superior BPDUs on the port and blocks the port.
•Forwarding - the Switch unblocks and allows the port to forward frames again.
Table 56 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 57 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MRSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen (see Figure 121 on page 155).
Tree This is a read only index number of the STP trees.
Active Select this check box to activate an STP tree. Clear this check box to disable an STP tree.
Note: You must also activate Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced
Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration screen to enable MRSTP
on the Switch.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
154
Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch, root port and designated port. The switch
with the highest priority (lowest numeric value) becomes the STP root switch. If all switches
have the same priority, the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root
switch. Select a value from the drop-down list box.
The lower the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this bridge.
Bridge Priority determines the root bridge, which in turn determines Hello Time, Max Age and
Forwarding Delay.
Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) configuration
message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds.
Max Age This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before
attempting to reconfigure. All Switch ports (except for designated ports) should receive BPDUs
at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last BPDU)
becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is
selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network. The allowed range is 6 to 40
seconds.
Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch will wait before changing states. This delay is
required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information
that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.
The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds.
As a general rule:
Note: 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port.
Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a
computer. An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding
state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is
configured as an edge port or when its link status changes.
Note: An edge port becomes a non-edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge
Protocol Data Unit (BPDU).
Root Guard Select this check box to enable root guard on this port in order to prevent the switch(es)
attached to the port from becoming the root bridge.
With root guard enabled, a port is blocked when the Switch receives a superior BPDU on it. The
Switch allows traffic to pass through this port again when the switch connected to the port
stops to send superior BPDUs.
Priority Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a
switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range is
between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is recommended
to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the media, the higher the
cost - see Table 49 on page 139 for more information.
Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port should participate in.
Table 57 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MRSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
155
13.9 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status
screen as shown next. See Section 13.1 on page 138 for more information on MRSTP.
Note: This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the Switch.
Figure 121 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MRSTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 57 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MRSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 58 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MRSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate. Click MRSTP to edit
MRSTP settings on the Switch.
Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view.
Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree (the root bridge). Our Bridge is this switch. This
Switch may also be the root bridge.
Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address. This ID
is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch.
Hello Time
(second)
This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a configuration
message. The root bridge determines Hello Time, Max Age and Forwarding Delay.
Max Age (second) This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch can wait without receiving a configuration
message before attempting to reconfigure.
Forwarding Delay
(second)
This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states (that is, listening to
learning to forwarding).
Note: The listening state does not exist in RSTP.
Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
156
13.10 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
13.10.1 MSTP Network Example
The following figure shows a network example where two VLANs are configured on the two switches. If
the switches are using STP or RSTP, the link for VLAN 2 will be blocked as STP and RSTP allow only one link
in the network and block the redundant link.
Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must
communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree.
Topology
Changed Times
This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
Time Since Last
Change
This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
Port This field displays the number of the port on the Switch.
Port State This field displays the port state in STP.
•Discarding - The port does not forward/process received frames or learn MAC addresses,
but still listens for BPDUs.
•Learning - The port learns MAC addresses and processes BPDUs, but does not forward
frames yet.
•Forwarding - The port is operating normally. It learns MAC addresses, processes BPDUs and
forwards received frames.
Port Role This field displays the role of the port in STP.
•Root - A forwarding port on a non-root bridge, which has the lowest path cost and is the
best port from the non-root bridge to the root bridge. A root bridge does not have a root
port.
•Designated - A forwarding port on the designated bridge for each connected LAN
segment. A designated bridge has the lowest path cost to the root bridge among the
bridges connected to the LAN segment. All the ports on a root bridge (root switch) are
designated ports.
•Alternate - A blocked port, which has a best alternate path to the root bridge. This path is
different from using the root port. The port moves to the forwarding state when the
designated port for the LAN segment fails.
•Backup - A blocked port, which has a backup/redundant path to a LAN segment where
a designated port is already connected when a switch has two links to the same LAN
segment.
•Disabled - Not strictly part of STP. The port can be disabled manually.
Designated Bridge
ID
This field displays the identifier of the designated bridge to which this port belongs when the
port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the identifier of the designated bridge for the
LAN segment to which this port is connected.
Designated Port ID This field displays the priority and number of the bridge port (on the designated bridge),
through which the designated bridge transmits the stored configuration messages.
Designated Cost This field displays the path cost to the LAN segment to which the port is connected when the
port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the path cost to the root bridge from the
designated port for the LAN segment to which this port is connected,
Table 58 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MRSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
157
Figure 122 STP/RSTP Network Example
With MSTP, VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network. Thus traffic from the
two VLANs travel on different paths. The following figure shows the network example using MSTP.
Figure 123 MSTP Network Example
13.10.2 MST Region
An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to the
rest of the network. Each MSTP-enabled device can only belong to one MST region. When BPDUs enter
an MST region, external path cost (of paths outside this region) is increased by one. Internal path cost (of
paths within this region) is increased by one when BPDUs traverse the region.
Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration
identification settings. These include the following parameters:
• Name of the MST region
• Revision level as the unique number for the MST region
• VLAN-to-MST Instance mapping
13.10.3 MST Instance
An MST Instance (MSTI) is a spanning tree instance. VLANs can be configured to run on a specific MSTI.
Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number (known as an MST ID) known internally to a region.
Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
158
The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions. Regions 1 and 2 have 2
spanning tree instances.
Figure 124 MSTIs in Different Regions
13.10.4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST)
A CIST represents the connectivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in an STP/
RSTP. The CIST is the default MST instance (MSTID 0). Any VLANs that are not members of an MST instance
are members of the CIST. In an MSTP-enabled network, there is only one CIST that runs between MST
regions and single spanning tree devices. A network may contain multiple MST regions and other
network segments running RSTP.
Figure 125 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
159
CHAPTER 14
Bandwidth Control
14.1 Bandwidth Control Overview
This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen.
Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and/or out-going
traffic flows on a port.
14.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Bandwidth Control screen (Section 14.2 on page 159) to limit the bandwidth for traffic going
through the Switch.
14.2 Bandwidth Control Setup
Click Advanced Application > Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as
shown next.
Figure 126 Advanced Application > Bandwidth Control
Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
160
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 59 Advanced Application > Bandwidth Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the
common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to activate ingress rate limits on this port.
Ingress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the incoming traffic flow
on a port.
Note: Ingress rate bandwidth control applies to layer 2 traffic only.
Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port.
Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the out-going traffic
flow on a port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
161
CHAPTER 15
Broadcast Storm Control
15.1 Broadcast Storm Control Overview
This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature.
Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast, multicast and destination lookup failure (DLF)
packets the Switch receives per second on the ports. When the maximum number of allowable
broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets is reached per second, the subsequent packets are
discarded. Enable this feature to reduce broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets in your network. You
can specify limits for each packet type on each port.
15.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Broadcast Storm Control screen (Section 15.2 on page 161) to limit the number of broadcast,
multicast and destination lookup failure (DLF) packets the Switch receives per second on the ports.
15.2 Broadcast Storm Control Setup
Click Advanced Application > Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown next.
Figure 127 Advanced Application > Broadcast Storm Control
Chapter 15 Broadcast Storm Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
162
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 60 Advanced Application > Broadcast Storm Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Switch. Clear this check box to
disable this feature.
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Broadcast (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per second.
Multicast (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second.
DLF (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure (DLF) packets the port
receives per second.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
163
CHAPTER 16
Mirroring
16.1 Mirroring Overview
This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens.
Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port (the port you copy the traffic to) in order
that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference.
16.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Mirroring screen (Section 16.2 on page 163) to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow
to be copied to the monitor port.
16.2 Port Mirroring Setup
Click Advanced Application > Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen. Use this
screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port.
Figure 128 Advanced Application > Mirroring
Chapter 16 Mirroring
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
164
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 61 Advanced Application > Mirroring
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the Switch. Clear this check box to disable the
feature.
Monitor Port The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail without
interfering with the traffic flow on the original port(s). Enter the port number of the monitor port.
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the
common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port.
Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop-down list box. Choices are
Egress (outgoing), Ingress (incoming) and Both.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
165
CHAPTER 17
Link Aggregation
17.1 Link Aggregation Overview
This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical, higher-bandwidth
link.
Link aggregation (trunking) is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher-capacity link. You
may want to trunk ports if for example, it is cheaper to use multiple lower-speed links than to under-utilize
a high-speed, but more costly, single-port link. However, the more ports you aggregate then the fewer
available ports you have. A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports.
The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group.
17.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Link Aggregation Status screen (Section 17.2 on page 166) to view ports you have configured
to be in the trunk group, ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in the trunk group
and so on.
• Use the Link Aggregation Setting screen (Section 17.3 on page 167) to configure to enable static link
aggregation.
• Use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol screen (Section 17.3.1 on page 169) to enable Link
Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).
17.1.2 What You Need to Know
The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation.
Note: In a properly planned network, it is recommended to implement static link aggregation
only. This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your
Switch.
See Section 17.4.1 on page 170 for a static port trunking example.
Dynamic Link Aggregation
The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802.3ad standard for static and dynamic (LACP) port trunking.
The IEEE 802.3ad standard describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for dynamically
creating and managing trunk groups.
When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port, the port can automatically negotiate with the ports
at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups. LACP also allows port redundancy, that is, if an
operational port fails, then one of the “standby” ports become operational without user intervention.
Please note that:
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
166
• You must connect all ports point-to-point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for
LACP trunking.
• LACP only works on full-duplex links.
• All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type, speed, duplex mode and flow
control settings.
Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network
topology loops.
Link Aggregation ID
LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information1:
17.2 Link Aggregation Status
Click Advanced Application > Link Aggregation in the navigation panel. The Link Aggregation Status
screen displays by default. See Section 17.1 on page 165 for more information.
Figure 129 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation
Table 62 Link Aggregation ID: Local Switch
SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER
0000 00-00-00-00-00-00 0000 00 0000
Table 63 Link Aggregation ID: Peer Switch
SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER
0000 00-00-00-00-00-00 0000 00 0000
1. Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group, not the individual port.
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
167
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
17.3 Link Aggregation Setting
Click Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting to display the screen shown
next. See Section 17.1 on page 165 for more information on link aggregation.
Table 64 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Group ID This field displays the group ID to identify a trunk group, that is, one logical link containing multiple
ports.
Enabled Ports These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group.
The port number(s) displays only when this trunk group is activated and there is a port belonging
to this group.
Synchronized
Ports
These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk group.
Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of the following: system priority, MAC address, key, port priority and
port number. Refer to Link Aggregation ID on page 166 for more information on this field.
The ID displays only when there is a port belonging to this trunk group and LACP is also enabled
for this group.
Criteria This shows the outgoing traffic distribution algorithm used in this trunk group. Packets from the
same source and/or to the same destination are sent over the same link within the trunk.
src-mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s source MAC address.
dst-mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s destination MAC address.
src-dst-mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet’s source
and destination MAC addresses.
src-ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s source IP address.
dst-ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s destination IP address.
src-dst-ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet’s source
and destination IP addresses.
Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group. It displays:
•Static - if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group.
•LACP - if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP.
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
168
Figure 130 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 65 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Link
Aggregation
Setting
This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static link aggregation.
Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group, that is, one logical link containing multiple ports.
Active Select this option to activate a trunk group.
Criteria Select the outgoing traffic distribution type. Packets from the same source and/or to the same
destination are sent over the same link within the trunk. By default, the Switch uses the src-dst-mac
distribution type. If the Switch is behind a router, the packet’s destination or source MAC address
will be changed. In this case, set the Switch to distribute traffic based on its IP address to make
sure port trunking can work properly.
Select src-mac to distribute traffic based on the packet’s source MAC address.
Select dst-mac to distribute traffic based on the packet’s destination MAC address.
Select src-dst-mac to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet’s source and
destination MAC addresses.
Select src-ip to distribute traffic based on the packet’s source IP address.
Select dst-ip to distribute traffic based on the packet’s destination IP address.
Select src-dst-ip to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet’s source and
destination IP addresses.
Port This field displays the port number.
Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs.
Note: When you enable the port security feature on the Switch and configure port
security settings for a port, you cannot include the port in an active trunk group.
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
169
17.3.1 Link Aggregation Control Protocol
Click Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LAC P to display the screen
shown next. See Dynamic Link Aggregation on page 165 for more information on dynamic link
aggregation.
Figure 131 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 65 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 66 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Link
Aggregation
Control
Protocol
Note: Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable dynamic link
aggregation.
Active Select this check box to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).
System Priority LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65,535. The switch with the lowest system priority
(and lowest port number if system priority is the same) becomes the LACP “server”. The LACP
“server” controls the operation of LACP setup. Enter a number to set the priority of an active port
using Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). The smaller the number, the higher the priority
level.
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
170
17.4 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
17.4.1 Static Trunking Example
This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2-5.
1Make your physical connections - make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group
are connected to the same destination. The following figure shows ports 2-5 on switch A connected to
switch B.
Figure 132 Trunking Example - Physical Connections
2Configure static trunking - Click Advanced Application > Link Aggreg ation > Link Aggregation Setting. In
this screen activate trunk group T1, select the traffic distribution algorithm used by this group and select
the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the figure below. Click Apply when you are done.
Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group, that is, one logical link containing multiple ports.
LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk.
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
LACP Timeout Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to
check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up. If a port does not respond after three tries,
then it is deemed to be “down” and is removed from the trunk. Set a short timeout (one second)
for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as
possible.
Select either 1 second or 30 seconds.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 66 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
171
Figure 133 Trunking Example - Configuration Screen
Your trunk group 1 (T1) configuration is now complete.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
172
CHAPTER 18
Port Authentication
18.1 Port Authentication Overview
This chapter describes the IEEE 802.1x and MAC authentication methods.
Port authentication is a way to validate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external
server (authentication server). The Switch supports the following methods for port authentication:
•IEEE 802.1x2 - An authentication server validates access to a port based on a username and
password provided by the user.
•MAC Authentication - An authentication server validates access to a port based on the MAC address
and password of the client.
Both types of authentication use the RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138,
2139) protocol to validate users. See RADIUS and TACACS+ on page 225 for more information on
configuring your RADIUS server settings.
Note: If you enable IEEE 802.1x authentication and MAC authentication on the same port, the
Switch performs IEEE 802.1x authentication first. If a user fails to authenticate via the IEEE
802.1x method, then access to the port is denied.
18.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Port Authentication screen (Section 18.2 on page 174) to display the links to the configuration
screens where you can enable the port authentication methods.
• Use the 802.1x screen (Section 18.3 on page 174) to activate IEEE 802.1x security.
• Use the MAC Authentication screen (Section 18.4 on page 178) to activate MAC authentication.
18.1.2 What You Need to Know
IEEE 802.1x Authentication
The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to a IEEE 802.1x authentication enabled port goes
through a validation process. The Switch prompts the client for login information in the form of a user
name and password. When the client provides the login credentials, the Switch sends an authentication
request to a RADIUS server. The RADIUS server validates whether this client is allowed access to the port.
2. At the time of writing, IEEE 802.1x is not supported by all operating systems. See your operating system
documentation. If your operating system does not support 802.1x, then you may need to install 802.1x client
software.
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
173
Figure 134 IEEE 802.1x Authentication Process
18.1.3 MAC Authentication
MAC authentication works in a very similar way to IEEE 802.1x authentication. The main difference is that
the Switch does not prompt the client for login credentials. The login credentials are based on the
source MAC address of the client connecting to a port on the Switch along with a password configured
specifically for MAC authentication on the Switch.
Figure 135 MAC Authentication Process
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
174
18.2 Port Authentication Configuration
To enable port authentication, first activate the port authentication method(s) (both on the Switch and
the port(s)), then configure the RADIUS server settings in the AAA > RADIUS Server Setup screen.
Click Advanced Application > Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown. Select a port authentication method’s link in the screen that appears.
Figure 136 Advanced Application > Port Authentication
18.3 Activate IEEE 802.1x Security
Use this screen to activate IEEE 802.1x security. In the Port Authentication screen click 802.1x to display
the configuration screen as shown.
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
175
Figure 137 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 67 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to permit 802.1x authentication on the Switch.
Note: You must first enable 802.1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it
on each port.
EAPOL flood Select this check box to flood EAPoL packets to all ports in the same VLAN.
EAP over LAN (EAPOL) is a port authentication protocol used in IEEE 802.1x. It is used to
encapsulate and transmit EAP packets between the supplicant (a client device that requests
access to the network resources or services) and authenticator (the Switch) directly over the
LAN.
Note: EAPOL flood will not take effect when 802.1x authentication is enabled.
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
176
18.3.1 Guest VLAN
When 802.1x port authentication is enabled on the Switch and its ports, clients that do not have the
correct credentials are blocked from using the port(s). You can configure your Switch to have one VLAN
that acts as a guest VLAN. If you enable the guest VLAN (102 in the example) on a port (2 in the
example), the user (A in the example) that is not IEEE 802.1x capable or fails to enter the correct
username and password can still access the port, but traffic from the user is forwarded to the guest
VLAN. That is, unauthenticated users can have access to limited network resources in the same guest
VLAN, such as the Internet. The rights granted to the Guest VLAN depends on how the network
administrator configures switches or routers with the guest network feature.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this to permit 802.1x authentication on this port. You must first allow 802.1x
authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port.
Max-Req Specify the number of times the Switch tries to authenticate client(s) before sending
unresponsive ports to the Guest VLAN.
This is set to 2 by default. That is, the Switch attempts to authenticate a client twice. If the client
does not respond to the first authentication request, the Switch tries again. If the client still does
not respond to the second request, the Switch sends the client to the Guest VLAN. The client
needs to send a new request to be authenticated by the Switch again.
Reauth Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re-enter his or her username and password to stay
connected to the port.
Reauth-period
secs
Specify the length of time required to pass before a client has to re-enter his or her username
and password to stay connected to the port.
Quiet-period secs Specify the number of seconds the port remains in the HELD state and rejects further
authentication requests from the connected client after a failed authentication exchange.
Tx-period secs Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for client’s response before re-sending an
identity request to the client.
Supp-Timeout
secs
Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for client’s response to a challenge request
before sending another request.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 67 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
177
Figure 138 Guest VLAN Example
Use this screen to enable and assign a guest VLAN to a port. In the Port Authentication > 802.1x screen
click Guest Vlan to display the configuration screen as shown.
Figure 139 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x > Guest VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 68 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x > Guest VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays a port number. * means all ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable the guest VLAN feature on this port.
Clients that fail authentication are placed in the guest VLAN and can receive limited services.
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
178
18.4 Activate MAC Authentication
Use this screen to activate MAC authentication. In the Port Authentication screen click MAC
Authentication to display the configuration screen as shown.
Guest Vlan A guest VLAN is a pre-configured VLAN on the Switch that allows non-authenticated users to
access limited network resources through the Switch. You must also enable IEEE 802.1x
authentication on the Switch and the associated ports. Enter the number that identifies the
guest VLAN.
Make sure this is a VLAN recognized in your network.
Host-mode Specify how the Switch authenticates users when more than one user connect to the port
(using a hub).
Select Multi-Host to authenticate only the first user that connects to this port. If the first user
enters the correct credential, any other users are allowed to access the port without
authentication. If the first user fails to enter the correct credential, they are all put in the guest
VLAN. Once the first user who did authentication logs out or disconnects from the port, rest of
the users are blocked until a user does the authentication process again.
Select Multi-Secure to authenticate each user that connects to this port.
Multi-Secure Num If you set Host-mode to Multi-Secure, specify the maximum number of users that the Switch will
authenticate on this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 68 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x > Guest VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
179
Figure 140 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > MAC Authentication
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 69 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > MAC Authentication
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on the Switch.
Note: You must first enable MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it
on each port.
Name Prefix Type the prefix that is appended to all MAC addresses sent to the RADIUS server for
authentication. You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters.
If you leave this field blank, then only the MAC address of the client is forwarded to the RADIUS
server.
Delimiter Select the delimiter the RADIUS server uses to separate the pairs in MAC addresses used as the
account username (and password). You can select Dash (-), Colon (:), or None to use no
delimiters at all in the MAC address.
Case Select the case (Upper or Lower) the RADIUS server requires for letters in MAC addresses used
as the account username (and password).
Password Type Select Static to have the Switch send the password you specify below or MAC-Address to use
the client MAC address as the password.
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
180
Password Type the password the Switch sends along with the MAC address of a client for authentication
with the RADIUS server. You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters.
Timeout Specify the amount of time before the Switch allows a client MAC address that fails
authentication to try and authenticate again. Maximum time is 3000 seconds.
When a client fails MAC authentication, its MAC address is learned by the MAC address table
with a status of denied. The timeout period you specify here is the time the MAC address entry
stays in the MAC address table until it is cleared. If you specify 0 for the timeout value, the
Switch uses the Aging Time configured in the Switch Setup screen.
Note: If the Aging Time in the Switch Setup screen is set to a lower value, then it
supersedes this setting. See Section 8.5 on page 85.
Port This field displays a port number. * means all ports.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on this port. You must first allow MAC
authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port.
Trusted VLAN List Enter the ID number(s) of the trusted VLAN(s) (separated by a comma). If a client’s VLAN ID is
specified here, the client can access the port and the connected networks without MAC
authentication.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 69 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > MAC Authentication (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
181
CHAPTER 19
Port Security
19.1 Port Security Overview
This chapter shows you how to set up port security.
Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and/or configured static
MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch. The Switch can learn up to 16K MAC addresses in
total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 16K.
For maximum port security, enable this feature, disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC
address(es) for a port. It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC address
learning as this will result in many broadcasts. By default, MAC address learning is still enabled even
though the port security is not activated.
19.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Port Security screen (Section 19.2 on page 181) to enable port security and disable MAC
address learning. You can also enable the port security feature on a port.
19.2 Port Security Setup
Click Advanced Application > Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Chapter 19 Port Security
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
182
Figure 141 Advanced Application > Port Security
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 70 Advanced Application > Port Security
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Security
Active Select this option to enable port security on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port. The Switch forwards
packets whose MAC address(es) is in the MAC address table on this port. Packets with no
matching MAC address(es) are dropped.
Clear this check box to disable the port security feature. The Switch forwards all packets on this
port.
Address
Learning
MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic. For MAC address learning to occur
on a port, the port itself must be active with address learning enabled.
Limited Number
of Learned MAC
Address
Use this field to limit the number of (dynamic) MAC addresses that may be learned on a port. For
example, if you set this field to "5" on port 2, then only the devices with these five learned MAC
addresses may access port 2 at any one time. A sixth device would have to wait until one of the
five learned MAC addresses aged out. MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch
Setup screen. The valid range is from “0” to “16K”. “0” means this feature is disabled.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
183
CHAPTER 20
Time Range
20.1 Time Range Overview
You can set up one-time and recurring schedules for time-oriented features, such as PoE and classifier.
The UAG supports one-time and recurring schedules. One-time schedules are effective only once, while
recurring schedules usually repeat. Both types of schedules are based on the current date and time in
the Switch.
20.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Time Range screen (Section 20.2 on page 183) to view or define a schedule on the Switch.
20.2 Configuring Time Range
Click Advanced Application > Time Range in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 142 Advanced Application > Time Range
Chapter 20 Time Range
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
184
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 71 Advanced Application > Time Range
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes.
Type Select Absolute to create a one-time schedule. One-time schedules begin on a specific start
date and time and end on a specific stop date and time. One-time schedules are useful for
long holidays and vacation periods.
Alternatively, select Periodic to create a recurring schedule. Recurring schedules begin at a
specific start time and end at a specific stop time on selected days of the week (Sunday,
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday). Recurring schedules are useful
for defining the workday and off-work hours.
Absolute This section is available only when you set Type to Absolute.
Start Specify the year, month, day, hour and minute when the schedule begins.
End Specify the year, month, day, hour and minute when the schedule ends.
Periodic This section is available only when you set Type to Periodic.
Select the first option if you want to define a recurring schedule for a consecutive time period.
You then select the day of the week, hour and minute when the schedule begins and ends
respectively.
Select the second option if you want to define a recurring schedule for multiple non-
consecutive time periods. You need to select each day of the week the recurring schedule is
effective. You also need to specify the hour and minute when the schedule begins and ends
each day. The schedule begins and ends in the same day.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to change the settings.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
Type This field displays the type of the schedule.
Range This field displays the time period(s) to which this schedule applies.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es).
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
185
CHAPTER 21
Classifier
21.1 Classifier Overview
This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the Switch. It also
discusses Quality of Service (QoS) and classifier concepts as employed by the Switch.
21.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Classifier Status screen (Section 21.2 on page 185) to view the classifiers configured on the
Switch and how many times the traffic matches the rules.
• Use the Classifier Configuration screen (Section 21.3 on page 186) to define the classifiers and view a
summary of the classifier configuration. After you define the classifier, you can specify actions (or
policy) to act upon the traffic that matches the rules.
• Use the Classifier Global Setting screen (Section 21.4 on page 191) to configure the match order and
enable logging on the Switch.
21.1.2 What You Need to Know
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network's ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the
networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely
to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and
make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-demand.
A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address,
destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming port number. For
example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to
form a flow.
Configure QoS on the Switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network
performance. Setting up QoS involves two separate steps:
1Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows.
2Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed on a classified traffic flow (refer to Chapter 22
on page 194 to configure policy rules).
21.2 Classifier Status
Use this screen to view the classifiers configured on the Switch and how many times the traffic matches
the rules.
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
186
Click Advanced Application > Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as
shown.
Figure 143 Advanced Application > Classifier
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
21.3 Classifier Configuration
Use the Classifier Configuration screen to define the classifiers. After you define the classifier, you can
specify actions (or policy) to act upon the traffic that matches the rules. To configure policy rules, refer
to Chapter 22 on page 194.
In the Classifier Status screen click Classifier Configuration to display the configuration screen as shown.
Table 72 Advanced Application > Classifier
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to edit the rule.
Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated.
Weight This field displays the rule’s weight. This is to indicate a rule’s priority when the match order is set
to manual in the Classifier > Classifier Configuration > Classifier Global Setting screen.
The higher the number, the higher the rule’s priority.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
Match Count This field displays the number of times a rule is applied. It displays '-' if the rule does not have
count enabled.
Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule’s settings.
Clear Select Classifier, enter a classifier rule name and then click Clear to erase the recorded
statistical information for the classifier, or select Any to clear statistics for all classifiers.
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
187
Figure 144 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 73 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable this rule.
Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes.
Weight Enter a number between 0 and 65535 to specify the rule’s weight. When the match order is in manual
mode in the Classifier Global Setting screen, a higher weight means a higher priority.
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
188
Log Select this option to have the Switch create a log message when the rule is applied and record the
number of matched packets in a particular time interval.
Note: Make sure you also enable logging in the Classifier Global Setting screen.
Count Select this option to have the Switch count how many times the rule is applied.
Time
Range
Select the name of the pre-configured schedule that you want to apply to the rule. The rule will be
active only at the scheduled date and/or time.
If you select None, the rule will be active all the time.
Ingress Port
Port Type the port number to which the rule should be applied. You may choose one port only or all ports
(Any).
Trunk Select Any to apply the rule to all trunk groups.
To specify a trunk group, select the second choice and type a trunk group ID.
Layer 2
Specify the fields below to configure a layer 2 classifier.
VLAN
VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source VLAN
ID in the field provided.
Priority
Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a priority
level in the field provided.
Ethernet
Type
Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in hexadecimal value.
Refer to Table 75 on page 190 for information.
Source
MAC
Address
Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses.
To specify a source, select MAC/Mask to enter the source MAC address of the packet in valid MAC
address format (six hexadecimal character pairs) and type the mask for the specified MAC address to
determine which bits a packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should match. Enter
“0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal
character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to
ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. If you leave the
Mask field blank, the Switch automatically sets the mask to ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff.
Destination
MAC
Address
Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses.
To specify a destination, select MAC/Mask to enter the destination MAC address of the packet in
valid MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs) and type the mask for the specified MAC
address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should match. Enter
“0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal
character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to
ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. If you leave the
Mask field blank, the Switch automatically sets the mask to ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff.
Layer 3
Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier.
Table 73 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
189
DSCP
IPv4/IPv6
Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ
Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided.
Preceden
ce
Select Any to classify traffic from any precedence or select the second option and specify an IP
Precedence (the first 3 bits of the 8-bit ToS field) value between 0 and 7 in the field provided.
ToS Select Any to classify traffic from any ToS or select the second option and specify Type of Service (the
last 5 bits of the 8-bit ToS field) value between 0 and 255 in the field provided.
IP Protocol Select an IPv4 protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value. Refer to
Table 76 on page 191 for more information.
You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type. This means that the Switch will pick out the
packets that are sent to establish TCP connections.
IPv6 Next
Header
Select an IPv6 protocol type or select Other and enter an 8-bit next header in the IPv6 packet. The
Next Header field is similar to the IPv4 Protocol field. The IPv6 protocol number ranges from 1 to 255.
You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type. This means that the Switch will identify packets
that initiate or acknowledge (establish) TCP connections.
Source
IP
Address/
Address
Prefix
Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask.
A subnet mask can be represented in a 32-bit notation. For example, the subnet mask “255.255.255.0”
can be represented as “11111111.11111111.11111111.00000000”, and counting up the number of
ones in this case results in 24.
Destination
IP
Address/
Address
Prefix
Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask.
Layer 4
Specify the fields below to configure a layer 4 classifier.
Source
Socket
Number Note: You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the
socket numbers.
Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP/UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and
enter a TCP/UDP protocol port number. Refer to Table 77 on page 191 for more information.
Destination
Socket
Number Note: You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the
socket numbers.
Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP/UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and
enter a TCP/UDP protocol port number. Refer to Table 77 on page 191 for more information.
Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch’s run-
time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on
the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.
Table 73 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
190
21.3.1 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration Summary
To view a summary of the classifier configuration, scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the
Classifier screen. To change the settings of a rule, click a number in the Index field.
Note: When two rules conflict with each other, a higher layer rule has priority over lower layer
rule.
Figure 145 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration: Summary Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number.
Table 74 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration: Summary Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to edit the rule.
Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated.
Weight The field displays the priority of the rule when the match order is in manual mode. A higher weight
means a higher priority.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule’s settings.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the table
heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 75 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Numbers
ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER
IP ETHII 0800
X.75 Internet 0801
NBS Internet 0802
ECMA Internet 0803
Chaosnet 0804
X.25 Level 3 0805
XNS Compat 0807
Banyan Systems 0BAD
BBN Simnet 5208
IBM SNA 80D5
AppleTalk AARP 80F3
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
191
In the Internet Protocol there is a field, called “Protocol”, to identify the next level protocol. The following
table shows some common protocol types and the corresponding protocol number. Refer to http://
www.iana.org/assignments/protocol-numbers for a complete list.
Some of the most common TCP and UDP port numbers are:
See Appendix B on page 433 for information on commonly used port numbers.
21.4 Classifier Global Setting Configuration
Use this screen to configure the match order and enable logging on the Switch. In the Classifier
Configuration screen click Classifier Global Setting to display the configuration screen as shown.
Figure 146 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration > Classifier Global Setting
Table 76 Common IP Protocol Types and Protocol Numbers
PROTOCOL TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER
ICMP 1
TCP 6
UDP 17
EGP 8
L2TP 115
Table 77 Common TCP and UDP Port Numbers
PROTOCOL NAME TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS 53
HTTP 80
POP3 110
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
192
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
21.5 Classifier Example
The following screen shows an example where you configure a classifier that identifies all traffic from
MAC address 00:50:ba:ad:4f:81 on port 2.
After you have configured a classifier, you can configure a policy (in the Policy screen) to define
action(s) on the classified traffic flow.
Table 78 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration > Classifier Global Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Match
Order
Select manual to have classifier rules applied according to the weight of each rule you configured in
Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration.
Alternatively, select auto to have classifier rules applied according to the layer of the item configured
in the rule. Layer-4 items have the highest priority, and layer-2 items has the lowest priority. For
example, you configure a layer-2 item (VLAN ID) in classifier A and configure a layer-3 item (source IP
address) in classifier B. When an incoming packet matches both classifier rules, classifier B has priority
over classifier A.
Logging
Active Select this to allow the Switch to create a log when packets match a classifier rule during a defined
time interval.
Interval Select the length of the time period (in seconds) to count matched packets for a classifier rule. Enter
an integer from 0-65535. 0 means that no logging is done.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it
is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to
the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
193
Figure 147 Classifier: Example
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
194
CHAPTER 22
Policy Rule
22.1 Policy Rules Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules.
A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria (refer to Chapter 21 on page
185 for more information). A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the
network.
22.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Policy Rule screen (Section 22.2 on page 194) to enable the policy and display the active
classifier(s) you configure in the Classifier screen.
22.2 Configuring Policy Rules
You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen. Refer to Section 21.3 on page 186 for more
information.
Click Advanced Applications > Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Chapter 22 Policy Rule
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
195
Figure 148 Advanced Application > Policy Rule
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 79 Advanced Application > Policy Rule
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable the policy.
Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes.
Classifier(s) This field displays the active classifier(s) you configure in the Classifier screen.
Select the classifier(s) to which this policy rule applies. To select more than one classifier, press
[SHIFT] and select the choices at the same time.
Parameters
Set the fields below for this policy. You only have to set the field(s) that is related to the action(s) you configure in
the Action field.
General
VLAN ID Specify a VLAN ID.
Egress Port Type the number of an outgoing port.
Priority Specify a priority level.
Rate Limit You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow. Traffic that exceeds the
maximum bandwidth allocated (in cases where the network is congested) is called out-of-profile
traffic.
Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second (kbps). Enter a number between 1 and 1000000.
Chapter 22 Policy Rule
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
196
Action
Specify the action(s) the Switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow.
Note: You can specify only one action (pair) in a policy rule. To have the Switch take multiple actions
on the same traffic flow, you need to define multiple classifiers with the same criteria and apply
different policy rules.
Say you have several classifiers that identify the same traffic flow and you specify a different policy rule for each. If
their policy actions conflict (Discard the packet, Send the packet to the egress port and Rate Limit), the Switch only
applies the policy rules with the Discard the packet and Send the packet to the egress port actions depending on
the classifier names. The longer the classifier name, the higher the classifier priority. If two classifier names are the
same length, the bigger the character, the higher the classifier priority. The lowercase letters (such as a and b)
have higher priority than the capitals (such as A and B) in the classifier name. For example, the classifier with the
name of class 2, class a or class B takes priority over the classifier with the name of class 1 or class A.
Let’s say you set two classifiers (Class 1 and Class 2) and both identify all traffic from MAC address 11:22:33:44:55:66
on port 3.
If Policy 1 applies to Class 1 and the action is to drop the packets, Policy 2 applies to Class 2 and the action is to
forward the packets to the egress port, the Switch will forward the packets.
If Policy 1 applies to Class 1 and the action is to drop the packets, Policy 2 applies to Class 2 and the action is to
enable bandwidth limitation, the Switch will discard the packets immediately.
If Policy 1 applies to Class 1 and the action is to forward the packets to the egress port, Policy 2 applies to Class 2
and the action is to enable bandwidth limitation, the Switch will forward the packets.
Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets.
Select Discard the packet to drop the packets.
Priority Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames.
Select Set the packet’s 802.1p priority to replace the packet’s 802.1p priority field with the value
you set in the Priority field.
Outgoing Select Send the packet to the mirror port to send the packet to the mirror port.
Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port.
Select Set the packet's VLAN ID to set the packet’s VLAN ID.
Rate Limit Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow(s) then set the actions to be
taken on out-of-profile packets.
Add Click Add to inset the entry to the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch’s
run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save
link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are
done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the policy index number. Click an index number to edit the policy.
Active This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated.
Name This field displays the name you have assigned to this policy.
Classifier(s) This field displays the name(s) of the classifier to which this policy applies.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 79 Advanced Application > Policy Rule (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
198
CHAPTER 23
Queuing Method
23.1 Queuing Method Overview
This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported.
Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion. Use the
Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic. See also Priority Queue
Assignment in Switch Setup and 802.1p Priority in Port Setup for related information.
23.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Queuing Method screen (Section 23.2 on page 199) set priorities for the queues of the Switch.
This distributes bandwidth across the different traffic queues.
23.1.2 What You Need to Know
Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual
source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth.
Strictly Priority Queuing
Strictly Priority Queuing (SPQ) services queues based on priority only. As traffic comes into the Switch,
traffic on the highest priority queue, Q7 is transmitted first. When that queue empties, traffic on the next
highest-priority queue, Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties, and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on.
If higher priority queues never empty, then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent. SPQ does not
automatically adapt to changing network requirements.
Weighted Fair Queuing
Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue's minimum bandwidth based on its bandwidth
weight (portion) (the number you configure in the Weight field) when there is traffic congestion. WFQ is
activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle. Queues with larger weights get more
guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights. This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in
that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues. By default, the weight for Q0
is 1, for Q1 is 2, for Q2 is 3, and so on.
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR)
Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more
traffic than it can handle. A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming
traffic on that port. This queue then moves to the back of the list. The next queue is given an equal
amount of bandwidth, and then moves to the end of the list; and so on, depending on the number of
queues being used. This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty.
Chapter 23 Queuing Method
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
199
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling, but
services queues based on their priority and queue weight (the number you configure in the queue
Weight field) rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth. WRR is activated only when a port has more
traffic than it can handle. Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller
weights. This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the
different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied.
23.2 Configuring Queuing
Use this screen to set priorities for the queues of the Switch. This distributes bandwidth across the different
traffic queues.
Click Advanced Application > Queuing Method in the navigation panel.
Figure 150 Advanced Application > Queuing Method
Chapter 23 Queuing Method
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
200
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 80 Advanced Application > Queuing Method
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This label shows the port you are configuring. * means all ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the
common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Method Select SPQ (Strictly Priority Queuing), WFQ (Weighted Fair Queuing) or WRR (Weighted Round Robin).
Strictly Priority Queuing services queues based on priority only. When the highest priority queue
empties, traffic on the next highest-priority queue begins. Q7 has the highest priority and Q0 the
lowest.
Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue's minimum bandwidth based on their
bandwidth portion (weight) (the number you configure in the Weight field). Queues with larger
weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights.
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight
(the number you configure in the queue Weight field). Queues with larger weights get more service
than queues with smaller weights.
Weight When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here. Bandwidth is divided across the different
traffic queues according to their weights.
Hybrid-SPQ
Lowest-
Queue
This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR.
Select a queue (Q0 to Q7) to have the Switch use SPQ to service the subsequent queue(s) after and
including the specified queue for the port. For example, if you select Q5, the Switch services traffic on
Q5, Q6 and Q7 using SPQ.
Select None to always use WFQ or WRR for the port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to
the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
201
CHAPTER 24
Multicast
24.1 Multicast Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features.
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender to 1 recipient) or
Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts
on the network.
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Refer to RFC 1112, RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for
information on IGMP versions 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
24.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Multicast Setup screen (Section 24.2 on page 205) to display the links to the configuration
screens where you can configure IPv4 or IPv6 multicast settings.
• Use the IPv4 Multicast Status screen (Section 24.3 on page 205) to view multicast group information.
• Use the IGMP Snooping screen (Section 24.3.1 on page 206) to enable IGMP snooping to forward
group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group.
• Use the IGMP Snooping VLAN screen (Section 24.3.2 on page 209) to perform IGMP snooping on up to
16 VLANs.
• Use the IGMP Filtering Profile (Section 24.3.3 on page 210) to specify a range of multicast groups that
clients connected to the Switch are able to join.
• Use the IPv6 Multicast Status screen (Section 24.4 on page 211) to view multicast group information,
• Use the MLD Snooping-proxy screen (Section 24.4.1 on page 212) to enable the upstream port to
report group changes to a connected multicast router and forward MLD messages to other upstream
ports.
• Use the MVR screens (Section 24.5 on page 218) to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver
port(s) and a source port for each multicast VLAN.
24.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on Multicasting that can help you configure the screens in this chapter.
IP Multicast Addresses
In IPv4, a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts (multicast
group) in a different subnetwork. A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group, not
individual receiving devices. IP addresses in the Class D range (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) are used for
IP multicasting. Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes (see the IANA
website for more information).
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
202
IGMP Snooping
A Switch can passively snoop on IGMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP
multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership. It checks IGMP packets passing through it,
picks out the group registration information, and configures multicasting accordingly. IGMP snooping
allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them.
The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups (that it has learned from IGMP
snooping or that you have manually configured) to ports that are members of that group. IGMP
snooping generates no additional network traffic, allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic
passing through your Switch.
IGMP Snooping and VLANs
The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs. You can configure the Switch to
automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs. The Switch then performs IGMP
snooping on the first 16 VLANs that send IGMP packets. This is referred to as auto mode. Alternatively,
you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on. This is referred to as fixed
mode. In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of any VLANs other than
those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN.
MLD Snooping-proxy
MLD snooping-proxy is a Zyxel-proprietary feature. IPv6 MLD proxy allows only one upstream interface on
a switch, while MLD snooping-proxy supports more than one upstream port on a switch. The upstream
port in MLD snooping-proxy can report group changes to a connected multicast router and forward
MLD messages to other upstream ports. This helps especially when you want to have a network that uses
STP to provide backup links between switches and also performs MLD snooping and proxy functions.
MLD snooping-proxy, like MLD proxy, can minimize MLD control messages and allow better network
performance.
In MLD snooping-proxy, if one upstream port is learned via snooping, all other upstream ports on the
same device will be added to the same group. If one upstream port requests to leave a group, all other
upstream ports on the same device will also be removed from the group.
In the following MLD snooping-proxy example, all connected upstream ports (1 ~7) are treated as one
interface. The connection between ports 8 and 9 is blocked by STP to break the loop. If there is one
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
203
query from a router (X) or MLD Done or Report message from any upstream port, it will be broadcast to
all connected upstream ports.
MLD Messages
A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast
forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report message
for that address.
An MLD Done message is similar to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave a
multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. If the leave mode is not set to
Immediate, the router or switch sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is
received to determine if other devices connected to this port should remain in the group.
MVR Overview
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is designed for applications (such as Media-on-Demand (MoD)) that
use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring-based service provider network.
MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network.
While isolated in different subscriber VLANs, connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from
the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN. This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast
traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management.
MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured
under MVR. Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping.
The following figure shows a network example. The subscriber VLAN (1, 2 and 3) information is hidden
from the streaming media server, S. In addition, the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the
Switch and S.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
204
Figure 151 MVR Network Example
Types of MVR Ports
In MVR, a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast
VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic. Once configured, the Switch maintains a
forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group.
MVR Modes
You can set your Switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode.
In dynamic mode, the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices (such as
multicast routers or servers) in the multicast VLAN. This allows the multicast devices to update the
multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports.
In compatible mode, the Switch does not send any IGMP reports. In this case, you must manually
configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN.
How MVR Works
The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device (such as a
computer) in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server, S, via the Switch.
Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch.
When the subscriber selects a television channel, computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch to join
the appropriate multicast group. If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group
addresses on the Switch, an entry is created in the forwarding table on the Switch. This maps the
subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic.
When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer, an IGMP leave message is sent to
the Switch to leave the multicast group. The Switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port (in this
case, an uplink port on the Switch). If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the
same subscriber VLAN, the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast
traffic. Otherwise, the Switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
205
Figure 152 MVR Multicast Television Example
24.2 Multicast Setup
Use this screen to configure IGMP for IPv4 or MLD for IPv6 and set up multicast VLANs. Click Advanced
Application > Multicast in the navigation panel.
Figure 153 Advanced Application > Multicast Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
24.3 IPv4 Multicast Status
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast to display the screen as shown. This screen
shows the IPv4 multicast group information. See Section 24.1 on page 201 for more information on
multicasting.
Figure 154 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast
Table 81 Advanced Application > Multicast Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv4 Multicast Click the link to open screens where you can configure IGMP snooping and IGMP filtering for
IPv4.
IPv6 Multicast Click the link to open screens where you can configure MLD snooping-proxy and MLD filtering
for IPv6.
MVR Click the link to open screens where you can create multicast VLANs.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
206
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
24.3.1 IGMP Snooping
Click the IGMP Snooping link in the Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast screen to display
the screen as shown. See Section 24.1 on page 201 for more information on multicasting.
Figure 155 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 82 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This is the index number of the entry.
VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.
Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group.
Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses.
Table 83 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP snooping.
Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that
are members of that group.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
207
Querier Select this option to allow the Switch to send IGMP General Query messages to the VLANs with
the multicast hosts attached.
Report Proxy Select this option to allow the Switch to act as the IGMP report proxy and leave proxy. It will
report group changes to a connected multicast router.
The Switch not only checks IGMP packets between multicast routers/switches and multicast
hosts to learn the multicast group membership, but also replaces the source MAC address in
an IGMP v1/v2 report with its own MAC address before forwarding to the multicast router/
switch. When the Switch receives more than one IGMP v1/v2 join report that requests to join
the same multicast group, it only sends a new join report with its MAC address. This helps
reduce the number of multicast join reports passed to the multicast router/switch.
The Switch sends a leave message with its MAC address to the multicast router/switch only
when it receives the leave message from the last host in a multicast group.
Host Timeout Specify the time (from 1 to 16 711 450) in seconds that elapses before the Switch removes an
IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port.
802.1p Priority Select a priority level (0-7) to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control
packets. Otherwise, select No-Change to not replace the priority.
IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port
can join.
If you enable IGMP filtering, you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the ports that
you want to allow to join multicast groups.
Unknown Multicast
Frame
Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame.
•Select Drop to discard the frame(s).
•Select Flooding to send the frame(s) to all ports.
•Select Drop on VLAN and enter the VLAN ID number(s) to discard the frame(s) on the
specified VLAN(s). Use a dash to specify consecutive VLANs and a comma (no spaces) to
specify non-consecutive VLANs. For example, 51-53 includes 51, 52 and 53, but 51,53 does
not include 52.
Unknown Multicast
Frame to Querier
Port
Specify the action to perform when Unknown Multicast Frame is set to Drop.
•Select Drop to discard the frame(s).
•Select Forwarding to send the frame(s) to all querier ports.
•Select Forwarding on VLAN and enter the VLAN ID number(s) to send the frame(s) to the
ports which are used as an IGMP query port on the specified VLAN(s). Use a dash to
specify consecutive VLANs and a comma (no spaces) to specify non-consecutive VLANs.
For example, 51-53 includes 51, 52 and 53, but 51,53 does not include 52.
Reserved Multicast
Group
The IP address range of 224.0.0.0 to 224.0.0.255 are reserved for multicasting on the local
network only. For example, 224.0.0.1 is for all hosts on a local network segment and 224.0.0.9 is
used to send RIP routing information to all RIP v2 routers on the same network segment. A
multicast router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range to
other networks. See the IANA web site for more information.
The layer-2 multicast MAC addresses used by Cisco layer-2 protocols, 01:00:0C:CC:CC:CC
and 01:00:0C:CC:CC:CD, are also included in this group.
Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast
address.
•Select Drop to discard the frame(s).
•Select Flooding to send the frame(s) to all ports.
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Table 83 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
208
Immed. Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP
version 2 leave message is received on this port.
Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port.
Normal Leave Enter an IGMP normal leave timeout value (from 200 to 6,348,800) in miliseconds. Select this
option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port.
In normal leave mode, when the Switch receives an IGMP leave message from a host on a
port, it forwards the message to the multicast router. The multicast router then sends out an
IGMP Group-Specific Query (GSQ) message to determine whether other hosts connected to
the port should remain in the specific multicast group. The Switch forwards the query message
to all hosts connected to the port and waits for IGMP reports from hosts to update the
forwarding table.
This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP
snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a
host.
Fast Leave Enter an IGMP fast leave timeout value (from 200 to 6,348,800) in miliseconds. Select this
option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port.
In fast leave mode, right after receiving an IGMP leave message from a host on a port, the
Switch itself sends out an IGMP Group-Specific Query (GSQ) message to determine whether
other hosts connected to the port should remain in the specific multicast group. This helps
speed up the leave process.
This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP
snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a
host.
Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join.
Max Group Num. Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join. Once a port is registered in the
specified number of multicast groups, any new IGMP join report frame(s) is dropped on this
port.
Throttling IGMP throttling controls how the Switch deals with the IGMP reports when the maximum
number of the IGMP groups a port can join is reached.
Select Deny to drop any new IGMP join report received on this port until an existing multicast
forwarding table entry is aged out.
Select Replace to replace an existing entry in the multicast forwarding table with the new
IGMP report(s) received on this port.
IGMP Filtering
Profile
Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port. Otherwise, select Default to
prohibit the port from joining any multicast group.
You can create IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP
Filtering Profile screen.
IGMP Querier
Mode
The Switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router (or
server). The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port.
Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP
query packets.
Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP query port. Select this when
you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port.
Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP query port. The Switch will not
keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port. The Switch does not forward
IGMP join or leave packets to this port.
Table 83 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
209
24.3.2 IGMP Snooping VLAN
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast in the navigation panel. Click the IGMP
Snooping link and then the IGMP Snooping VLAN link to display the screen as shown. See IGMP Snooping
and VLANs on page 202 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN.
Figure 156 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 83 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 84 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Mode Specifies how the VLANs on which the Switch snoops IGMP packets are selected.
•Select auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership information of any
VLANs automatically.
•Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the
VLAN(s) that you specify below.
Note: In either auto or fixed mode, the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs.
Note: The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these
16 VLANs.
You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping screen
first.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP
snooping.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
210
24.3.3 IGMP Filtering Profile
An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch are
able to join. A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be able to
join. Profiles are assigned to ports (in the IGMP Snooping screen). Clients connected to those ports are
then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile. Each port can be assigned a single profile.
A profile can be assigned to multiple ports.
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast in the navigation panel. Click the IGMP
Snooping link and then the IGMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown.
Figure 157 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Filtering Profile
Name Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes.
VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the index number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table. Click on an index
number to view more details or change the settings.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 84 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
211
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
24.4 IPv6 Multicast Status
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast to display the screen as shown. This screen
shows the IPv6 multicast group information. See Section 24.1 on page 201 for more information on
multicasting.
Figure 158 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 85 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Filtering Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes.
To configure additional rule(s) for a profile that you have already added, enter the profile
name and specify a different IP multicast address range.
Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to
belong to the IGMP filter profile.
End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to
the IGMP filter profile.
If you want to add a single multicast IP address, enter it in both the Start Address and End
Address fields.
Add Click this to create a new entry.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile.
Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range.
End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range.
Delete Profile Select a profile’s check box to select a specific profile. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all profiles.
Delete Rule Select the check box(es) of the rule(s) that you want to remove from a profile.
Delete To delete the profile(s) and all the accompanying rules, select the profile(s) that you want to
remove in the Delete Profile column, then click the Delete button.
To delete a rule(s) from a profile, select the rule(s) that you want to remove in the Delete Rule
column, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile/Delete Rule check boxes.
Table 86 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This is the index number of the entry.
VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
212
24.4.1 MLD Snooping-proxy
Click the MLD Snooping-proxy link in the Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast screen to
display the screen as shown. See Section 24.1 on page 201 for more information on multicasting.
Figure 159 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
24.4.2 MLD Snooping-proxy VLAN
Click the VLAN link in the Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy
screen to display the screen as shown. See Section 24.1 on page 201 for more information on
multicasting.
Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group.
Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses.
Group Timeout This field displays the time (in seconds) that elapses before the Switch removes a MLD group
membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port.
Table 86 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 87 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MLD Snooping-proxy Use these settings to configure MLD snooping-proxy.
Active Select Active to enable MLD snooping-proxy on the Switch to minimize MLD control
messages and allow better network performance.
802.1p Priority Select a priority level (0-7) to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing MLD
messages.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
213
Figure 160 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > VLAN
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 88 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN on which you want to enable MLD snooping-proxy and
configure related settings.
Upstream
Query Interval Enter the amount of time (in miliseconds) between general query messages sent by the
router connected to the upstream port. This value should be exactly the same as what’s
configured in the connected multicast router.
This value is used to calculate the amount of time an MLD snooping membership entry
(learned only on the upstream port) can remain in the forwarding table.
When an MLD Report message is received, the Switch sets the timeout period of the entry
to be T = (QI*RV) + MRD, where T = Timeout, QI = Query Interval, RV = Robustness Variable,
and MRD = Maximum Response Delay.
Maximum Response
Delay
Enter the amount of time (in miliseconds) the router connected to the upstream port waits
for a response to an MLD general query message. This value should be exactly the same
as what’s configured in the connected multicast router.
This value is used to calculate the amount of time an MLD snooping membership entry
(learned only on the upstream port) can remain in the forwarding table.
When an MLD Report message is received, the Switch sets the timeout period of the entry
to be T = (QI*RV) + MRD, where T = Timeout, QI = Query Interval, RV = Robustness Variable,
and MRD = Maximum Response Delay.
When an MLD Done message is received, the Switch sets the entry’s lifetime to be the
product of Last Member Query Interval and Robustness Variable.
Robustness Variable Enter the number of queries. A multicast address entry (learned only on an upstream port
by snooping) is removed from the forwarding table when there is no response to the
configured number of queries sent by the router connected to the upstream port. This
value should be exactly the same as what’s configured in the connected multicast
router.
This value is used to calculate the amount of time an MLD snooping membership entry
(learned only on the upstream port) can remain in the forwarding table.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
214
24.4.3 MLD Snooping-proxy VLAN Port Role Setting
Click the Port Role Setting link in the Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-
proxy > VLAN screen to display the screen as shown. See Section 24.1 on page 201 for more information
on multicasting.
Last Member Query
Interval
Enter the amount of time (in miliseconds) between the MLD group-specific queries sent by
an upstream port when an MLD Done message is received. This value should be exactly
the same as what’s configured in the connected multicast router.
This value is used to calculate the amount of time an MLD snooping membership entry
(learned only on the upstream port) can remain in the forwarding table after a Done
message is received.
When an MLD Done message is received, the Switch sets the entry’s lifetime to be the
product of Last Member Query Interval and Robustness Variable.
Downstream
Query Interval Enter the amount of time (in miliseconds) between general query messages sent by the
downstream port.
Maximum Response
Delay
Enter the maximum time (in miliseconds) that the Switch waits for a response to a general
query message sent by the downstream port.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the index number of the MLD snooping-proxy VLAN entry in the table. Click on an
index number to view more details or change the settings.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry(ies) permanently.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 88 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
215
Figure 161 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Port Role Setting
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 89 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Port Role Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MLD Snooping-proxy
VLAN ID
Select the VLAN ID for which you want to configure a port’s MLD snooping-proxy settings.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first
to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Port Role A port on the Switch can be either a Downstream port or Upstream port in MLD. A
downstream port connects to MLD hosts and acts as a multicast router to send MLD
queries and listen to the MLD host’s Report and Done messages. An upstream port
connects to a multicast router and works as a host to send Report or Done messages
when receiving queries from a multicast router.
Otherwise, select None if the port is not joining a multicast group or does not belong to
this VLAN.
Leave Mode Select the leave mode for the specified downstream port(s) in this VLAN.
This specifies whether the Switch removes an MLD snooping membership entry (learned
on a downstream port) immediately (Immediate) or wait for an MLD report before the
leave timeout (Normal) or fast leave timeout (Fast) when an MLD leave message is
received on this port from a host.
Leave Timeout Enter the MLD snooping normal leave timeout (in milliseconds) the Switch uses to update
the forwarding table for the specified downstream port(s).
This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an MLD report before removing an
MLD snooping membership entry (learned on a downstream port) when an MLD Done
message is received on this port from a host.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
216
24.4.4 MLD Snooping-proxy Filtering
Use this screen to configure the Switch’s MLD filtering settings. Click the Filtering link in the Advanced
Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy screen to display the screen as shown.
Figure 162 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Fast Leave Timeout Enter the fast leave timeout (in milliseconds) for the specified downstream port(s).
This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an MLD report before removing an
MLD snooping membership entry (learned on a downstream port) when an MLD Done
message is received on this port from a host.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Table 89 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Port Role Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 90 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable MLD filtering on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to
set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Group Limit Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
217
24.4.5 MLD Snooping-proxy Filtering Profile
Use this screen to create an MLD filtering profile and set the range of the multicast address(es). Click the
Filtering Profile link in the Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy >
Filtering screen to display the screen as shown.
Figure 163 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering >
Filtering Profile
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Max Group Num. Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join. Once a port is registered in
the specified number of multicast groups, any new MLD Report message is dropped on this
port.
Filtering Profile Select the name of the MLD filtering profile to use for this port. Otherwise, select Default to
prohibit the port from joining any multicast group.
You can create MLD filtering profiles in the Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy
> Filtering > Filtering Profile screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Table 90 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 91 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes.
To configure additional rule(s) for a profile that you have already added, enter the profile
name and specify a different IP multicast address range.
Start Address Type the starting multicast IPv6 address for a range of multicast IPv6 addresses that you want
to belong to the MLD filtering profile.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
218
24.5 General MVR Configuration
Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port(s) and a source port for
each multicast VLAN. Click Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR to display the screen as shown
next.
Note: You can create up to five multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the Switch.
Note: Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN (with the same VID) when you create
a multicast VLAN in this screen.
End Address Type the ending multicast IPv6 address for a range of IPv6 addresses that you want to
belong to the MLD filtering profile.
If you want to add a single multicast IPv6 address, enter it in both the Start Address and End
Address fields.
Add Click this to create a new entry.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it
is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile.
Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast IPv6 address range.
End Address This field displays the end of the multicast IPv6 address range.
To delete the profile(s) and all the accompanying rules, select the profile(s) that you want to
remove, then click the Delete button. You can select the check box in the table heading
row to select all profiles.
To delete a rule(s) from a profile, select the rule(s) that you want to remove , then click the
Delete button.
Delete Click Delete button to permanently delete the entries you selected.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 91 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
219
Figure 164 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 92 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among
different subscriber VLANs on the network.
Group Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
Multicast VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID (1 to 4094) of the multicast VLAN.
802.1p Priority Select a priority level (0-7) with which the Switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP or MLD
control packets (belonging to this multicast VLAN).
Mode Specify the MVR mode on the Switch. Choices are Dynamic and Compatible.
Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports or MLD messages to all MVR source ports in the multicast
VLAN.
Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports or MLD messages.
Port This field displays the port number on the Switch.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to
set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
220
24.5.1 MVR Group Configuration
All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this
multicast group.
Use this screen to configure MVR IP multicast group address(es). Click the Group Configuration link in the
MVR screen.
Note: A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN. However, IP multicast group
addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap.
Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast
traffic. All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN.
Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic.
None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR. No MVR multicast traffic is sent or
received on this port.
Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames
transmitted.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting.
Mode This field displays the MVR mode.
Source Port This field displays the source port number(s).
Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number(s).
802.1p This field displays the priority level.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete To delete a multicast VLAN(s), select the rule(s) that you want to remove, then click the Delete
button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 92 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
221
Figure 165 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR > Group Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 93 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR > Group Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Multicast VLAN ID Select a multicast VLAN ID (that you configured in the MVR screen) from the drop-down list
box.
Group Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes.
Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation.
Refer to IP Multicast Addresses on page 201 for more information on IP multicast addresses.
End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation.
Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP
address for a multicast group.
Refer to IP Multicast Addresses on page 201 for more information on IP multicast addresses.
Add Click this to create a new entry.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.
Group Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting.
Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group.
End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group.
To delete the profile(s) and all the accompanying rules, select the profile(s) that you want to
remove, then click the Delete button. You can select the check box in the table heading row
to select all profiles.
To delete a rule(s) from a profile, select the rule(s) that you want to remove , then click the
Delete button.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
222
24.5.2 MVR Configuration Example
The following figure shows a network example where ports 1, 2 and 3 on the Switch belong to VLAN 1. In
addition, port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic (the News and
Movie channels) from the remote streaming media server, S. Computers A, B and C in VLAN 1 are able
to receive the traffic.
Figure 166 MVR Configuration Example
To configure the MVR settings on the Switch, create a multicast VLAN in the MVR screen and set the
receiver and source ports.
Figure 167 MVR Configuration Example
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button to remove the
selected entry(ies) from the table.
If you delete a multicast VLAN, all multicast groups in this VLAN will also be removed.
Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox(es) in the table.
Table 93 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR > Group Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLE
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
223
To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers, configure multicast group
settings in the Group Configuration screen. The following figure shows an example where two IPv4
multicast groups (News and Movie) are configured for the multicast VLAN 200.
Figure 168 MVR Group Configuration Example-1
Figure 169 MVR Group Configuration Example-2
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
224
CHAPTER 25
AAA
25.1 AAA Overview
This chapter describes how to configure authentication, authorization and accounting settings on the
Switch.
Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch. The
Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself.
The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users.
Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do. Different user accounts may
have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them. For example, user A may have the right to
create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot. The Switch can authorize users based on
user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number
of users.
Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing. The Switch can use an external server to
track when users log in, log out, and so on. Accounting can also record system related actions such as
boot up and shut down times of the Switch.
The external servers that perform authentication, authorization and accounting functions are known as
AAA servers. The Switch supports RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service, see RADIUS and
TACACS+ on page 225) as the external authentication and authorization server.
Figure 170 AAA Server
25.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the AAA screen (Section 25.2 on page 225) to display the links to the screens where you can
enable authentication and authorization or both of them on the Switch.
• use the RADIUS Server Setup screen (Section 25.3 on page 226) to configure your RADIUS server
settings.
• Use the TACACS+ Server Setup screen (Section 25.4 on page 227) to configure your TACACS+
authentication settings.
• Use the AAA Setup screen (Section 25.5 on page 229) to configure authentication, authorization and
accounting settings, such as the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch and which
database the Switch should use first.
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
225
25.1.2 What You Need to Know
Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch. The
Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself.
The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users.
Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do. Different user accounts may
have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them. For example, user A may have the right to
create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot. The Switch can authorize users based on
user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number
of users.
Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing. The Switch can use an external server to
track when users log in, log out, execute commands and so on. Accounting can also record system
related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch.
Local User Accounts
By storing user profiles locally on the Switch, your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize users
without interacting with a network AAA server. However, there is a limit on the number of users you may
authenticate in this way (See Section 44.4 on page 378).
RADIUS and TACACS+
RADIUS and TACACS+ are security protocols used to authenticate users by means of an external server
instead of (or in addition to) an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of
the device. In essence, RADIUS and TACACS+ authentication both allow you to validate an unlimited
number of users from a central location.
The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS+.
25.2 AAA Screens
The AAA screens allow you to enable authentication and authorization or both of them on the Switch.
First, configure your authentication server settings (RADIUS, TACACS+ or both) and then set up the
authentication priority, activate authorization.
Click Advanced Application > AAA in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Table 94 RADIUS vs. TACACS+
RADIUS TACACS+
Transport
Protocol
UDP (User Datagram Protocol) TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
Encryption Encrypts the password sent for
authentication.
All communication between the client (the Switch)
and the TACACS server is encrypted.
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
226
Figure 171 Advanced Application > AAA
25.3 RADIUS Server Setup
Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings. See RADIUS and TACACS+ on page 225 for more
information on RADIUS servers and Section 25.6.2 on page 233 for RADIUS attributes utilized by the
authentication features on the Switch. Click on the RADIUS Server Setup link in the AAA screen to view
the screen as shown.
Figure 172 Advanced Application > AAA > RADIUS Server Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 95 Advanced Application > AAA > RADIUS Server Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authentication
Server
Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication settings.
Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple RADIUS servers.
Select index-priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured RADIUS server,
if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second
RADIUS server.
Select round-robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication
requests to.
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
227
25.4 TACACS+ Server Setup
Use this screen to configure your TACACS+ server settings. See RADIUS and TACACS+ on page 225 for
more information on TACACS+ servers. Click on the TACACS+ Server Setup link in the AAA screen to view
the screen as shown.
Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request
response from the RADIUS server.
If you are using index-priority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS servers
then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers. For example, if you set the
timeout value to 30 seconds, then the Switch waits for a response from the first RADIUS server for
15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server.
Index This is a read-only number representing a RADIUS server entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation.
UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812. You need not change this value
unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the
external RADIUS server and the Switch. This key is not sent over the network. This key must be the
same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch.
Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch. This entry
is deleted when you click Apply.
Accounting
Server
Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings.
Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request
response from the RADIUS accounting server.
Index This is a read-only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation.
UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS accounting server for accounting is 1813. You need not change
this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the
external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch. This key is not sent over the network. This key
must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch.
Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the
Switch. This entry is deleted when you click Apply.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 95 Advanced Application > AAA > RADIUS Server Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
228
Figure 173 Advanced Application > AAA > TACACS+ Server Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 96 Advanced Application > AAA > TACACS+ Server Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authentication
Server
Use this section to configure your TACACS+ authentication settings.
Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS+ servers.
Select index-priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured TACACS+
server, if the TACACS+ server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the
second TACACS+ server.
Select round-robin to alternate between the TACACS+ servers that it sends authentication
requests to.
Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request
response from the TACACS+ server.
If you are using index-priority for your authentication and you are using two TACACS+ servers
then the timeout value is divided between the two TACACS+ servers. For example, if you set
the timeout value to 30 seconds, then the Switch waits for a response from the first TACACS+
server for 15 seconds and then tries the second TACACS+ server.
Index This is a read-only number representing a TACACS+ server entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS+ server in dotted decimal notation.
TCP Port The default port of a TACACS+ server for authentication is 49. You need not change this value
unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the
external TACACS+ server and the Switch. This key is not sent over the network. This key must be
the same on the external TACACS+ server and the Switch.
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
229
25.5 AAA Setup
Use this screen to configure authentication, authorization and accounting settings on the Switch. Click
on the AAA Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown.
Figure 174 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup
Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS+ server entry from the Switch. This
entry is deleted when you click Apply.
Accounting
Server
Use this section to configure your TACACS+ accounting settings.
Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request
response from the TACACS+ server.
Index This is a read-only number representing a TACACS+ accounting server entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS+ accounting server in dotted decimal notation.
TCP Port The default port of a TACACS+ accounting server is 49. You need not change this value unless
your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the
external TACACS+ accounting server and the Switch. This key is not sent over the network. This
key must be the same on the external TACACS+ accounting server and the Switch.
Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS+ accounting server entry from the
Switch. This entry is deleted when you click Apply.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 96 Advanced Application > AAA > TACACS+ Server Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
230
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 97 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authentication Use this section to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch.
Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should use (first, second and third) to
authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts (users for Switch management).
Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands (see the Ethernet Switch CLI
Reference Guide) for local authentication. The TACACS+ and RADIUS are external servers.
Before you specify the priority, make sure you have set up the corresponding database
correctly first.
You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege level
of administrators. The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them (first Method
1, then Method 2 and finally Method 3). You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field. If
you want the Switch to check other sources for access privilege level specify them in Method 2
and Method 3 fields.
Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local authentication.
Select radius or tacacs+ to have the Switch check the access privilege via the external servers.
Login These fields specify which database the Switch should use (first, second and third) to
authenticate administrator accounts (users for Switch management).
Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control > Logins screen. The TACACS+ and
RADIUS are external servers. Before you specify the priority, make sure you have set up the
corresponding database correctly first.
You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator accounts.
The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them (first Method 1, then Method 2
and finally Method 3). You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field. If you want the
Switch to check other sources for administrator accounts, specify them in Method 2 and
Method 3 fields.
Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access
Control > Logins screen.
Select radius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via the RADIUS
Server.
Select tacacs+ to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via the
TACACS+ Server.
Authorization Use this section to configure authorization settings on the Switch.
Type Set whether the Switch provides the following services to a user.
•Exec: Allow an administrator which logs in the Switch through Telnet or SSH to have different
access privilege level assigned via the external server.
•Dot1x: Allow an IEEE 802.1x client to have different bandwidth limit or VLAN ID assigned via
the external server.
Active Select this to activate authorization for a specified event types.
Console Select this to allow an administrator which logs in the Switch through the console port to have
different access privilege level assigned via the external server.
Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS+ for authorization of specific types of
events.
RADIUS is the only method for IEEE 802.1x authorization.
Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch.
Update Period This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch sends an update to the accounting
server. This is only valid if you select the start-stop option for the Exec or Dot1x entries.
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
231
25.6 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
25.6.1 Vendor Specific Attribute
RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor-specific information between a RADIUS server
and a network access device (for example, the Switch). A company can create Vendor Specific
Attributes (VSAs) to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server.
The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user authentication:
• Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to.
• Assign account privilege levels (see the CLI Reference Guide for more information on account
privilege levels) for the authenticated user.
Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server(s):
•System - Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events occur:
system boots up, system shuts down, system accounting is enabled, system accounting is
disabled
•Exec - Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and logs out
via the console port, telnet or SSH.
•Dot1x - Configure the Switch to send information when an IEEE 802.1x client begins a session
(authenticates via the Switch), ends a session as well as interim updates of a session.
•Commands - Configure the Switch to send information when commands of specified
privilege level and higher are executed on the Switch.
Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types.
Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured accounting
servers at the same time.
If you don’t select this and you have two accounting servers set up, then the Switch sends
information to the first accounting server and if it doesn’t get a response from the accounting
server then it tries the second accounting server.
Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events. Select:
•start-stop - to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a user
begins a session, during a user’s session (if it lasts past the Update Period), and when a user
ends a session.
•stop-only - to have the Switch send information to the accounting server only when a user
ends a session.
Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS+ for accounting of specific types of events.
TACACS+ is the only method for recording Commands type of event.
Privilege This field is only configurable for Commands type of event. Select the threshold command
privilege level for which the Switch should send accounting information. The Switch will send
accounting information when commands at the level you specify and higher are executed on
the Switch.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 97 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
232
The VSAs are composed of the following:
•Vendor-ID: An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA (Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority). Zyxel’s vendor ID is 890.
•Vendor-Type: A vendor specified attribute, identifying the setting you want to modify.
•Vendor-data: A value you want to assign to the setting.
Note: Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure
VSAs for users authenticating via the RADIUS server.
The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch. Note that these attributes only work
when you enable authorization (see Section 25.5 on page 229).
25.6.1.1 Tunnel Protocol Attribute
You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server (refer to your RADIUS server
documentation) to assign a port on the Switch to a VLAN based on IEEE 802.1x authentication. The port
VLAN settings are fixed and untagged. This will also set the port’s VID. The following table describes the
Table 98 Supported VSAs
FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE
Ingress Bandwidth
Assignment Vendor-Id = 890
Vendor-Type = 1
Vendor-data = ingress rate (Kbps in decimal format)
Egress Bandwidth
Assignment Vendor-Id = 890
Vendor-Type = 2
Vendor-data = egress rate (Kbps in decimal format)
Privilege Assignment Vendor-ID = 890
Vendor-Type = 3
Vendor-Data = "shell:priv-lvl=N"
or
Vendor-ID = 9 (CISCO)
Vendor-Type = 1 (CISCO-AVPAIR)
Vendor-Data = "shell:priv-lvl=N"
where N is a privilege level (from 0 to 14).
Note: If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS
server(s) and the Switch, the user is assigned a privilege level from the
database (RADIUS or local) the Switch uses first for user authentication.
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
233
values you need to configure. Note that these attributes only work when you enable authorization (see
Section 25.5 on page 229).
25.6.2 Supported RADIUS Attributes
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) attributes are data used to define specific
authentication elements in a user profile, which is stored on the RADIUS server. This appendix lists the
RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch.
Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication.
This section lists the attributes used by authentication functions on the Switch. In cases where the
attribute has a specific format associated with it, the format is specified.
25.6.3 Attributes Used for Authentication
The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing
authentication.
25.6.3.1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access
User-Name
- The format of the User-Name attribute is $enab#$, where # is the privilege level (1-14).
User-Password
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
25.6.3.2 Attributes Used to Login Users
User-Name
User-Password
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
Table 99 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute
FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE
VLAN Assignment Tunnel-Type = VLAN(13)
Tunnel-Medium-Type = 802(6)
Tunnel-Private-Group-ID = VLAN ID
Note: You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch.
Note: The bolded values in this table are fixed values as defined in RFC 3580.
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
234
25.6.3.3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802.1x Authentication
User-Name
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
NAS-Port
NAS-Port-Type
- This value is set to Ethernet(15) on the Switch.
Calling-Station-Id
Frame-MTU
EAP-Message
State
Message-Authenticator
25.6.4 Attributes Used for Accounting
The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing
authentication.
25.6.4.1 Attributes Used for Accounting System Events
NAS-IP-Address
NAS-Identifier
Acct-Status-Type
Acct-Session-ID
- The format of Acct-Session-Id is date+time+8-digit sequential number, for example,
2007041917210300000001. (date: 2007/04/19, time: 17:21:03, serial number: 00000001)
Acct-Delay-Time
25.6.4.2 Attributes Used for Accounting Exec Events
The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time that they are sent (the difference
between Console and Telnet/SSH Exec events is that the Telnet/SSH events utilize the Calling-Station-Id
attribute):
Table 100 RADIUS Attributes - Exec Events via Console
ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM-UPDATE STOP
User-Name
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
Service-Type
Acct-Status-Type
Acct-Delay-Time
Acct-Session-Id
Acct-Authentic
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
235
25.6.4.3 Attributes Used for Accounting IEEE 802.1x Events
The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time of the session they are sent:
Acct-Session-Time
Acct-Terminate-Cause
Table 101 RADIUS Attributes - Exec Events via Telnet/SSH
ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM-UPDATE STOP
User-Name
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
Service-Type
Calling-Station-Id
Acct-Status-Type
Acct-Delay-Time
Acct-Session-Id
Acct-Authentic
Acct-Session-Time
Acct-Terminate-Cause
Table 100 RADIUS Attributes - Exec Events via Console
ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM-UPDATE STOP
Table 102 RADIUS Attributes - Exec Events via Console
ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM-UPDATE STOP
User-Name
NAS-IP-Address
NAS-Port
Class
Called-Station-Id
Calling-Station-Id
NAS-Identifier
NAS-Port-Type
Acct-Status-Type
Acct-Delay-Time
Acct-Session-Id
Acct-Authentic
Acct-Input-Octets
Acct-Output-Octets
Acct-Session-Time
Acct-Input-Packets
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
236
Acct-Output-Packets
Acct-Terminate-Cause
Acct-Input-Gigawords
Acct-Output-Gigawords
Table 102 RADIUS Attributes - Exec Events via Console
ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM-UPDATE STOP
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
237
CHAPTER 26
IP Source Guard
26.1 IP Source Guard Overview
IP source guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized DHCP and
ARP packets in your network. A binding contains these key attributes:
• MAC address
• VLAN ID
• IP address
• Port number
When the Switch receives a DHCP or ARP packet, it looks up the appropriate MAC address, VLAN ID, IP
address, and port number in the binding table. If there is a binding, the Switch forwards the packet. If
there is not a binding, the Switch discards the packet.
The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets (dynamic bindings) and from information
provided manually by administrators (static bindings).
IP source guard consists of the following features:
• Static bindings. Use this to create static bindings in the binding table.
• DHCP snooping. Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding
table dynamically.
• ARP inspection. Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network.
If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets (typical implementation), you
have to enable DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection.
26.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the IP Source Guard screen (Section 26.2 on page 239) to look at the current bindings for DHCP
snooping and ARP inspection.
• Use the IP Source Guard Static Binding screen (Section 26.4 on page 240) to manage static bindings
for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection.
• Use the DHCP Snooping screen (Section 26.5 on page 242) to look at various statistics about the DHCP
snooping database.
• Use this DHCP Snooping Configure screen (Section 26.6 on page 245) to enable DHCP snooping on
the Switch (not on specific VLAN), specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server is located, and
configure the DHCP snooping database.
• Use the DHCP Snooping Port Configure screen (Section 26.6.1 on page 246) to specify whether ports
are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
238
• Use the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen (Section 26.6.2 on page 247) to enable DHCP
snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option 82
information to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN.
• Use the DHCP Snooping VLAN Port Configure screen (Section 26.6.3 on page 248) to apply a different
DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports in a VLAN.
• Use the ARP Inspection Status screen (Section 26.7 on page 249) to look at the current list of MAC
address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet.
• Use the ARP Inspection VLAN Status screen (Section 26.7.1 on page 250) to look at various statistics
about ARP packets in each VLAN.
• Use the ARP Inspection Log Status screen (Section 26.7.2 on page 251) to look at log messages that
were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet.
• Use the ARP Inspection Configure screen (Section 26.8 on page 252) to enable ARP inspection on the
Switch. You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets
and global settings for the ARP inspection log.
• Use the ARP Inspection Port Configure screen (Section 26.8.1 on page 253) to specify whether ports
are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection.
• Use the ARP Inspection VLAN Configur e screen (Section 26.8.2 on page 255) to enable ARP inspection
on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets
from each VLAN.
• Use the Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Binding Status screen (Section 26.10
on page 256) to look at the current IPv6 dynamic and static bindings and to remove dynamic
bindings based on IPv6 address and/or IPv6 prefix.
• Use the Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Static Bindin g Setup screen (Section 26.11 on
page 257) to manually create an IPv6 source guard binding table and manage IPv6 static bindings.
• Use the Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup screen (Section
26.12 on page 258) to have IPv6 source guard forward valid IPv6 addresses and/or IPv6 prefixes that
are stored in the binding table and allow or block data traffic from all link-local addresses.
• Use the Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup screen (Section
26.13 on page 259) to apply configured IPv6 source guard policies to the ports you specify.
• Use the Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup screen (Section 26.14
on page 260) to dynamically create an IPv6 source guard binding table using a DHCPv6 snooping
policy. A DHCPv6 snooping policy lets the Switch sniff DHCPv6 packets sent from a DHCPv6 server to a
DHCPv6 client when it is assigning an IPv6 address.
• Use the Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup screen (Section 26.15
on page 261) to enable a DHCPv6 snooping policy on a specific VLAN interface.
• Use the Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup screen (Section 26.16 on
page 262) to specify which ports are trusted and untrusted for DHCP snooping.
26.1.2 What You Need to Know
The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets (dynamic bindings) and from information
provided manually by administrators (static bindings).
IP source guard consists of the following features:
• Static bindings. Use this to create static bindings in the binding table.
• DHCP snooping. Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding
table dynamically.
• ARP inspection. Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
239
If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets (typical implementation), you
have to enable DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection.
26.2 IP Source Guard
Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection. Bindings are used
by DHCP snooping and ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized packets in
the network. The Switch learns the bindings by snooping DHCP packets (dynamic bindings) and from
information provided manually by administrators (static bindings). To open this screen, click Advanced
Application > IP Source Guard.
Figure 175 IP Source Guard
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 103 IP Source Guard
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv4 Source Guard
Setup
Click the link to open screens where you can view and manage static bindings, configure
DHCP snooping or ARP inspection and look at various statistics.
IPv6 Source Binding
Status
Click the link to open a screen where you can view the current IPv6 dynamic and static
bindings or remove dynamic bindings based on IPv6 address and/or IPv6 prefix.
IPv6 Static Binding
Setup
Click the link to open a screen where you can manually create IPv6 source guard static
binding entries.
IPv6 Source Guard
Policy Setup
Click the link to open a screen where you can define policies to have IPv6 source guard
forward valid addresses and/or prefixes and allow or block data traffic from all link-local
addresses.
IPv6 Source Guard
Port Setup
Click the link to open a screen where you can apply the configured IPv6 source guard
policy to a port.
IPv6 Snooping Policy
Setup
Click the link to open a screen where you can set up DHCPv6 snooping policies for the
binding table.
IPv6 Snooping VLAN
Setup
Click the link to open a screen where you can enable a DHCPv6 snooping policy on a
specific VLAN interface.
IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup Click the link to open a screen where you can specify which ports are trusted for DHCPv6
snooping.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
240
26.3 IPv4 Source Guard Setup
Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection. Bindings are used
by DHCP snooping and ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized packets in
the network. The Switch learns the bindings by snooping DHCP packets (dynamic bindings) and from
information provided manually by administrators (static bindings). To open this screen, click Advanced
Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup.
Figure 176 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.4 IPv4 Source Guard Static Binding
Use this screen to manage static bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection. Static bindings are
uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID. Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only be in
one static binding. If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID as an
existing static binding, the new static binding replaces the original one. To open this screen, click
Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > Static Binding.
Table 104 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding.
IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding.
VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding.
Port This field displays the port number in the binding. If this field is blank, the binding applies to all
ports.
Lease This field displays how many days, hours, minutes, and seconds the binding is valid; for
example, 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still valid for 2 days, 3 hours, 4 minutes, and 5
seconds. This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid (for example, a static binding).
Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding.
static: This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator.
dhcp-snooping: This binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
241
Figure 177 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > Static Binding
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 105 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > Static Binding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ARP Freeze ARP Freeze allows you to automatically create static bindings from the current ARP entries
(either dynamically learned or static ARP entries) until the Switch’s binding table is full.
Note: The ARP learning mode should be set to ARP-Request in the IP Application >
ARP Setup > ARP Learning screen before you use the ARP Freeze feature.
Condition All - Select this and click ARP Freeze to have the Switch automatically add all the current ARP
entries to the static bindings table.
Port List - Select this and enter the number of the port(s) (separated by a comma).
ARP entries learned on the specified port(s) are added to the static bindings table after you
click ARP Freeze.
VLAN List - Select this and enter the ID number of the VLAN(s) (separated by a comma). ARP
entries for the specified VLAN(s) are added to the static bindings table after you click ARP
Freeze.
Static Binding
IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding.
VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding.
MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding. If this binding applies to all MAC addresses,
select Any.
Port Specify the port(s) in the binding. If this binding has one port, select the first radio button and
enter the port number in the field to the right. If this binding applies to all ports, select Any.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected static binding or, if not
applicable, to clear the fields above.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
242
26.5 DHCP Snooping
Use this screen to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database. To open this screen, click
Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding. Click on an index number to view
more details or change the settings.
IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding.
VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding.
Port This field displays the port number.
Lease This field displays how long the binding is valid.
Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding.
static: This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button to remove the
selected entry(ies) from the table.
Cancel Click this to clear the check boxes above.
Table 105 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > Static Binding (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
243
Figure 178 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 106 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Database Status
This section displays the current settings for the DHCP snooping database. You can
configure them in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen. See Section 26.6 on page 245.
Agent URL This field displays the location of the DHCP snooping database.
Write delay timer This field displays how long (in seconds) the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the
DHCP snooping database before it gives up.
Abort timer This field displays how long (in seconds) the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping
database after the current bindings change.
This section displays information about the current update and the next update of the DHCP
snooping database.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
244
Agent running This field displays the status of the current update or access of the DHCP snooping
database.
none: The Switch is not accessing the DHCP snooping database.
read: The Switch is loading dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database.
write: The Switch is updating the DHCP snooping database.
Delay timer expiry This field displays how much longer (in seconds) the Switch tries to complete the current
update before it gives up. It displays Not Running if the Switch is not updating the DHCP
snooping database right now.
Abort timer expiry This field displays when (in seconds) the Switch is going to update the DHCP snooping
database again. It displays Not Running if the current bindings have not changed since the
last update.
This section displays information about the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping
database.
Last succeeded
time
This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database
successfully.
Last failed time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database
unsuccessfully.
Last failed reason This field displays the reason the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database
unsuccessfully.
This section displays historical information about the number of times the Switch successfully
or unsuccessfully read or updated the DHCP snooping database.
Total attempts This field displays the number of times the Switch has tried to access the DHCP snooping
database for any reason.
Startup failures This field displays the number of times the Switch could not create or read the DHCP
snooping database when the Switch started up or a new URL is configured for the DHCP
snooping database.
Successful transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from or updated the bindings
in the DHCP snooping database successfully.
Failed transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from or
update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database.
Successful reads This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from the DHCP snooping
database successfully.
Failed reads This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from the
DHCP snooping database.
Successful writes This field displays the number of times the Switch updated the bindings in the DHCP
snooping database successfully.
Failed writes This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to update the bindings in the
DHCP snooping database.
Database detail
First successful
access
This field displays the first time the Switch accessed the DHCP snooping database for any
reason.
Last ignored
bindings counters
This section displays the number of times and the reasons the Switch ignored bindings the
last time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database. You can clear these counters by
restarting the Switch or using CLI commands. See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide.
Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch already
had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID.
Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the port number was
a trusted interface or does not exist anymore.
Table 106 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
245
26.6 DHCP Snooping Configure
Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch (not on specific VLAN), specify the VLAN where
the default DHCP server is located, and configure the DHCP snooping database. The DHCP snooping
database stores the current bindings on a secure, external TFTP server so that they are still available after
a restart. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Sou rce Guard Setup
> DHCP Snooping > Configure.
Figure 179 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure
Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch was unable
to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database.
Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the lease time had
already expired.
Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the VLAN ID does not
exist anymore.
Last ignored time This field displays the last time the Switch ignored any bindings for any reason from the DHCP
binding database.
Total ignored
bindings counters
This section displays the reasons the Switch has ignored bindings any time it read bindings
from the DHCP binding database. You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or
using CLI commands. See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide.
Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch already
had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID.
Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the port number
was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore.
Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch was
unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database.
Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the lease time
had already expired.
Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the VLAN ID does
not exist anymore.
Table 106 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
246
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.6.1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure
Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping.
Note: The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no
trusted ports.
You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port (trusted or untrusted) can
receive each second. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Sou rce
Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > Port.
Table 107 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch. You still have to enable DHCP snooping
on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports.
Note: The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and
there are no trusted ports.
DHCP Vlan Select a VLAN ID if you want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to DHCP servers on a
specific VLAN.
Note: You have to enable DHCP snooping on the DHCP VLAN too.
You can select an option 82 profile in the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen (Section
26.6.2 on page 247) to help the DHCP servers distinguish between DHCP requests from
different VLAN.
Select Disable if you do not want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to a specific VLAN.
Database If Timeout interval is greater than Write delay interval, it is possible that the next update is
scheduled to occur before the current update has finished successfully or timed out. In this
case, the Switch waits to start the next update until it completes the current one.
Agent URL Enter the location of the DHCP snooping database. The location should be expressed like
this: tftp://{domain name or IP address}/directory, if applicable/file name; for example,
tftp://192.168.10.1/database.txt.
Timeout interval Enter how long (10-65535 seconds) the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the
DHCP snooping database before it gives up.
Write delay
interval Enter how long (10-65535 seconds) the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping
database the first time the current bindings change after an update. Once the next
update is scheduled, additional changes in current bindings are automatically included in
the next update.
Renew DHCP
Snooping URL Enter the location of a DHCP snooping database, and click Renew if you want the Switch to
load it. You can use this to load dynamic bindings from a different DHCP snooping
database than the one specified in Agent URL.
When the Switch loads dynamic bindings from a DHCP snooping database, it does not
discard the current dynamic bindings first. If there is a conflict, the Switch keeps the
dynamic binding in volatile memory and updates the Binding collisions counter in the DHCP
Snooping screen (Section 26.5 on page 242).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
247
Figure 180 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure> Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.6.2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure
Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds
DHCP relay agent option 82 information (Chapter 41 on page 343) to DHCP requests that the Switch
relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source
Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN.
Table 108 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to
set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Server Trusted state Select whether this port is a trusted port (Trusted) or an untrusted port (Untrusted).
Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches, and the Switch discards
DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high.
Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers, and the Switch discards DHCP packets from
untrusted ports in the following situations:
• The packet is a DHCP server packet (for example, OFFER, ACK, or NACK).
• The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the
current bindings.
• The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet, and the source MAC address and source
port do not match any of the current bindings.
• The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high.
Rate (pps) Specify the maximum number for DHCP packets (1-2048) that the Switch receives from
each port each second. The Switch discards any additional DHCP packets. Enter 0 to
disable this limit, which is recommended for trusted ports.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
248
Figure 181 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.6.3 DHCP Snooping VLAN Port Configure
Use this screen to apply a different DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports in a VLAN. To open this screen,
click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure
> VLAN > Port.
Figure 182 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN > Port
Table 109 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Search by VID Use a comma (,) to separate individual VLANs or a dash (-) to indicates a range of VLANs. For
example, “3,4” or “3-9”.
Search Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above. If you configure
the * VLAN, the settings are applied to all VLANs.
Enabled Select Yes to enable DHCP snooping on the VLAN. You still have to enable DHCP snooping
on the Switch and specify trusted ports.
Note: The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and
there are no trusted ports.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to all ports in the
specified VLAN(s). The Switch adds the information (such as slot number, port number, VLAN
ID and/or system name) specified in the profile to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the
DHCP VLAN, if specified, or VLAN. You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping
Configure screen (see Section 26.6 on page 245).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous/next screen if all status information cannot be
seen in one screen.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
249
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.7 ARP Inspection Status
Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch
identified an unauthorized ARP packet. When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet, it
automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source
VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source
Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection.
Figure 183 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection Status
Table 110 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN you want to configure here.
Port Enter the number of port(s) to which you want to apply the specified DHCP option 82 profile.
You can enter multiple ports separated by (no space) comma (,) or hyphen (-) for a range.
For example, enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the specified port(s) in
this VLAN. The Switch adds the information (such as slot number, port number, VLAN ID and/
or system name) specified in the profile to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP
VLAN, if specified, or VLAN. You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure
screen (see Section 26.6 on page 245).
Note: The profile you select here has priority over the one you select in the DHCP
Snooping > Configure > VLAN screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it
is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected entry or, if not applicable, to
clear the fields above.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each entry. Click an index number to change the
settings.
VID This field displays the VLAN to which the port(s) belongs.
Port This field displays the port(s) to which the Switch applies the settings.
Profile Name This field displays the DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the port(s).
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove in the Delete column, and then click the Delete
button to remove the selected entry(ies) from the table.
Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
250
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.7.1 ARP Inspection VLAN Status
Use this screen to look at various statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN. To open this screen, click
Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > VLAN Status.
Figure 184 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > VLAN Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 111 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Total number of
filters
This field displays the current number of MAC address filters that were created because the
Switch identified unauthorized ARP packets.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each MAC address filter.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter.
VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter.
Port This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet.
Expiry (sec) This field displays how long (in seconds) the MAC address filter remains in the Switch. You
can also delete the record manually (Delete).
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click this to remove the selected entries.
Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above.
Change Pages Click Previous Page or Next Page to show the previous/next screen if all status information
cannot be seen in one screen.
Table 112 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > VLAN Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Search by VID Use a comma (,) to separate individual VLANs or a dash (-) to indicates a range of VLANs.
For example, “3,4” or “3-9”.
Search Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above.
Received This field displays the total number of ARP packets received from the VLAN since the Switch
last restarted.
Request This field displays the total number of ARP Request packets received from the VLAN since
the Switch last restarted.
Reply This field displays the total number of ARP Reply packets received from the VLAN since the
Switch last restarted.
Forwarded This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch forwarded for the VLAN since
the Switch last restarted.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
251
26.7.2 ARP Inspection Log Status
Use this screen to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been
sent to the syslog server yet. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4
Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Log Status.
Figure 185 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Log Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Dropped This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch discarded for the VLAN since
the Switch last restarted.
Change Pages Click Previous Page or Next Pa ge to show the previous/next screen if all status information
cannot be seen in one screen.
Table 112 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > VLAN Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 113 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Log Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clearing log status table Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated by ARP packets and
that have not been sent to the syslog server yet.
Total number of logs This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP packets
and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet. If one or more log messages are
dropped due to unavailable buffer, there is an entry called overflow with the current
number of dropped log messages.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message.
Port This field displays the source port of the ARP packet.
VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of the ARP packet.
Sender MAC This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet.
Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet.
Num Pkts This field displays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log
message. The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP packets
in the log consolidation interval into one log message. You can configure this interval in
the ARP Inspection Configure screen. See Section 26.8 on page 252.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
252
26.8 ARP Inspection Configure
Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch. You can also configure the length of time the
Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global settings for the ARP inspection log. To open
this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Sour ce Guard Setup > ARP Inspection >
Configure.
Figure 186 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated.
dhcp deny: An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a dynamic binding with
the same MAC address and VLAN ID.
static deny: An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a static binding with the
same MAC address and VLAN ID.
deny: An ARP packet was discarded because there were no bindings with the same
MAC address and VLAN ID.
dhcp permit: An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a dynamic binding.
static permit: An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a static binding.
In the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen, you can configure the Switch to
generate log messages when ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the
VLAN ID of the ARP packet. See Section 26.8.2 on page 255.
Time This field displays when the log message was generated.
Table 113 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Log Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 114 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch. You still have to enable ARP inspection
on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports.
Filter Aging Time
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
253
26.8.1 ARP Inspection Port Configure
Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection. You can also
specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on each untrusted port. To open
this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Sour ce Guard Setup > ARP Inspection >
Configure > Port.
Filter aging time This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters.
Enter how long (1-2147483647 seconds) the MAC address filter remains in the Switch after
the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet. The Switch automatically deletes the
MAC address filter afterwards. Type 0 if you want the MAC address filter to be permanent.
Log Profile
Log buffer size Enter the maximum number (1-1024) of log messages that were generated by ARP packets
and have not been sent to the syslog server yet. Make sure this number is appropriate for
the specified Syslog rate and Log interval.
If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number, the Switch stops recording
log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were dropped due to
unavailable buffer. Click Clea ring log status tab le in the ARP Inspection Log Status screen to
clear the log and reset this counter. See Section 26.7.2 on page 251.
Syslog rate Type the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog server in
one batch. This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency is determined
by the Log Interval. You must configure the syslog server (Chapter 47 on page 395) to use
this. Enter 0 if you do not want the Switch to send log messages generated by ARP packets
to the syslog server.
The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval is illustrated in the following examples:
• 4 invalid ARP packets per second, Syslog rate is 5, Log interval is 1: the Switch sends 4
syslog messages every second.
• 6 invalid ARP packets per second, Syslog rate is 5, Log interval is 2: the Switch sends 5
syslog messages every 2 seconds.
Log interval Type how often (1-86400 seconds) the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the syslog
server. Enter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages immediately. See Syslog rate
for an example of the relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 114 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
254
Figure 187 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 115 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first
to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make
them.
Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port (Trusted) or an untrusted port (Untrusted).
The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason.
The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations:
• The sender’s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current
bindings.
• The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high. You can specify the maximum rate
at which ARP packets can arrive on untrusted ports.
Limit Rate and Burst Interval settings have no effect on trusted ports.
Rate (pps) Specify the maximum rate (1-2048 packets per second) at which the Switch receives ARP
packets from each port. The Switch discards any additional ARP packets. Enter 0 to
disable this limit.
Burst interval (seconds) The burst interval is the length of time over which the rate of ARP packets is monitored for
each port. For example, if the Rate is 15 pps and the burst interval is 1 second, then the
Switch accepts a maximum of 15 ARP packets in every one-second interval. If the burst
interval is 5 seconds, then the Switch accepts a maximum of 75 ARP packets in every five-
second interval.
Enter the length (1-15 seconds) of the burst interval.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
255
26.8.2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure
Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log
messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN. To open this screen, click Advanced Application
> IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure > VLAN.
Figure 188 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.9 IPv6 Source Guard Overview
The purpose of IPv6 source guard is to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized users by using
a binding table that validates the source of IPv6 traffic. The binding table can be manually created or
be learned through Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version 6 snooping (DHCPv6 snooping). IPv6
source guard can deny IPv6 traffic from an unknown source. The IPv6 source guard binding table
includes:
Table 116 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Search by
VID
Specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below. Use a comma (,) to separate
individual VLANs or a dash (-) to indicates a range of VLANs. For example, “3,4” or “3-9”.
Search Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above. If you configure the
* VLAN, the settings are applied to all VLANs.
Enabled Select Yes to enable ARP inspection on the VLAN. Select No to disable ARP inspection on the
VLAN.
Log Specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the VLAN.
None: The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet from
the VLAN.
Deny: The Switch generates log messages when it discards an ARP packet from the VLAN.
Permit: The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the VLAN.
All: The Switch generates log messages every time it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Change Pages Click Previous Page or Next Page to show the previous/next screen if all status information
cannot be seen in one screen.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
256
• IPv6 address
• IPv6 prefix
• VLAN ID
• Port number
• MAC address
Enable IPv6 source guard on a port for the Switch to check incoming IPv6 packets on that port. A
packet is allowed when it matches any entry in the IPSG binding table. If a user tries to send IPv6 packets
to the Switch that do not match an entry in the IPSG binding table, the Switch will drop these packets.
The Switch forwards matching traffic normally. The IPv6 source guard related screens are available in
standalone mode.
26.10 IPv6 Source Binding Status
Use this screen to look at the current IPv6 dynamic and static bindings and to remove dynamic bindings
based on IPv6 address and/or IPv6 prefix. Bindings are used to distinguish between authorized and
unauthorized packets in the network. The Switch learns the bindings by snooping DHCP packets
(dynamic bindings) and from information provided manually by administrators (static bindings). To open
this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Binding Status.
Figure 189 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Binding Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 117 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Binding Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clear Dynamic
Source Binding
Specify how you want the Switch to remove dynamic IPv6 source binding entries when you
click Flush.
• Select All to remove all of the dynamic entries from the IPv6 source binding table.
• Select IPv6 Address and enter an IPv6 address to remove the dynamic entries snooped
with the specified IPv6 address.
• Select IPv6 Prefix and enter a Prefix address to remove the dynamic entries snooped with
the specified Prefix address.
Flush Click this to remove dynamic IPv6 source binding entries according to your selections.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based or if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding.
Source Address This field displays the source IP address in the binding. If the entry is blank, this field will not be
checked in the binding.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding. If the entry is blank, this field will not
be checked in the binding.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
257
26.11 IPv6 Static Binding Setup
Use this screen to manually create an IPv6 source guard binding table entry and manage IPv6 static
bindings. Static bindings are uniquely identified by the source IPv6 address / prefix. Each source IPv6
address / prefix can only be in one static binding. If you try to create a static binding with the same
source IPv6 address / prefix as an existing static binding, the new static binding replaces the original
one. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Static Binding Setup.
Figure 190 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Static Binding Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding. If the entry is blank, this field will not be
checked in the binding.
Port This field displays the port number in the binding. If this field is blank, the binding applies to all
ports.
Lease This field displays how many days, hours, minutes, and seconds the binding is valid; for
example, 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still valid for 2 days, 3 hours, 4 minutes, and 5
seconds. This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid (for example, a static binding).
Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding.
S: This static binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator.
DH: This dhcp-snooping binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets.
Table 117 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Binding Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 118 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Static Binding Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Static Binding
Source Address Enter the IPv6 address or IPv6 prefix and prefix length in the binding.
MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding. If this binding doesn’t check this field, select
Any.
Note: You cannot choose Any for all three of MAC Address, VLAN and Port. You
must fill in at least one.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
258
26.12 IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup
Use this screen to have IPv6 source guard forward valid IPv6 addresses and/or IPv6 prefixes that are
stored in the binding table and allow or block data traffic from all link-local addresses. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup.
•If you select Validate Address and not Validate Prefix, traffic for a binding entry that matches a IPv6
address and VLAN ID, port number, and MAC address will be forwarded. If this binding entry is a IPv6
prefix, the traffic will be denied.
•If you select Validate Prefix and not Validate Address, traffic for a binding entry that matches a IPv6
prefix and VLAN ID, port number, and MAC address will be forwarded. If this binding entry is a IPv6
address, the traffic will be denied.
•If you select both Validate Prefix and Validate Address then traffic matching either IPv6 address or
prefix will be forwarded.
Figure 191 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup
VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding. If this binding doesn’t check this field, select Any.
Port Specify the port(s) in the binding. If this binding has one port, select the first radio button and
enter the port number in the field to the right.
Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based or if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding.
Source Address This field displays the IPv6 address or IPv6 prefix and prefix length in the binding.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding. If the entry is blank, this field will not
be checked in the binding.
VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding. If the entry is blank, this field will not be
checked in the binding.
Port This field displays the port number in the binding. If this field is blank, the binding applies to all
ports.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select an entry check box and click Delete to remove the specified entry.
Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above.
Table 118 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Static Binding Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
259
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.13 IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup
Use this screen to apply configured IPv6 source guard policies to ports you specify. Use port * to apply a
policy to all ports. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source
Guard Port Setup.
Figure 192 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup
Table 119 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this IPv6 source guard policy.
Validate Address Select Validate Address to have IPv6 source guard forward valid addresses that are stored in
the binding table.
Validate Prefix Select Validate Prefix to have IPv6 source guard forward valid prefixes that are stored in the
binding table.
Link Local Select Permit to allow data traffic from all link-local addresses; otherwise leave the setting at
Deny. A link-local address is an IPv6 unicast address that can be automatically configured on
any interface using the link-local prefix FE80::/10 and the interface identifier in the modified
EUI-64 format.
Add Click this to create the IPv6 source guard policy or to update an existing one.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above or if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each policy.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this IPv6 source guard
policy.
Validate Address This field displays the Validate Address status for this IPv6 source guard policy.
Validate Prefix This field displays the Validate Prefix status for this IPv6 source guard policy.
Link Local This field displays the Link Local traffic status for this IPv6 source guard policy.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select an entry checkbox and click Delete to remove the specified entry.
Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
260
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.14 IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup
Use this screen to dynamically create an IPv6 source guard binding table using a DHCPv6 snooping
policy. A DHCPv6 snooping policy lets the Switch sniff DHCPv6 packets sent from a DHCPv6 server to a
DHCPv6 client when it is assigning an IPv6 address. When a DHCPv6 client successfully gets a valid IPv6
address, DHCPv6 snooping builds the binding table dynamically. To open this screen, click Advanced
Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup.
Note: If you do not select Protocol and Prefix Glean, then the Switch cannot perform DHCPv6
snooping.
Figure 193 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 120 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Policy Name Select an IPv6 source guard policy that the Switch will apply to this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 121 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this IPv6 snooping policy.
Protocol Select DHCP to let the Switch sniff DHCPv6 packets sent from a DHCPv6 server to a DHCPv6
client.
Prefix Glean Select this to learn the IPv6 prefix and length from DHCPv6 sniffed packets.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
261
26.15 IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup
Use this screen to enable a DHCPv6 snooping policy on a specific VLAN interface. To open this screen,
click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup.
Figure 194 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Limit Address
Count
This is the number of IPv6 addresses and prefixes learned using the IPv6 snooping policy.
Note: The maximum limit address count is the maximum size of the IPv6 source
guard binding table. See the product datasheet for the latest specifications.
Add Click this to create the IPv6 source guard policy or to update an existing one.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above or if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each IPv6 snooping policy.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this IPv6 source guard
policy.
Protocol This field displays the protocols learned from DHCPv6 sniffed packets.
Prefix Glean This field displays the IPv6 prefixes learned from DHCPv6 sniffed packets.
Limit Address
Count
This field displays the number of IPv6 addresses and prefixes learned using the IPv6 snooping
policy.
Delete Select an entry check box and click Delete to remove the specified entry.
Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above.
Table 121 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 122 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the VLAN interface to apply the selected DHCPv6 snooping policy.
Policy Select the IPv6 snooping policy to apply to this VLAN interface.
Add Click this to create the IPv6 source guard policy or to update an existing one.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above or if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding.
Interface This field displays the VLAN interface.
Policy This field displays the DHCPv6 snooping policy.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
262
26.16 IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup
Use this screen to specify which ports are trusted for DHCPv6 snooping. To open this screen, click
Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup.
Note: DHCPv6 solicit packets are sent from a DHCPv6 client to a DHCPv6 server. Reply
packets from a DHCPv6 server connected to an untrusted port are discarded.
Use port * to have all ports be Untrusted or Trusted.
Figure 195 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select an entry check box and click Delete to remove the specified entry.
Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above.
Table 122 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 123 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Trust Setting
Active Select this to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping. If you do
not select this then IPv6 DHCP Trust is not used and all ports are automatically trusted.
Port Setting
Port This field displays the port number.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
263
26.17 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
26.17.1 DHCP Snooping Overview
Use DHCP snooping to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table
dynamically. This can prevent clients from getting IP addresses from unauthorized DHCP servers.
26.17.1.1 Trusted vs. Untrusted Ports
Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for DHCP snooping. This setting is independent of
the trusted/untrusted setting for ARP inspection. You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP
packets that each port (trusted or untrusted) can receive each second.
Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches. The Switch discards DHCP packets from
trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high. The Switch learns dynamic
bindings from trusted ports.
Note: The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no
trusted ports.
Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers. The Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in
the following situations:
• The packet is a DHCP server packet (for example, OFFER, ACK, or NACK).
• The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current
bindings.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port (Trusted) or an untrusted port (Untrusted).
Trusted ports are connected to DHCPv6 servers or other switches.
Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers, and the Switch discards DHCPv6 packets from
untrusted ports in the following situations:
• The packet is a DHCPv6 server packet (for example, ADVERTISE, REPLY, or RELAY-REPLY).
• The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the
current bindings.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 123 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
264
• The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet, and the source MAC address and source port do not
match any of the current bindings.
• The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high.
26.17.1.2 DHCP Snooping Database
The Switch stores the binding table in volatile memory. If the Switch restarts, it loads static bindings from
permanent memory but loses the dynamic bindings, in which case the devices in the network have to
send DHCP requests again. As a result, it is recommended you configure the DHCP snooping database.
The DHCP snooping database maintains the dynamic bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection
in a file on an external TFTP server. If you set up the DHCP snooping database, the Switch can reload the
dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database after the Switch restarts.
You can configure the name and location of the file on the external TFTP server. The file has the following
format:
Figure 196 DHCP Snooping Database File Format
The <initial-checksum> helps distinguish between the bindings in the latest update and the bindings
from previous updates. Each binding consists of 72 bytes, a space, and another checksum that is used
to validate the binding when it is read. If the calculated checksum is not equal to the checksum in the
file, that binding and all others after it are ignored.
26.17.1.3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Information
The Switch can add information to DHCP requests that it does not discard. This provides the DHCP server
more information about the source of the requests. The Switch can add the following information:
• Slot ID (1 byte), port ID (1 byte), and source VLAN ID (2 bytes)
• System name (up to 32 bytes)
This information is stored in an Agent Information field in the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client
DHCP request frames. See Chapter 41 on page 343 for more information about DHCP relay option 82.
When the DHCP server responds, the Switch removes the information in the Agent Information field
before forwarding the response to the original source.
You can configure this setting for each source VLAN. This setting is independent of the DHCP relay
settings (Chapter 41 on page 343).
26.17.1.4 Configuring DHCP Snooping
Follow these steps to configure DHCP snooping on the Switch.
<initial-checksum>
TYPE DHCP-SNOOPING
VERSION 1
BEGIN
<binding-1> <checksum-1>
<binding-2> <checksum-1-2>
...
...
<binding-n> <checksum-1-2-..-n>
END
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
265
1Enable DHCP snooping on the Switch.
2Enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN, and configure DHCP relay option 82.
3Configure trusted and untrusted ports, and specify the maximum number of DHCP packets that each
port can receive per second.
4Configure static bindings.
26.17.2 ARP Inspection Overview
Use ARP inspection to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network. This can prevent many kinds of
man-in-the-middle attacks, such as the one in the following example.
Figure 197 Example: Man-in-the-middle Attack
In this example, computer B tries to establish a connection with computer A. Computer X is in the same
broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A. Then, computer X
does the following things:
• It pretends to be computer A and responds to computer B.
• It pretends to be computer B and sends a message to computer A.
As a result, all the communication between computer A and computer B passes through computer X.
Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them.
26.17.2.1 ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters
When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet, it automatically creates a MAC address filter to
block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet. You
can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch.
These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters (Chapter 12 on page 136).
• They are stored only in volatile memory.
• They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use.
• They appear only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands, not in the MAC Address Filter screens
and commands.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
266
26.17.2.2 Trusted vs. Untrusted Ports
Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection. This setting is independent of
the trusted/untrusted setting for DHCP snooping. You can also specify the maximum rate at which the
Switch receives ARP packets on untrusted ports.
The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason.
The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations:
• The sender’s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings.
• The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high.
26.17.2.3 Syslog
The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server (Chapter 47 on page 395) when it
forwards or discards ARP packets. The Switch can consolidate log messages and send log messages in
batches to make this mechanism more efficient.
26.17.2.4 Configuring ARP Inspection
Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Switch.
1Configure DHCP snooping. See Section 26.17.1.4 on page 264.
Note: It is recommended you enable DHCP snooping at least one day before you enable
ARP inspection so that the Switch has enough time to build the binding table.
2Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN.
3Configure trusted and untrusted ports, and specify the maximum number of ARP packets that each port
can receive per second.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
267
CHAPTER 27
Loop Guard
27.1 Loop Guard Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network.
Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on
that port loop back to the Switch. While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) to prevent loops in the
core of your network. STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your network.
Figure 198 Loop Guard vs. STP
Refer to Section 27.1.2 on page 267 for more information.
27.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Loop Guard screen (Section 27.2 on page 269) to enable loop guard on the Switch and in
specific ports.
27.1.2 What You Need to Know
Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network. This can occur when a
port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state. Loop state occurs as a result of human error. It
happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable. When a switch in loop state
sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re-broadcast again and
again causing a broadcast storm.
If a switch (not in loop state) connects to a switch in loop state, then it will be affected by the switch in
loop state in the following way:
• It will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state.
• It will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back. It will then re-broadcast
those messages again.
Chapter 27 Loop Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
268
The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B. Switch B is in loop state. When
broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B, they are sent back to port N on A as
they are rebroadcast from B.
Figure 199 Switch in Loop State
The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop
state. This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on
the same port. If this is the case, the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in loop state.
The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch
B. Since switch B is in loop state, the probe packet P returns to port N on A. The Switch then shuts down
port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop state.
Figure 200 Loop Guard - Probe Packet
The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port. In other
words loop guard also protects against standard network loops. The following figure illustrates three
switches forming a loop. A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown. In this example,
the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port. As long as loop guard is enabled on
port N. The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch.
Figure 201 Loop Guard - Network Loop
Note: After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re-activate the disabled port
via the web configurator (see Section 8.7 on page 88).
Chapter 27 Loop Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
269
27.2 Loop Guard Setup
Click Advanced Application > Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Note: The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP, MRSTP or MSTP) enabled.
Figure 202 Advanced Application > Loop Guard
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 124 Advanced Application > Loop Guard
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch.
The Switch generates syslog, internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts down a
port via the loop guard feature.
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port. The Switch sends probe
packets from this port to check if the switch it is connected to is in loop state. If the switch that
this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port.
Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
270
CHAPTER 28
VLAN Mapping
This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN mapping on the Switch.
28.1 VLAN Mapping Overview
With VLAN mapping enabled, the Switch can map the VLAN ID and priority level of packets received
from a private network to those used in the service provider’s network.
The Switch checks incoming traffic from the switch ports (non-management ports) against the VLAN
mapping table first, the MAC learning table and then the VLAN table before forwarding them through
the Gigabit uplink port. If the incoming packets are untagged or tagged but do not match an entry in
the VLAN mapping table, the Switch doesn’t translate the existing VLAN ID and uses the MAC table
and/or VLAN table to decide how to forward the packets.
28.1.1 VLAN Mapping Example
In the following example figure, packets that carry VLAN ID 12 and are received on port 3 match a pre-
configured VLAN mapping rule. The Switch translates the VLAN ID from 12 into 123 before forwarding the
packets.
Figure 203 VLAN mapping example
28.1.2 What You Can Do
• Use the VLAN Mapping screen (Section 28.2 on page 271) to enable VLAN mapping on the Switch and
ports.
• Use the VLAN Mapping Configure screen (Section 28.2.1 on page 271) to enable and edit the VLAN
mapping rules.
Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
271
28.2 Enable VLAN Mapping
Click Advanced Application and then VLAN Mapping in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown.
Figure 204 Advanced Application > VLAN Mapping
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
28.2.1 VLAN Mapping Configure
Click the VLAN Mapping Configure link in the VLAN Mapping screen to display the screen as shown. Use
this screen to enable and edit the VLAN mapping rule(s).
Table 125 Advanced Application > VLAN Mapping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable VLAN mapping on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable the VLAN mapping feature on this port. Clear this check box to
disable the VLAN mapping feature.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
272
Figure 205 Advanced Application > VLAN Mapping > VLAN Mapping Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 126 Advanced Application > VLAN Mapping > VLAN Mapping Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Check this box to activate this rule.
Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
Port Type a port to be included in this rule.
VID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094. This is the VLAN tag carried in the packets and will be translated
into the VID you specified in the Translated VID field.
Translated VID Enter a VLAN ID (from 1 to 4094) into which the customer VID carried in the packets will be
translated.
Priority Select a priority level (from 0 to 7). This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority
level in the tagged packets or adds to the untagged packets.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Index This is the number of the VLAN mapping entry in the table. Click on an index number to change
the settings.
Active This shows whether this entry is activated or not.
Name This is the descriptive name for this rule.
Port This is the port number to which this rule is applied. I
VID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets.
Translated VID This is the VLAN ID that replaces the customer VLAN ID in the tagged packets.
Priority This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority level in the tagged packets.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete
button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
273
CHAPTER 29
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
29.1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch.
29.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Layer 2 Protocol Tunnel screen (Section 29.2 on page 274) to enable layer 2 protocol tunneling
on the Switch and specify a MAC address with which the Switch uses to encapsulate the layer 2
protocol packets by replacing the destination MAC address in the packets.
29.1.2 What You Need to Know
Layer 2 protocol tunneling (L2PT) is used on the service provider's edge devices.
L2PT allows edge switches (1 and 2 in the following figure) to tunnel layer 2 STP (Spanning Tree Protocol),
CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) and VTP (VLAN Trunking Protocol) packets between customer switches
(A, B and C in the following figure) connected through the service provider’s network. The edge switch
encapsulates layer 2 protocol packets with a specific MAC address before sending them across the
service provider’s network to other edge switches.
Figure 206 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Network Scenario
In the following example, if you enable L2PT for STP, you can have switches A, B, C and D in the same
spanning tree, even though switch A is not directly connected to switches B, C and D. Topology change
information can be propagated throughout the service provider’s network.
Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
274
To emulate a point-to-point topology between two customer switches at different sites, such as A and B,
you can enable protocol tunneling on edge switches 1 and 2 for PAgP (Port Aggregation Protocol),
LACP or UDLD (UniDirectional Link Detection).
Figure 207 L2PT Network Example
29.1.2.1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Mode
Each port can have two layer 2 protocol tunneling modes, Access and Tunnel.
• The Access port is an ingress port on the service provider's edge device (1 or 2 in Figure 207 on page
274) and connected to a customer switch (A or B). Incoming layer 2 protocol packets received on an
access port are encapsulated and forwarded to the tunnel ports.
• The Tunnel port is an egress port at the edge of the service provider's network and connected to
another service provider’s switch. Incoming encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a
tunnel port are decapsulated and sent to an access port.
29.2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
Click Advanced Application > Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling in the navigation panel to display the screen
as shown.
Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
275
Figure 208 Advanced Application > Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 127 Advanced Application > Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch.
Destination
MAC Address
Specify a MAC address with which the Switch uses to encapsulate the layer 2 protocol packets
by replacing the destination MAC address in the packets.
Note: The MAC address can be either a unicast MAC address or multicast MAC
address. If you use a unicast MAC address, make sure the MAC address does
not exist in the address table of a switch on the service provider’s network.
Note: All the edge switches in the service provider’s network should be set to use the
same MAC address for encapsulation.
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
CDP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) packets so that
other Cisco devices can be discovered through the service provider’s network.
STP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) packets so that STP can
run properly across the service provider’s network and spanning trees can be set up based on
bridge information from all (local and remote) networks.
VTP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel VTP (VLAN Trunking Protocol) packets so that all
customer switches can use consistent VLAN configuration through the service provider’s
network.
Point to Point The Switch supports PAgP (Port Aggregation Protocol), LACP (Link Aggregation Control
Protocol) and UDLD (UniDirectional Link Detection) tunneling for a point-to-point topology.
Both PAgP and UDLD are Cisco’s proprietary data link layer protocols. PAgP is similar to LACP
and used to set up a logical aggregation of Ethernet ports automatically. UDLD is to determine
the link’s physical status and detect a unidirectional link.
Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
276
PAGP Select this option to have the Switch send PAgP packets to a peer to automatically negotiate
and build a logical port aggregation.
LACP Select this option to have the Switch send LACP packets to a peer to dynamically creates and
manages trunk groups.
UDLD Select this option to have the Switch send UDLD packets to a peer’s port it connected to
monitor the physical status of a link.
Mode Select Access to have the Switch encapsulate the incoming layer 2 protocol packets and
forward them to the tunnel port(s). Select Access for ingress ports at the edge of the service
provider's network.
Note: You can enable L2PT services for STP, LACP, VTP, CDP, UDLD, and PAGP on the
access port(s) only.
Select Tunnel for egress ports at the edge of the service provider's network. The Switch
decapsulates the encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port by
changing the destination MAC address to the original one, and then forward them to an access
port. If the service(s) is not enabled on an access port, the protocol packets are dropped.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 127 Advanced Application > Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
277
CHAPTER 30
PPPoE
30.1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Overview
This chapter describes how the Switch gives a PPPoE termination server additional information that the
server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client.
A PPPoE Intermediate Agent (PPPoE IA) is deployed between a PPPoE server and PPPoE clients. It helps
the PPPoE server identify and authenticate clients by adding subscriber line specific information to
PPPoE discovery packets from clients on a per-port or per-port-per-VLAN basis before forwarding them
to the PPPoE server.
30.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the PPPoE screen (Section 30.2 on page 279) to display the main PPPoE screen.
• Use the Intermediate Agent screen (Section 30.3 on page 280) to enable the PPPoE Intermediate
Agent on the Switch.
• Use the PPPoE IA Per-Port screen (Section 30.3.1 on page 281) to set the port state and configure
PPPoE intermediate agent sub-options on a per-port basis.
• Use the PPPoE IA Per-Port Per-VLAN screen (Section 30.3.2 on page 282) to configure PPPoE IA settings
that apply to a specific VLAN on a port.
• Use the PPPoE IA for VLAN (Section 30.3.3 on page 283) to enable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on a
VLAN.
30.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on ARP that can help you configure the screen in this chapter.
30.1.2.1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Tag Format
If the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled, the Switch adds a vendor-specific tag to PADI (PPPoE
Active Discovery Initialization) and PADR (PPPoE Active Discovery Request) packets from PPPoE clients.
This tag is defined in RFC 2516 and has the following format for this feature.
Table 128 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Vendor-specific Tag Format
Tag_Type
(0x0105)
Tag_Len Value i1 i2
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
278
The Tag_Type is 0x0105 for vendor-specific tags, as defined in RFC 2516. The Tag_Len indicates the
length of Value, i1 and i2. The Value is the 32-bit number 0x00000DE9, which stands for the “ADSL Forum”
IANA entry. i1 and i2 are PPPoE intermediate agent sub-options, which contain additional information
about the PPPoE client.
30.1.2.2 Sub-Option Format
There are two types of sub-option: “Agent Circuit ID Sub-option” and “Agent Remote ID Sub-option”.
They have the following formats.
The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub-option and 2 identifies this as an Agent
Remote ID sub-option. The next field specifies the length of the field. The Switch takes the Circuit ID string
you manually configure for a VLAN on a port as the highest priority and the Circuit ID string for a port as
the second priority. In addition, the Switch puts the PPPoE client’s MAC address into the Agent Remote
ID Sub-option if you do not specify any user-defined string.
Flexible Circuit ID Syntax with Identifier String and Variables
If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a VLAN on a specific port or for a specific port, the Switch
adds the user-defined identifier string and variables into the Agent Circuit ID Sub-option. The variables
can be the slot ID of the PPPoE client, the port number of the PPPoE client and/or the VLAN ID on the
PPPoE packet.
The identifier-string, slot ID, port number and VLAN ID are separated from each other by a pound key
(#), semi-colon (;), period (.), comma (,), forward slash (/) or space. An Agent Circuit ID Sub-option
example is “Switch/07/0123” and indicates the PPPoE packets come from a PPPoE client which is
connected to the Switch’s port 7 and belong to VLAN 123.
WT-101 Default Circuit ID Syntax
If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a specific VLAN on a port or for a specific port, and disable
the flexible Circuit ID syntax in the PPPoE > Intermediate Agent screen, the Switch automatically
generates a Circuit ID string according to the default Circuit ID syntax which is defined in the DSL Forum
Table 129 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub-option Format: User-defined String
SubOpt Length Value
0x01
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
String
(63 bytes)
Table 130 PPPoE IA Remote ID Sub-option Format
SubOpt Length Value
0x02
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
MAC Address or String
(63 bytes)
Table 131 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub-option Format: Using Identifier String and Variables
SubOpt Length Value
0x01
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
Identifier
String
(53 byte)
delimiter
(1 byte)
Slot ID
(1 byte)
delimiter
(1 byte)
Port No
(2 byte)
delimiter
(1 byte)
VLAN ID
(4
bytes)
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
279
Working Text (WT)-101. The default access node identifier is the host name of the PPPoE intermediate
agent and the eth indicates “Ethernet”.
30.1.2.3 Port State
Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for the PPPoE intermediate agent. This setting is
independent of the trusted/untrusted setting for DHCP snooping or ARP inspection. You can also specify
the agent sub-options (circuit ID and remote ID) that the Switch adds to PADI and PADR packets from
PPPoE clients.
Trusted ports are connected to PPPoE servers.
• If a PADO (PPPoE Active Discovery Offer), PADS (PPPoE Active Discovery Session-confirmation), or
PADT (PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate) packet is sent from a PPPoE server and received on a
trusted port, the Switch forwards it to all other ports.
• If a PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port, the Switch
forwards it to other trusted port(s).
Note: The Switch will drop all PPPoE discovery packets if you enable the PPPoE intermediate
agent and there are no trusted ports.
Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers.
• If a PADI, PADR, or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received on an untrusted port, the
Switch adds a vendor-specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted port(s).
• The Switch discards PADO and PADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but received on an
untrusted port.
30.2 PPPoE Screen
Use this screen to configure the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch.
Click Advanced Appl ication > PPPoE in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. Click Click
Here to go to the Intermediate Agent screen.
Figure 209 Advanced Application > PPPoE Intermediate Agent
Table 132 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub-option Format: Defined in WT-101
SubOpt Length Value
0x01
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
Access
Node
Identifier
(20 byte)
Space
(1
byte)
eth
(3
byte)
Space
(1
byte)
Slot ID
(1
byte)
/
(1
byte)
Port No
(2 byte)
:
(1
byte)
VLAN ID
(4
bytes)
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
280
30.3 PPPoE Intermediate Agent
Use this screen to configure the Switch to give a PPPoE termination server additional subscriber
information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client.
Click Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent in the navigation panel to display the screen
as shown.
Figure 210 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 133 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable the PPPoE intermediate agent globally on the Switch.
access-node-
identifier
Enter up to 20 ASCII characters to identify the PPPoE intermediate agent. Hyphens (-) and
spaces are also allowed. The default is the Switch’s host name.
circuit-id Use this section to configure the Circuit ID field in the PADI and PADR packets.
The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port or for a specific VLAN on a port has priority over
this.
The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port (in the Advanced Application > PPPoE >
Intermediate Agent > Port screen) or for a specific VLAN on a port (in the Advanced Application
> PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN screen) has priority over this. That means, if you also
want to configure PPPoE IA Per-Port or Per-Port Per-VLAN setting, leave the fields here empty
and configure circuit-id and remote-id in the Per-Port or Per-Port Per-VLAN screen.
Active Select this option to have the Switch add the user-defined identifier string and variables
(specified in the option field) to PADI or PADR packets from PPPoE clients.
If you leave this option unselected and do not configure any Circuit ID string on the Switch, the
Switch will use the string specified in the access-node-identifier field.
identifier-
string Specify a string that the Switch adds in the Agent Circuit ID sub-option. You can enter up to 53
ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed.
option Select the variables that you want the Switch to generate and add in the Agent Circuit ID sub-
option. The variable options include sp, sv, pv and spv which indicate combinations of slot-port,
slot-VLAN, port-VLAN and slot-port-VLAN respectively. The Switch enters a zero into the PADI and
PADR packets for the slot value.
delimiter Select a delimiter to separate the identifier-string, slot ID, port number and/or VLAN ID from each
other. You can use a pound key (#), semi-colon (;), period (.), comma (,), forward slash (/) or
space.
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
281
30.3.1 PPPoE IA Per-Port
Use this screen to specify whether individual ports are trusted or untrusted ports and have the Switch
add extra information to PPPoE discovery packets from PPPoE clients on a per-port basis.
Note: The Switch will drop all PPPoE packets if you enable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on
the Switch and there are no trusted ports.
Click the Port link in the Intermediate Agent screen to display the screen as shown.
Figure 211 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 133 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 134 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
282
30.3.2 PPPoE IA Per-Port Per-VLAN
Use this screen to configure PPPoE IA settings that apply to a specific VLAN on a port.
Click the VLAN link in the Intermediate Agent > Port screen to display the screen as shown.
Figure 212 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN
Server Trusted
State
Select whether this port is a trusted port (Trusted) or an untrusted port (Untrusted).
Trusted ports are uplink ports connected to PPPoE servers.
If a PADO (PPPoE Active Discovery Offer), PADS (PPPoE Active Discovery Session-confirmation),
or PADT (PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate) packet is sent from a PPPoE server and received on
a trusted port, the Switch forwards it to all other ports.
If a PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port, the Switch
forwards it to other trusted port(s).
Untrusted ports are downlink ports connected to subscribers.
If a PADI, PADR, or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received on an untrusted port,
the Switch adds a vendor-specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted port(s).
The Switch discards PADO and PADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but received
on an untrusted port.
Circuit-id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID sub-
option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port. Spaces are allowed.
The Circuit ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port (in the Advanced Application > PPPoE
> Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN screen) has the highest priority.
Remote-id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Remote ID sub-
option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port. Spaces are allowed.
If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote-id field for a VLAN on a port, the Switch
automatically uses the PPPoE client’s MAC address.
The Remote ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port (in the Advanced Application >
PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN screen) has the highest priority.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 134 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
283
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
30.3.3 PPPoE IA for VLAN
Use this screen to set whether the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled on a VLAN and whether the
Switch appends the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID to PPPoE discovery packets from a specific VLAN.
Click the VLAN link in the Intermediate Agent screen to display the screen as shown.
Figure 213 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > VLAN
Table 135 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Show Port Enter a port number to show the PPPoE Intermediate Agent settings for the specified VLAN(s) on
the port.
Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to configure in the section below.
Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below.
End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below.
Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below.
Port This field displays the port number specified above.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above. If you configure the *
VLAN, the settings are applied to all VLANs.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a VLAN-by-VLAN basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them.
Circuit-id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID sub-
option for this VLAN on the specified port. Spaces are allowed.
The Circuit ID you configure here has the highest priority.
Remote-id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Remote ID sub-
option for this VLAN on the specified port. Spaces are allowed.
If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote-id field for a specific port, the Switch
automatically uses the PPPoE client’s MAC address.
The Remote ID you configure here has the highest priority.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
284
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 136 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to configure in the section below.
Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below.
End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below.
Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above. If you configure the *
VLAN, the settings are applied to all VLANs.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a VLAN-by-VLAN basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them.
Enabled Select this option to turn on the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on a VLAN.
Circuit-id Select this option to make the Circuit ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect.
Remote-id Select this option to make the Remote ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
285
CHAPTER 31
Error Disable
31.1 Error Disable Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure the rate limit for control packets on a port, and set the Switch
to take an action (such as to shut down a port or stop sending packets) on a port when the Switch
detects a pre-configured error. It also shows you how to configure the Switch to automatically undo the
action after the error is gone.
31.1.1 CPU Protection Overview
Switches exchange protocol control packets in a network to get the latest networking information. If a
switch receives large numbers of control packets, such as ARP, BPDU or IGMP packets, which are to be
processed by the CPU, the CPU may become overloaded and be unable to handle regular tasks
properly.
The CPU protection feature allows you to limit the rate of ARP, BPDU and IGMP packets to be delivered
to the CPU on a port. This enhances the CPU efficiency and protects against potential DoS attacks or
errors from other network(s). You then can choose to drop control packets that exceed the specified
rate limit or disable a port on which the packets are received.
31.1.2 Error-Disable Recovery Overview
Some features, such as loop guard or CPU protection, allow the Switch to shut down a port or discard
specific packets on a port when an error is detected on the port. For example, if the Switch detects that
packets sent out the port(s) loop back to the Switch, the Switch can shut down the port(s)
automatically. After that, you need to enable the port(s) or allow the packets on a port manually via the
web configurator. With error-disable recovery, you can set the disabled port(s) to become active or
start receiving the packets again after the time interval you specify.
31.1.3 What You Can Do
• Use the Errdisable Status screen (Section 31.3 on page 286) to view whether the Switch detected that
control packets exceeded the rate limit configured for a port or a port is disabled according to the
feature requirements and what action you configure, and related information.
• Use the CPU Protection screen (Section 31.4 on page 288) to limit the maximum number of control
packets (ARP, BPDU and/or IGMP) that the Switch can receive or transmit on a port.
• Use the Errdisable Detect screen (Section 31.5 on page 289) to have the Switch detect whether the
control packets exceed the rate limit configured for a port and configure the action to take once the
limit is exceeded.
• Use the Errdisable Recovery screen (Section 31.6 on page 290) to set the Switch to automatically
undo an action after the error is gone.
Chapter 31 Error Disable
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
286
31.2 Error Disable Screen
Use this screen to go to the screens where you can configure error disable related settings. Click
Advanced Application > Errdisable in the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Figure 214 Advanced Application > Errdisable
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
31.3 Error-Disable Status
Use this screen to view whether the Switch detected that control packets exceeded the rate limit
configured for a port or a port is disabled according to the feature requirements and what action you
configure, and related information. Click the Click here link next to Errdisable Status in the Advanced
Application > Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown.
Table 137 Advanced Application > Errdisable
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Errdisable Status Click this link to view whether the Switch detected that control packets exceeded the rate
limit configured for a port or a port is disabled according to the feature requirements and
what action you configure, and related information.
CPU protection Click this link to limit the maximum number of control packets (ARP, BPDU and/or IGMP)
that the Switch can receive or transmit on a port.
Errdisable Detect Click this link to have the Switch detect whether the control packets exceed the rate limit
configured for a port and configure the action to take once the limit is exceeded.
Errdisable Recovery Click this link to set the Switch to automatically undo an action after the error is gone.
Chapter 31 Error Disable
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
287
Figure 215 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 138 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Inactive-reason mode reset
Port List Enter the number of the port(s) (separated by a comma) on which you want to reset inactive-
reason status.
Cause Select the cause of inactive-reason mode you want to reset here.
Reset Press to reset the specified port(s) to handle ARP, BPDU or IGMP packets instead of ignoring
them, if the port(s) is in inactive-reason mode.
Errdisable Status
Port This is the number of the port on which you want to configure Errdisable Status.
Cause This displays the type of the control packet received on the port or the feature enabled on the
port and causing the Switch to take the specified action.
Active This field displays whether the control packets (ARP, BPDU, and/or IGMP) on the port is being
detected or not. It also shows whether loop guard is enabled on the port.
Mode This field shows the action that the Switch takes for the cause.
•inactive-port - The Switch disables the port.
•inactive-reason - The Switch drops all the specified control packets (such as BPDU) on the
port.
•rate-limitation - The Switch drops the additional control packets the port(s) has to handle in
every one second.
Rate This field displays how many control packets this port can receive or transmit per second. It can
be adjusted in CPU Protection. 0 means no rate limit.
Chapter 31 Error Disable
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
288
31.4 CPU Protection Configuration
Use this screen to limit the maximum number of control packets (ARP, BPDU and/or IGMP) that the
Switch can receive or transmit on a port. Click the Click Here link next to CPU protection in the
Advanced Application > Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown.
Note: After you configure this screen, make sure you also enable error detection for the
specific control packets in the Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Dete ct
screen.
Figure 216 Advanced Application > Errdisable > CPU protection
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Status This field displays the errdisable status
•Forwarding: The Switch is forwarding packets. Rate-limitation mode is always in Forwarding
status.
•Err-disable: The Switch disables the port on which the control packets are received
(inactive-port) or drops specified control packets on the port (inactive-reason)
Recovery
Time Left
(secs)
This field displays the time (seconds) left before the port(s) becomes active of Errdisable
Recovery.
Total
Dropped This field displays the total packet number dropped by this port where the packet rate exceeds
the rate of mode rate-limitation.
Table 138 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 139 Advanced Application > Errdisable > CPU protection
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Reason Select the type of control packet you want to configure here.
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
Chapter 31 Error Disable
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
289
31.5 Error-Disable Detect Configuration
Use this screen to have the Switch detect whether the control packets exceed the rate limit configured
for a port and configure the action to take once the limit is exceeded. Click the Click Here link next to
Errdisable Detect link in the Advanced Application > Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown.
Figure 217 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Detect
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Rate Limit (pkt/s) Enter a number from 0 to 256 to specify how many control packets this port can receive or
transmit per second.
0 means no rate limit.
You can configure the action that the Switch takes when the limit is exceeded. See Section 31.5
on page 289 for detailed information.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 139 Advanced Application > Errdisable > CPU protection
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 140 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Detect
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Cause This field displays the types of control packet that may cause CPU overload.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each entry if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them.
Active Select this option to have the Switch detect if the configured rate limit for a specific control
packet is exceeded and take the action selected below.
Mode Select the action that the Switch takes when the number of control packets exceed the rate
limit on a port, set in the Advanced Application > Errdisable > CPU protection screen.
•inactive-port - The Switch disables the port on which the control packets are received.
•inactive-reason - The Switch drops all the specified control packets (such as BPDU) on the
port.
•rate-limitation - The Switch drops the additional control packets the port(s) has to handle in
every one second.
Chapter 31 Error Disable
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
290
31.6 Error-Disable Recovery Configuration
Use this screen to configure the Switch to automatically undo an action after the error is gone. Click the
Click Here link next to Errdisable Recovery in the Advanced Application > Errdisable screen to display
the screen as shown.
Figure 218 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Recovery
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 140 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Detect (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 141 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Recovery
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to turn on the error-disable recovery function on the Switch.
Reason This field displays the supported features that allow the Switch to shut down a port or discard
packets on a port according to the feature requirements and what action you configure.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each entry if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them.
Timer Status Select this option to allow the Switch to wait for the specified time interval to activate a port or
allow specific packets on a port, after the error was gone. Deselect this option to turn off this
rule.
Interval Enter the number of seconds (from 30 to 2592000) for the time interval.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
291
CHAPTER 32
Private VLAN
This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to prevent communications between ports in a
VLAN.
32.1 Private VLAN Overview
Private VLAN allows you to do port isolation within a VLAN in a simple way. You specify which port(s) in a
VLAN is not isolated by adding it to the promiscuous port list. The Switch automatically adds other ports
in this VLAN to the isolated port list and blocks traffic between the isolated ports. A promiscuous port can
communicate with any port in the same VLAN. An isolated port can communicate with the promiscuous
port(s) only.
Note: You can have up to one private VLAN rule for each VLAN.
Figure 219 Private VLAN Example
Note: Make sure you keep at least one port in the promiscuous port list for a VLAN with private
VLAN enabled. Otherwise, this VLAN is blocked from the whole network.
32.2 Configuring Private VLAN
Click Advanced Application > Private VLAN in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Chapter 32 Private VLAN
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
292
Figure 220 Advanced Application > Private VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 142 Advanced Application > Private VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Check this box to enable private VLAN in a VLAN.
Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094. This is the VLAN to which this rule applies.
Promiscuous Ports Enter the number of the port(s) that can communicate with any ports in the same VLAN.
Other ports belonging to this VLAN will be added to the isolation list and can only send and
receive traffic from the port(s) you specify here.
Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the
Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so
use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile
memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the index number of the rule.
Active This shows whether this rule is activated or not.
Name This is the descriptive name for this rule.
VLAN This is the VLAN to which this rule is applied.
Promiscuous Ports This shows the port(s) that can communicate with any ports in the same VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
293
CHAPTER 33
Green Ethernet
This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to reduce the power consumed by switch ports.
33.1 Green Ethernet Overview
Green Ethernet reduces switch port power consumption in the following ways.
IEEE 802.3az Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE)
If EEE is enabled, both sides of a link support EEE and there is no traffic, the port enters Low Power Idle
(LPI) mode. LPI mode turns off some functions of the physical layer (becomes quiet) to save power.
Periodically the port transmits a REFRESH signal to allow the link partner to keep the link alive. When there
is traffic to be sent, a WAKE signal is sent to the link partner to return the link to active mode.
Auto Power Down
Auto Power Down turns off almost all functions of the port’s physical layer functions when the link is
down, so the port only uses power to check for a link up pulse from the link partner. After the link up
pulse is detected, the port wakes up from Auto Power Down and operates normally.
Short Reach
Traditional Ethernet transmits all data with enough power to reach the maximum cable length. Shorter
cables lose less power, so Short Reach saves power by adjusting the transmit power of each port
according to the length of cable attached to that port.
33.2 Configuring Green Ethernet
Click Advanced Application > Green Ethernet in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Note: EEE, Auto Power Down and Short Reach are not supported on an uplink port.
Chapter 33 Green Ethernet
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
294
Figure 221 Advanced Application > Green Ethernet
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 143 Advanced Application > Green Ethernet
LABEL DESCRIPTION
EEE Select this to activate Energy Efficient Ethernet globally.
Auto Power
Down
Select this to activate Auto Power Down globally.
Short Reach Select this to activate Short Reach globally.
Port This field displays the port number. * means all ports.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
EEE Select this to activate Energy Efficient Ethernet on this port.
Auto Power
Down
Select this to activate Auto Power Down on this port.
Short Reach Select this to activate Short Reach on this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
295
CHAPTER 34
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
(LLDP)
34.1 LLDP Overview
The LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) is a layer 2 protocol. It allows a network device to advertise its
identity and capabilities on the local network. It also allows the device to maintain and store information
from adjacent devices which are directly connected to the network device. This helps an administrator
discover network changes and perform necessary network reconfiguration and management. The
device information is encapsulated in the LLDPDUs (LLDP data units) in the form of TLV (Type, Length,
Value). Device information carried in the received LLDPDUs is stored in the standard MIB.
The Switch supports these basic management TLVs.
• End of LLDPDU (mandatory)
•Chassis ID (mandatory)
•Port ID (mandatory)
• Time to Live (mandatory)
• Port Description (optional)
• System Name (optional)
• System Description (optional)
• System Capabilities (optional)
• Management Address (optional)
The Switch also supports the IEEE 802.1 and IEEE 802.3 organizationally-specific TLVs.
IEEE 802.1 specific TLVs:
• Port VLAN ID TLV (optional)
• Port and Protocol VLAN ID TLV (optional)
IEEE 802.3 specific TLVs:
• MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV (optional)
• Power via MDI TLV (optional, For PoE models only)
• Link Aggregation TLV (optional)
• Maximum Frame Size TLV (optional)
The optional TLVs are inserted between the Time To Live TLV and the End of LLDPDU TLV.
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
296
The next figure demonstrates that the network devices Switches and Routers (S and R) transmit and
receive device information via LLDPDU and the network manager can query the information using
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
Figure 222 LLDP Overview
34.2 LLDP-MED Overview
LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices) is an extension to the standard
LLDP developed by the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) TR-41.4 subcommittee which
defines the enhanced discovery capabilities, such as VoIP applications, to enable network
administrators manage their network topology application more efficiently. Unlike the traditional LLDP,
which has some limitations when handling multiple application devices, the LLDP-MED offers display of
accurate physical topology, interoperability of devices, and easy trouble shooting for misconfigured IP
addresses. There are three classes of endpoint devices that the LLDP-MED supports:
Class I: IP Communications Controllers or other communication related servers
Class II: Voice Gateways, Conference Bridges or Media Servers
Class III: IP-Phones, PC-based Softphones, End user Communication Appliances supporting IP Media
The following figure shows that with the LLDP-MED, network connectivity devices (NCD) like Switches
and Routers will transmit LLDP TLV to endpoint device (ED) like IP Phone first (1), to get its device type
and capabilities information, then it will receive that information in LLDP-MED TLV back from endpoint
devices (2), after that the network connectivity devices will transmit LLDP-MED TLV (3) to provision the
endpoint device to such that the endpoint device’s network policy and location identification
information is updated. Since LLDPDU updates status and configuration information periodically,
network managers may check the result of provision via remote status. The remote status is updated by
receiving LLDP-MED TLVs from endpoint devices.
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
297
Figure 223 LLDP-MED Overview
34.3 LLDP Screens
Click Advanced Application > LLDP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 224 Advanced Application > LLDP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 144 Advanced Application > LLDP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LLDP
LLDP Local
Status Click here to show a screen with the Switch’s LLDP information.
LLDP Remote
Status Click here to show a screen with LLDP information from the neighboring devices.
LLDP
Configuration Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP parameters.
LLDP-MED
LLDP-MED
Configuration Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media
Endpoint Devices) parameters.
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
298
34.4 LLDP Local Status
This screen displays a summary of LLDP status on this Switch. Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP
Local Status to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 225 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status
LLDP-MED
Network Policy Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media
Endpoint Devices) network policy parameters.
LLDP-MED
Location Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media
Endpoint Devices) location parameters.
Table 144 Advanced Application > LLDP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
299
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
34.4.1 LLDP Local Port Status Detail
This screen displays detailed LLDP status for each port on this Switch. Click Advanced Application > LLDP
> LLDP Local Status and then, click a port number, for example 1 in the local port column to display the
screen as shown next.
Table 145 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Basic TLV
Chassis ID TLV This displays the chassis ID of the local Switch, that is the Switch you’re configuring. The
chassis ID is identified by the chassis ID subtype.
Chassis ID Subtype - this displays how the chassis of the Switch is identified.
Chassis ID - This displays the chassis ID of the local Switch.
System Name
TLV This shows the host name of the Switch.
System
Description TLV This shows the firmware version of the Switch.
System
Capabilities TLV This shows the System Capabilities enabled and supported on the local Switch.
•System Capabilities Supported - Bridge
•System Capabilities Enabled - Bridge
Management
Address TLV The Management Address TLV identifies an address associated with the local LLDP agent
that may be used to reach higher layer entities to assist discovery by network management.
The TLV may also include the system interface number and an object identifier (OID) that are
associated with this management address
This field displays the Management Address settings on the specified port(s).
•Management Address Subtype - ipv4 / all-802
•Interface Number Subtype - unknown
•Interface Number - 0 (not supported)
•Object Identifier - 0 (not supported)
LLDP Port
Information
This displays the local port information.
Local Port This displays the number of the Switch port which receives the LLDPDU from the remote
device. Click a port number to view the detailed LLDP status on this port at LLDP Local Port
Status Detail screen.
Port ID Subtype This indicates how the port ID field is identified.
Port ID This is an alpha-numeric string that contains the specific identifier for the port from which this
LLDPDU was transmitted.
Port Description This shows the port description that the Switch will advertise from this port.
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
300
Figure 226 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status > LLDP Local Port Status Detail
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
301
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 146 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status > LLDP Local Port Status Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Basic TLV These are the Basic TLV flags
Port ID TLV The port ID TLV identifies the specific port that transmitted the LLDP frame.
•Port ID Subtype: This shows how the port is identified.
•Port ID: This is the ID of the port.
Port Description
TLV This displays the local port description.
Dot1 TLV
Port VLAN ID
TLV This displays the VLAN ID sent by the IEEE 802.1 Port VLAN ID TLV.
Port-Protocol
VLAN ID TLV This displays the IEEE 802.1 Port Protocol VLAN ID TLVs, which indicates whether the VLAN is
enabled and supported.
Dot3 TLV
MAC PHY
Configuration &
Status TLV
The MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV advertises the bit-rate and duplex capability of the
sending 802.3 node. It also advertises the current duplex and bit-rating of the sending node.
Lastly, it advertises whether these setting were the result of auto-negotiation during link
initiation or manual override.
•AN Supported - Displays if the port supports or does not support auto-negotiation.
•AN Enabled - The current auto-negotiation status of the port.
•AN Advertised Capability - The auto-negotiation capabilities of the port.
•Oper MAU Type - The current Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type of the port
Link
Aggregation
TLV
The Link Aggregation TLV indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated,
whether the link is currently in an aggregation, and if in an aggregation, the port
identification of the aggregation.
• Aggregation Capability — The current aggregation capability of the port.
• Aggregation Status — The current aggregation status of the port.
• Aggregation Port ID — The aggregation ID of the current port.
Max Frame Size
TLV This displays the maximum supported frame size in octets.
MED TLV LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (MED) is an extension of LLDP that provides additional
capabilities to support media endpoint devices. MED enables advertisement and discovery
of network policies, device location discovery to allow creation of location databases, and
information for troubleshooting.
Capabilities TLV This field displays which LLDP-MED TLV are capable to transmit on the Switch.
• Network Policy
• Location
• Extend Power via MDI PSE
• Extend Power via MDI PD
• Inventory Management
Device Type
TLV This is the LLDP-MED device class. The Zyxel Switch device type is:
• Network Connectivity
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
302
34.5 LLDP Remote Status
This screen displays a summary of LLDP status for each LLDP connection to a neighboring Switch. Click
Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status (Click Here) to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 227 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Network Policy
TLV This displays a network policy for the specified application.
•Voice
• Voice-Signaling
•Guest-Voice
• Guest-Voice-Signaling
• Softphone-Voice
• Video-Conferencing
•Streaming-Video
• Video-Signaling
Location
Identification
TLV
This shows the location information of a caller by its ELIN (Emergency Location Identifier
Number) or the IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information (Civic
Address LCI).
•Coordinate-based LCI - latitude, longitude and altitude coordinates of the location
Configuration Information (LCI)
•Civic LCI - IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information
•ELIN - (Emergency Location Identifier Number)
Table 146 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status > LLDP Local Port Status Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 147 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index The index number shows the number of remote devices that are connected to the Switch.
Click on an index number to view the detailed LLDP status for this remote device in the LLDP
Remote Port Status Detail screen.
Local Port This is the number of the Switch’s port that received LLDPDU from the remote device.
Chassis ID This displays the chassis ID of the remote device associated with the transmitting LLDP agent.
The chassis ID is identified by the chassis ID subtype. For example, the MAC address of the
remote device.
Port ID This is an alpha-numeric string that contains the specific identifier for the port from which this
LLDPDU was transmitted. The port ID is identified by the port ID subtype.
Port Description This displays a description for the port from which this LLDPDU was transmitted.
System Name This displays the system name of the remote device.
Management
Address
This displays the management address of the remote device. It could be the MAC address or
IP address.
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
303
34.5.1 LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
This screen displays detailed LLDP status of the remote device connected to the Switch. Click Advanced
Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status (Click Here) and then click an index number, for example 1, in
the Index column in the LLDP Remote Status screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 228 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail (Basic
TLV)
The following table describes the labels in Basic TLV part of the screen.
Table 148 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail (Basic
TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local Port This displays the number of the Switch’s port to which the remote device is connected.
Basic TLV
Chassis ID TLV • Chassis ID Subtype - this displays how the chassis of the remote device is identified.
•Chassis ID - this displays the chassis ID of the remote device. The chassis ID is identified by
the chassis ID subtype.
Port ID TLV • Port ID Subtype - this displays how the port of the remote device is identified.
•Port ID - this displays the port ID of the remote device. The port ID is identified by the port
ID subtype.
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
304
Time To Live TLV This displays the time-to-live (TTL) multiplier of LLDP frames. The device information on the
neighboring devices ages out and is discarded when its corresponding TTL expires. The TTL
value is to multiply the TTL multiplier by the LLDP frames transmitting interval.
Port Description
TLV This displays the remote port description.
System Name
TLV This displays the system name of the remote device.
System
Description TLV This displays the system description of the remote device.
System
Capabilities TLV This displays whether the system capabilities are enabled and supported on the remote
device.
• System Capabilities Supported
• System Capabilities Enabled
Management
Address TLV This displays the following management address parameters of the remote device.
• Management Address Subtype
• Management Address
• Interface Number Subtype
• Interface Number
• Object Identifier
Port-Protocol
VALN ID TLV This displays the IEEE 802.1 Port Protocol VLAN ID TLV, which indicates whether the VLAN is
enabled and supported.
Table 148 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail (Basic
TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
305
Figure 229 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail> (Dot
1 and Dot3 TLV)
The following table describes the labels in the Dot1 and Dot3 parts of the screen.
Table 149 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail (Dot1
and Dot3 TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Dot1 TLV
Port VLAN ID
TLV This displays the VLAN ID of this port on the remote device.
Port-Protocol
VLAN ID TLV This displays the IEEE 802.1 Port Protocol VLAN ID TLV, which indicates whether the VLAN ID
and whether it is enabled and supported on the port of remote Switch which sent the
LLDPDU.
• Port-Protocol VLAN ID
• Port-Protocol VLAN ID Supported
• Port-Protocol VLAN ID Enabled
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
306
Vlan Name TLV This shows the VLAN ID and name for remote device port.
•VLAN ID
• VLAN Name
Protocol
Identity TLV The Protocol Identity TLV allows the Switch to advertise the particular protocols that are
accessible through its port.
Dot3 TLV
MAC PHY
Configuration &
Status TLV
The MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV advertises the bit-rate and duplex capability of the
sending 802.3 node. It also advertises the current duplex and bit-rating of the sending node.
Lastly, it advertises whether these setting were the result of auto-negotiation during link
initiation or manual override.
•AN Supported - Displays if the port supports or does not support auto-negotiation.
•AN Enabled - The current auto-negotiation status of the port.
•AN Advertised Capability - The auto-negotiation capabilities of the port.
•Oper MAU Type - The current Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type of the port
Link
Aggregation
TLV
The Link Aggregation TLV indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated,
whether the link is currently in an aggregation, and if in an aggregation, the port
identification of the aggregation.
•Aggregation Capability — The current aggregation capability of the port.
•Aggregation Status — The current aggregation status of the port.
•Aggregation Port ID — The aggregation ID of the current port.
Power Via MDI
TLV The Power Via MDI TLV allows PoE devices to advertise and discover the MDI power support
capabilities of the sending port on the remote device.
•Port Class
• MDI Supported
• MDI Enabled
• Pair Controllable
• PSE Power Pairs
•Power Class
Max Frame Size
TLV This displays the maximum supported frame size in octets.
Table 149 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail (Dot1
and Dot3 TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
307
Figure 230 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail (MED
TLV)
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
308
The following table describes the labels in the MED TLV part of the screen.
Table 150 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail (MED
TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MED TLV LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (MED) is an extension of LLDP that provides additional
capabilities to support media endpoint devices. MED enables advertisement and discovery
of network policies, device location discovery to allow creation of location databases, and
information for troubleshooting.
Capabilities TLV This displays the MED capabilities the remote port supports.
• Network Policy
• Location
• Extend Power via MDI PSE
• Extend Power via MDI PD
• Inventory Management
Device Type
TLV LLDP-MED endpoint device classes:
• Endpoint Class I
• Endpoint Class II
• Endpoint Class III
• Network Connectivity
Network Policy
TLV This displays a network policy for the specified application.
•Voice
• Voice-Signaling
•Guest-Voice
• Guest-Voice-Signaling
• Softphone-Voice
• Video-Conferencing
•Streaming-Video
• Video-Signaling
Location
Identification
TLV
This shows the location information of a caller by its:
•Coordinate-base LCI - latitude and longitude coordinates of the Location Configuration
Information (LCI)
•Civic LCI - IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information
•ELIN - (Emergency Location Identifier Number)
Inventory TLV The majority of IP Phones lack support of management protocols such as SNMP, so LLDP-MED
inventory TLVs are used to provide their inventory information to the Network Connectivity
Devices such as the Switch. The Inventory TLV may contain the following information.
• Hardware Revision
• Software Revision
•Firmware Revision
• Model Name
• Manufacturer
• Serial Number
•Asset ID
Extended
Power via MDI
TLV
Extended Power Via MDI Discovery enables detailed power information to be advertised by
Media Endpoints, such as IP phones and Network Connectivity Devices such as the Switch.
•Power Type - whether it is currently operating from primary power or is on backup power
(backup power may indicate to the Endpoint Device that it should move to a power
conservation mode).
•Power Source - whether or not the Endpoint is currently operating from an external power
source.
•Power Priority - the Endpoint Device’s power priority (which the Network Connectivity
Device may use to prioritize which devices will remain in service during power shortages)
•Power Value - power requirement, in fractions of Watts, in current configuration
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
309
34.6 LLDP Configuration
Use this screen to configure global LLDP settings on the Switch. Click Advanced Application > LLDP >
LLDP Configuration (Click Here) to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 231 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 151 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select to enable LLDP on the Switch. It is enabled by default.
Transmit Interval Enter how many seconds the Switch waits before sending LLDP packets.
Transmit Hold Enter the time-to-live (TTL) multiplier of LLDP frames. The device information on the
neighboring devices ages out and is discarded when its corresponding TTL expires. The TTL
value is to multiply the TTL multiplier by the LLDP packets transmitting interval.
Transmit Delay Enter the delay (in seconds) between successive LLDPDU transmissions initiated by value or
status changes in the Switch MIB.
Reinitialize Delay Enter the number of seconds for LLDP to wait before initializing on a port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Port This displays the Switch’s port number. * means all ports.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
310
34.6.1 Basic TLV Setting
Use this screen to configure Basic TLV settings. Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration
(Click Here) > Basic TLV Setting to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 232 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Basic TLV Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Admin Status Select whether LLDP transmission and/or reception is allowed on this port.
• Disable - not allowed
• Tx-Only - transmit only
• Rx-Only - receive only
• Tx-Rx - transmit and receive
Notification Select whether LLDP notification is enabled on this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 151 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 152 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Basic TLV Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This displays the Switch’s port number. * means all ports.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Management
Address
Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of Management Address TLVs on
the port(s).
Port Description Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of Port Description TLVs on the
port(s).
System Capabilities Select the check box(es) to enable or to disable the sending of System Capabilities TLVs on
the port(s).
System Description Select the check box(es) to enable or to disable the sending of System Description TLVs on
the port(s).
System Name Select the check box(es) to enable or to disable the sending of System Name TLVs on the
port(s).
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
311
34.6.2 Org-specific TLV Setting
Use this screen to configure organization-specific TLV settings. Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP
Configuration (Click Here) > Org-specific TLV Setting to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 233 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration> Org-specific TLV Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 152 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Basic TLV Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 153 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Org-specific TLV Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This displays the Switch’s port number. * means all ports.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Dot1 TLV
Port- Protocol
VLAN ID Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.1 Port and Protocol
VLAN ID TLVs on the port(s).
Port VLAN ID Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.1 Port VLAN ID TLVs on
the port(s). All check boxes in this column are enabled by default.
Link
Aggregation Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation TLVs
on the port(s).
Dot3 TLV
MAC/PHY Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.3 MAC/PHY
Configuration/Status TLVs on the port(s). All check boxes in this column are enabled by
default.
Max Frame Size Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.3 Max Frame Size TLVs
on the port(s).
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
312
34.7 LLDP-MED Configuration
Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Configuration to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 234 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 153 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Org-specific TLV Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 154 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This displays the Switch’s port number. Select * to configure all ports simultaneously.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Notification
Topology
Change Select to enable LLDP-MED topology change traps on this port.
MED TLV Setting
Location Select to enable transmitting LLDP-MED location TLV.
Network Policy Select to enable transmitting LLDP-MED Network Policy TLV.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
313
34.8 LLDP-MED Network Policy
Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy (Click Here) to display the screen as
shown next.
Figure 235 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 155 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Enter the port number to set up the LLDP-MED network policy.
Application Type Select the type of application used in the network policy.
• voice
• voice-signaling
•guest-voice
• guest-voice-signaling
• softphone-voice
• video-conferencing
• streaming-video
• video-signaling
Tag Select to tag or untag in the network policy.
• tagged
• untagged
VLAN Enter the VLAN ID number. It should be from 1 to 4094. For priority tagged frames, enter “0”.
DSCP Enter the DSCP value of the network policy. The value is defined from 0 through 63 with the 0
representing use of the default DSCP value.
Priority Enter the priority value for the network policy.
Add Click Add after finish entering the network policy information. A summary table will list all the
Switch you’ve added.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin entering the information afresh.
Index This field displays the of index number of the network policy. Click an index number to edit
the rule.
Port This field displays the port number of the network policy.
Application Type This field displays the application type of the network policy.
Tag This field displays the Tag Status of the network policy.
VLAN This field displays the VLANID of the network policy.
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
314
34.9 LLDP-MED Location
Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location (Click Here) to display the screen as shown
next.
Figure 236 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location
Priority This field displays the priority value of the network policy.
DSCP This field displays the DSCP value of the network policy.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rules that you want to remove, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes.
Table 155 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
315
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 156 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Enter the port number you want to set up the location within the LLDP-MED network.
Location
Coordinates
The LLDP-MED uses geographical coordinates and Civic Address to set the location
information of the remote device. Geographical based coordinates includes latitude,
longitude, altitude and datum. Civic Address includes Country, State, County, City, Street
and other related information.
Latitude Enter the latitude information. The value should be from 0º to 90º. The negative value
represents the South.
•north
•south
Longitude Enter the longitude information. The value should be from 0º to 180º. The negative value
represents the West.
•west
•east
Altitude Enter the altitude information. The value should be from -2097151 to 2097151 in meters or in
floors.
•meters
•floor
Datum Select the appropriate geodetic datum used by GPS.
•WGS84
• NAD83-NAVD88
• NAD83-MLLW
Civic Address Enter the Civic Address by providing information such as Country, State, County, City, Street,
Number, ZIP code and other additional information. Enter at least two field in this
configuration including the Country. The valid length of the Country field is 2 characters and
all other fields are up to 32 characters.
• Country
• State
• County
• City
• Division
• Neighbor
• Street
• Leading-Street-Direction
• Street-Suffix
• Trailing-Street-Suffix
•House-Number
• House-Number-Suffix
• Landmark
• Additional-Location
•Name
•Zip-Code
• Building
•Unit
• Floor
• Room-Number
• Place-Type
• Postal-Community-Name
• Post-Office-Box
• Additional-Code
Chapter 34 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
316
ELIN Number Enter a numerical digit string, corresponding to the ELIN identifier which is used during
emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk-based PSAP. The valid length is
from 10 to 25 characters.
Add Click Add after finish entering the location information.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin entering the location information afresh.
Index This lists the index number of the location configuration. Click an index number to view or edit
the location.
Port This lists the port number of the location configuration.
Location
Coordinates
This field displays the location configuration information based on geographical coordinates
that includes longitude, latitude, altitude and datum.
Civic Address This field displays the Civic Address for the remote device using information such as Country,
State, County, City, Street, Number, ZIP code and additional information.
ELIN Number This field shows the Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN), which is used to
identify endpoint devices when they issue emergency call services. The valid length is form
10 to 25 characters.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the locations that you want to remove, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes.
Table 156 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
317
CHAPTER 35
Anti-Arpscan
35.1 Anti-Arpscan Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), RFC 826, is a protocol used to convert a network-layer IP address to a
link-layer MAC address. ARP scan is used to scan the network of a certain interface for alive hosts. It
shows the IP address and MAC addresses of all hosts found. Hackers could use ARP scan to find targets
in your network. Anti-arpscan is used to detect unusual ARP scan activity and block suspicious hosts or
ports.
Unusual ARP scan activity is determined by port and host thresholds that you set. A port threshold is
determined by the number of packets received per second on the port. If the received packet rate is
over the threshold, then the port is put into an Err-Disable state. You can recover the normal state of the
port manually if this happens and after you identify the cause of the problem.
A host threshold is determined by the number of ARP-request packets received per second. There is a
global threshold rate for all hosts. If the rate of a host is over the threshold, then that host is blocked by
using a MAC address filter. A blocked host is released automatically after the MAC aging time expires.
Note: A port-based threshold must be larger than the host-based threshold or the host-based
threshold will not work.
35.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Anti-Arpscan Status screen (Section 35.2 on page 318) to see what ports are trusted and are
forwarding traffic or are disabled.
• Use the Anti-Arpscan Host Status screen (Section 35.3 on page 318) to view blocked hosts and clear
selected ones.
• Use the Anti-Arpscan Trust Host screen (Section 35.4 on page 319) to create or remove trusted hosts
identified by IP address and subnet mask. Anti-arpscan is not performed on trusted hosts.
• Use this Anti-Arpscan Configure screen (Section 35.5 on page 320) to enable anti-arpscan, set port
and host thresholds as well as configure ports to be trusted or untrusted.
35.1.2 What You Need to Know
• You should set an uplink port as a trusted port before enabling Anti-arpscan so as to prevent the port
from being shutdown due to receiving too many ARP messages.
• When a port is configured as a trusted port, Anti-arpscan is not performed on the port. Both host and
port thresholds are ignored for trusted ports. If the received ARP packet rate on a port or the received
ARP-requests from a host exceed the thresholds, the trusted port will not be closed.
• If a port on the Switch is closed by Anti-arpscan, and you want to recover it, then do one of the
following:
•Go to Basic Setting > Port Setup. Clear Active and click Apply. Then select Active and click Apply
again.
Chapter 35 Anti-Arpscan
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
318
•Go to Application > Errdiable > Errdisable Recovery and set the interval for Anti-arpscan. After the
interval expires, the closed port(s) will become active and start receiving packets again.
• Use the command port no inactive.
• Refer to the port logs to see when a port was closed.
35.2 Anti-Arpscan Status
Use this screen to see what ports are trusted and are forwarding traffic or are disabled. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan.
Figure 237 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan Status
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
35.3 Anti-Arpscan Host Status
Use this screen to view blocked hosts and unblock ones connected to certain ports. To open this screen,
click Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Host Status.
Table 157 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Anti-Arpscan is.... This shows whether Anti-arpscan is enabled or disabled on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number of the Switch.
Trusted This field displays whether the port is trusted or untrusted. Anti-arpscan is not performed on
a trusted port.
State This field displays whether the port can forward traffic normally (Forwarding) or is disabled
(Err-Disable).
Chapter 35 Anti-Arpscan
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
319
Figure 238 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Host Status
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
35.4 Anti-Arpscan Trust Host
Use this screen to create or remove trusted hosts identified by IP address and subnet mask. Anti-arpscan
is not performed on trusted hosts. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > Anti-Arps can > Trust
Host.
Figure 239 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Trust Host
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 158 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Host Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clear Filtered host: A filtered host is a blocked IP address.
Port List Type a port number or a series of port numbers separated by commas and spaces, and
then click Clear to unblock all hosts connected to these ports.
Filtered host: This table lists information on blocked hosts.
Index This displays the index number of an IP address (a host) that has been blocked.
Host IP This displays the IP address of the blocked host.
MAC This displays the MAC address of the blocked host.
VLAN This displays the VLAN ID that shows which VLAN the blocked host is in.
Port This displays the port number to which the blocked host is connected.
State This shows Err-Disable if the ARP-request rate from this host is over the threshold. Forwarding
hosts are not displayed.
Table 159 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Trust Host
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Type a descriptive name of up to 32 printable ASCII characters to identify this host.
Host IP Type the IP address of the host.
Chapter 35 Anti-Arpscan
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
320
35.5 Anti-Arpscan Configure
Use this screen to enable Anti-Arpscan, set port and host thresholds as well as configure ports to be
trusted or untrusted. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Configure.
Figure 240 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Configure
Mask A trusted host may consist of a subnet of IP addresses. Type a subnet mask to create a
single host or a subnet of hosts.
Add Click this to create the trusted host.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based or, if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each trusted host.
Name This field displays the name of the trusted host.
Host IP This field displays the IP address of the trusted host.
Mask This field displays the subnet mask of the trusted host.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select an entry checkbox and click Delete to remove the specified entry.
Cancel Click this to clear the check boxes above.
Table 159 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Trust Host
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 35 Anti-Arpscan
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
321
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 160 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Configure
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable Anti-arpscan on the Switch.
Port Threshold A port threshold is determined by the number of packets received per second on the port.
If the received packet rate is over the threshold, then the port is put into an Err-Disable
state. Type the maximum number of packets per second allowed on the port before it is
blocked.
Note: The allowed range is 2 to 255 packets received per second.
Host Threshold A host threshold is determined by the number of ARP-request packets received per
second. This is the global threshold rate for all hosts. If the rate of a host is over the
threshold, then that host is blocked by using a MAC address filter. A blocked host is
released automatically after the MAC aging time expires.
Type the maximum number of ARP-request packets allowed by a host before it is blocked.
Note: The allowed range is 2 to 100 ARP-request packets per second.
Note: The port-based threshold must be larger than the host-based threshold or
the host-based threshold will not be applied.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to
set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Trusted State Select Untrusted or Trusted for the associated port. Anti-arpscan is not performed on
trusted hosts.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
322
CHAPTER 36
BPDU Guard
36.1 BPDU Guard Overview
A BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) is a data frame that contains information about STP. STP-aware
switches exchange BPDUs periodically.
The BPDU guard feature allows you to prevent any new STP-aware switch from connecting to an existing
network and causing STP topology changes in the network. If there is any BPDU detected on the port(s)
on which BPDU guard is enabled, the Switch disables the port(s) automatically. You can then enable the
port(s) manually in the Basic Setting > Port Setup screen (Section 8.7 on page 88) or use the Errdisable
Recovery screen (see Section 31.6 on page 290) to have the port(s) become active after a certain time
interval.
36.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the BPDU Guard Status screen (Section 36.2 on page 322) to view the BPDU guard status.
• Use the BPDU Guard Configuration screen (Section 36.3 on page 323) to enable BPDU guard on the
Switch.
36.2 BPDU Guard Status
Use this screen to view whether BPDU guard is enabled on the Switch and the port status. Click
Advanced Application > BPDU Guard in the navigation panel.
Figure 241 Advanced Application > BPDU Guard Status
Chapter 36 BPDU Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
323
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
36.3 BPDU Guard Configuration
Use this screen to turn on the BPDU guard feature on the Switch and port(s).
In the BPDU Guard Status screen click Configuration to display the configuration screen as shown.
Figure 242 Advanced Application > BPDU Guard > BPDU Guard Configuration
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 161 Advanced Application > BPDU Guard Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
BPDU guard globally
configuration
This field displays whether BPDU guard is activated on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
Active This shows whether BPDU guard is activated on the port.
Status This shows whether the port is shut down (Err-disable) or able to transmit packets
(Forwarding).
Table 162 Advanced Application > BPDU Guard > BPDU Guard Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable BPDU guard on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
Chapter 36 BPDU Guard
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
324
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable the BPDU guard feature on this port. The Switch shuts down this
port if there is any BPDU received on the port.
Clear this check box to disable the BPDU guard feature.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 162 Advanced Application > BPDU Guard > BPDU Guard Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
325
CHAPTER 37
OAM
37.1 OAM Overview
Link layer Ethernet OAM (Operations, Administration and Maintenance) as described in IEEE 802.3ah is a
link monitoring protocol. It utilizes OAM Protocol Data Units or OAM PDUs to transmit link status
information between directly connected Ethernet devices. Both devices must support IEEE 802.3ah.
Because link layer Ethernet OAM operates at layer two of the OSI (Open Systems Interconnection Basic
Reference) model, neither IP or SNMP are necessary to monitor or troubleshoot network connection
problems.
The Switch supports the following IEEE 802.3ah features:
• Discovery - this identifies the devices on each end of the Ethernet link and their OAM configuration.
• Remote Loopback - this can initiate a loopback test between Ethernet devices.
37.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the OAM Status screen (Section 37.2 on page 325) to view the configuration of ports on which
Ethernet OAM is enabled.
• Use the OAM Configuration screen (Section 37.3 on page 329) to enable Ethernet OAM on the Switch.
• Use the OAM Remote Loopback screen (Section 37.4 on page 331) to perform remote-loopback tests.
37.2 OAM Status
Use this screen to view the configuration of ports on which Ethernet OAM is enabled. Click Advanced
Application > OAM in the navigation panel.
Chapter 37 OAM
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
326
Figure 243 Advanced Application > OAM Status
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
37.2.1 OAM Details
Use this screen to view OAM configuration details and operational status of a specific port. Click a
number in the Port column in the OAM Status screen to display the screen as shown next.
Table 163 Advanced Application > OAM Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local
This section displays information about the ports on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
Mode This field displays the operational state of the port when OAM is enabled on the port.
Active - Allows the port to issue and respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Passive - Allows the port to respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Remote
This section displays information about the remote device.
Mac Address This field displays the MAC address of the remote device.
OUI This field displays the OUI (first three bytes of the MAC address) of the remote device.
Mode This field displays the operational state of the port when OAM is enabled on the port.
Active - Allows the port to issue and respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Passive - Allows the port to respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Config This field displays the capabilities of the Switch and remote device.
Chapter 37 OAM
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
327
Figure 244 Advanced Application > OAM Status > OAM Details
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 164 Advanced Application > OAM Status > OAM Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Discovery This section displays OAM configuration details and operational status of the port on the
Switch and/or the remote device.
Local Client/Remote Client
OAM configurations
Mode This field displays the OAM mode. The device in active mode (typically the service
provider's device) controls the device in passive mode (typically the subscriber's device).
Active: The port initiates OAM discovery; sends information PDUs; and may send event
notification PDUs, variable request/response PDUs, or loopback control PDUs.
Passive: The port waits for the remote device to initiate OAM discovery; sends information
PDUs; may send event notification PDUs; and may respond to variable request PDUs or
loopback control PDUs.
The Switch might not support some types of PDUs, as indicated in the fields below.
Unidirectional This field indicates whether or not the port can send information PDUs to transmit fault
information when the receive path is non-operational.
Remote loopback This field indicates whether or not the port can use loopback control PDUs to put the
remote device into loopback mode.
Chapter 37 OAM
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
328
Link events This field indicates whether or not the port can interpret link events, such as link fault and
dying gasp. Link events are sent in event notification PDUs and indicate when the number
of errors in a given interval (time, number of frames, number of symbols, or number of
errored frame seconds) exceeds a specified threshold. Organizations may create
organization-specific link event TLVs as well.
Variable retrieval This field indicates whether or not the port can respond to requests for more information,
such as requests for Ethernet counters and statistics, about link events.
Max. OAMPDU
size This field displays the maximum size of PDU for receipt and delivery.
Local Client/Remote Client
Operational status
Link status This field indicates that the link between the Switch port and a connected IEEE 802.3ah-
enabled remote Ethernet device is up or down.
Info. revision This field displays the current version of local state and configuration. This two-octet value
starts at zero and increments every time the local state or configuration changes.
Parser state This field indicates the current state of the parser.
Forward: The port is forwarding packets normally.
Loopback: The port is in loopback mode.
Discard: The port is discarding non-OAM PDUs because it is trying to or has put the remote
device into loopback mode.
Discovery
state This field indicates the state in the OAM discovery process. OAM-enabled devices use this
process to detect each other and to exchange information about their OAM
configuration and capabilities. OAM discovery is a handshake protocol.
Fault: One of the devices is transmitting OAM PDUs with link fault information, or the
interface is not operational.
Active Send Local: The port is in active mode and is trying to see if the remote device
supports OAM.
Passive Wait: The port is in passive mode and is waiting for the remote device to begin
OAM discovery.
Send Local Remote: This state occurs in the following circumstances.
• The port has discovered the remote device but has not accepted or rejected the
connection yet.
• The port has discovered the remote device and rejected the connection.
Send Local Remote OK: The port has discovered the remote device and has accepted the
connection. In addition, the remote device has not accepted or rejected the connection
yet, or the remote device has rejected the connected.
Send Any: The port and the remote device have accepted the connection. This is the
operating state for OAM links that are fully operational.
Remote Client
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the IEEE 802.3ah-enabled remote Ethernet device
that is connected to the Switch.
Vendor(oui) This field displays the Organizationally Unique Identifiers (OUI) representing the vendor of
the IEEE 802.3ah-enabled remote Ethernet device that is connected to the Switch.
Statistics
This section displays the number of OAM packets transferred on the port of the Switch.
Information OAMPDU
Tx
This field displays the number of OAM PDUs sent on the port.
Table 164 Advanced Application > OAM Status > OAM Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 37 OAM
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
329
37.3 OAM Configuration
Use this screen to turn on Ethernet OAM on the Switch and port(s) and configure the related settings.
In the OAM Status screen click Configuration to display the configuration screen as shown.
Information OAMPDU
Rx
This field displays the number of OAM PDUs received on the port.
Event Notification
OAMPDU Tx
This field displays the number of unique or duplicate OAM event notification PDUs sent on
the port.
Event Notification
OAMPDU Rx
This field displays the number of unique or duplicate OAM event notification PDUs received
on the port.
Loopback Control
OAMPDU Tx
This field displays the number of loopback control OAM PDUs sent on the port.
Loopback Control
OAMPDU Rx
This field displays the number of loopback control OAM PDUs received on the port.
Variable Request
OAMPDU Tx
This field displays the number of OAM PDUs sent to request MIB objects on the remote
device.
Variable Request
OAMPDU Rx
This field displays the number of OAM PDUs received requesting MIB objects on the Switch.
Variable Response
OAMPDU Tx
This field displays the number of OAM PDUs sent by the Switch in response to requests.
Variable Response
OAMPDU Rx
This field displays the number of OAM PDUs sent by the remote device in response to
requests.
Unsupported
OAMPDU Tx
This field displays the number of unsupported OAM PDUs sent on the port.
Unsupported
OAMPDU Rx
This field displays the number of unsupported OAM PDUs received on the port.
Table 164 Advanced Application > OAM Status > OAM Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 37 OAM
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
330
Figure 245 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Configuration
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 165 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable Ethernet OAM on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to
set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable Ethernet OAM on this port.
Clear this check box to disable Ethernet OAM on the port.
Mode Specify the OAM mode on the port.
Select Active to allow the port to issue and respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Select Passive to allow the port to respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Remote Loopback
Supported
Select this check box to enable the remote loopback feature on the port. Otherwise, clear
the check box to disable it.
Remote Loopback
Ignore-Rx
Select this check box to set the Switch to process loopback commands received on the
port. Otherwise, clear the check box to have the Switch ignore loopback commands
received on the port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 37 OAM
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
331
37.4 OAM Remote Loopback
Use this screen to perform a remote-loopback test. In the OAM Status screen click Remote Loopback to
display the screen as shown.
Figure 246 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Remote Loopback
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 166 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Remote Loopback
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Remote Loopback Test
Port Enter the number of the port from which the Switch performs a remote-loopback test.
Number of
Packet Define the allowable packet number of the loopback test frames.
Packet Size Define the allowable packet size of the loopback test frames.
Test Click Test to begin the test.
Remote Loopback Mode
Port Enter the number of the port from which the Switch sends loopback control PDUs to initiate
or terminate a remote-loopback test.
Start Click Start to initiate a remote-loopback test from the specified port by sending Enable
Loopback Control PDUs to the remote device.
Stop Click Stop to terminate a remote-loopback test from the specified port by sending Disable
Loopback Control PDUs to the remote device.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
332
CHAPTER 38
ZULD
38.1 ZULD Overview
A unidirectional link is a connection where the link is up on both ends, but only one end can receive
packets. This may happen if OAM was initially enabled but then disabled, there are misconfigured
transmitting or receiving lines or the hardware is malfunctioning. Zyxel Unidirectional Link Detection
(ZULD) is a layer-2 protocol that can detect and disable these physical one-way links before they cause
loops or communication malfunction.
In the figure below, S1 - A is a bidirectional link as both ends can send packets to each other. S1-B is
unidirectional as B cannot send packets to S1 (although the S1-B link is up). Similarly, S2-S1 is
unidirectional as S1 cannot send packets to S2 (although the S1-S2 link is up).
Figure 247 ZULD Overview
38.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the ZULD Status screen (Section 38.2 on page 333) to see details on ZULD.
• Use the ZULD Configuration screen (Section 38.3 on page 334) to enable ZULD on a port, configure a
mode and set the probe time.
38.1.2 What You Need to Know
• ZULD must be enabled on the Switch and the port(s) in order to detect unidirectional links by
monitoring OAMPDUs.
• Ports advertise their unidirectional link detection capability using OAMPDUs, so all connected devices
must support OAM as well as ZULD. You need to enable OAM on the Switch by going to Advanced
Application > OAM > Configuration and selecting Active. OAM must be enabled on other connected
devices too. If OAM is not enabled initially, ZULD will not work.
• If OAM is enabled initially and later disabled on one end of a link, the link will be unidirectional as that
end cannot send OAMPDUs.
• OAM discovery, the sending of OAMPDUs to other ports, is initiated by an active port.
• When ZULD detects a unidirectional link, it sends a syslog and SNMP trap and may shut down the
affected port (Aggressive Mode).
Chapter 38 ZULD
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
333
• If a port on the Switch is shut down by ZULD, and you want to recover it, then do one of the following:
•Go to Basic Setting > Port Setup. Clear Active and click Apply. Then select Active and click Apply
again.
•Go to Application > Errdiable > Errdisable Recovery and set the interval for ZULD. After the interval
expires, the closed port(s) will become active and start receiving packets again.
• Use the command port no inactive.
• Refer to the ZULD logs to see when a unidirectional link is detected and when it is recovered to a
bidirectional link.
38.2 ZULD Status
Use this screen to see details of unidirectional and bidirectional links discovered by ZULD. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > ZULD.
Figure 248 Advanced Application > ZULD Status
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 167 Advanced Application > ZULD Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ZULD is.... This shows whether ZULD is enabled or disabled on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
Active This field displays whether ZULD is enabled on the port or not. ZULD must be enabled to
detect an unidirectional link by monitoring OAMPDUs.
Mode This field indicates what ZULD will do when a unidirectional link is detected. In Normal
mode, ZULD only sends a syslog and trap when it detects a unidirectional link. In
Aggressive mode, ZULD shuts down the port (puts it into an ErrDisable state) as well as
sends a syslog and trap when it detects a unidirectional link.
Probe Time Probe time is the length of time that ZULD waits before declaring that a link is
unidirectional. When the probe time expires, and one port (either on the Switch or the
connected device) still has not received an OAMPDU, then ZULD declares that the link is
unidirectional.
Chapter 38 ZULD
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
334
38.3 ZULD Configuration
Use this screen to enable ZULD on a port, configure a mode and set the probe time. To open this screen,
click Advanced Application > ZULD > Configuration.
Figure 249 Advanced Application > ZULD > Configuration
Link State This field shows the following link states:
•Linkdown: This is an initialization state, where the port is not yet up.
•Probe: This indicates that ZULD is discovering the connected device on this link.
•Bidirectional: Traffic sent by the Switch is received by the connected device on this
link, and traffic from the connected device on this link is received by the Switch.
•Unidirectional: The state of the link between the port and its connected port cannot
be determined either because no ZULD message was received, or one port is not
capable of sending traffic.
•Shutdown: The port has been shut down because its link with the connected device is
unidirectional and ZULD is in Aggressive mode.
Remote Operation This field displays whether ZULD is enabled or disabled on the connected device on this
link. ZULD must be enabled on the connected device and on the port that’s connecting to
the Switch.
Remote MAC Addr This is the MAC address of the port on the connected device to which the port of the
Switch is connected.
Remote Port This is the port number of the port on the connected device to which the port of the Switch
is connected.
Table 167 Advanced Application > ZULD Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 38 ZULD
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
335
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 168 Advanced Application > ZULD > Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable ZULD on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to
set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this to enable ZULD on the port. ZULD must be enabled to detect an unidirectional
link by monitoring OAMPDUs.
Mode Select Normal or Aggressive. In Normal mode, ZULD only sends a syslog and trap when it
detects a unidirectional link. In Aggressive mode, ZULD shuts down the port (puts it into an
ErrDisable state) as well as sends a syslog and trap when it detects a unidirectional link.
Probe Time Type the length of time that ZULD waits before declaring that a link is unidirectional. When
the probe time expires, and one port (either on the Switch or the connected device) still
has not received an OAMPDU, then ZULD declares that the link is unidirectional.
The allowed time range is from 5-65535 seconds.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
336
CHAPTER 39
Static Route
39.1 Static Routing Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure static routes.
The Switch uses IP for communication with management computers, for example using HTTP, Telnet, SSH,
or SNMP. Use IP static routes to have the Switch respond to remote management stations that are not
reachable through the default gateway. The Switch can also use static routes to send data to a server
or device that is not reachable through the default gateway, for example when sending SNMP traps or
using ping to test IP connectivity.
This figure shows a Telnet session coming in from network N1. The Switch sends reply traffic to default
gateway R1 which routes it back to the manager’s computer. The Switch needs a static route to tell it to
use router R2 to send traffic to an SNMP trap server on network N2.
Figure 250 Static Routing Overview
39.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Static Routing screen (Section 39.2 on page 337) to display the link to the IPv4 Static Route
screen.
• Use the IPv4 Static Route screen (Section 39.3 on page 337) to configure and enable an IPv4 static
route.
N1
Chapter 39 Static Route
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
337
39.2 Static Routing
Click IP Application > Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. Click the link
next to IPv4 Static Route to open a screen where you can create IPv4 static routing rules.
Figure 251 IP Application > Static Routing
39.3 IPv4 Static Route
Click the link next to IPv4 Static Route in the IP Application > Static Routing screen to display the screen
as shown.
Figure 252 IP Application > Static Routing > IPv4 Static Route
The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route.
Table 169 IP Application > Static Routing > IPv4 Static Route
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.
Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 10 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
Destination IP
Address
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you
need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask
field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID.
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Switch that
will forward the packet to the destination. The gateway must be a router on the same segment
as your Switch.
Metric The metric represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as
the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. Enter a number
that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be between
1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.
Chapter 39 Static Route
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
338
Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the above fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the index number of the route. Click a number to edit the static route entry.
Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route. This is for identification purposes only.
Destination
Address
This field displays the IP network address of the final destination.
Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination.
Gateway
Address
This field displays the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your
Switch that will forward the packet to the destination.
Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 169 IP Application > Static Routing > IPv4 Static Route
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
339
CHAPTER 40
Differentiated Services
This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services (DiffServ) on the Switch.
40.1 DiffServ Overview
Quality of Service (QoS) is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are
given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet
types.
DiffServ is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop
treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and
traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired.
This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently
depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for
every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced
notice of where the traffic is going.
40.1.1 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (ToS) field in the IP
header. The DS field contains a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and the
remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused (CU). The following figure illustrates the DS field.
Figure 253 DiffServ: Differentiated Service Field
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ
compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
The DSCP value determines the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets as it is forwarded across
the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different
priorities of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the
configured policies.
40.1.2 DiffServ Network Example
The following figure depicts a DiffServ network consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ-
compliant network devices. The boundary node (A in Figure 254) in a DiffServ network classifies (marks
with a DSCP value) the incoming packets into different traffic flows (Platinum, Gold, Silver, Bronze)
based on the configured marking rules. A network administrator can then apply various traffic policies to
the traffic flows. For example, one traffic policy would be to give higher drop precedence to one traffic
DSCP (6 bits) CU (2 bits)
Chapter 40 Differentiated Services
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
340
flow over others. In our example packets in the Bronze traffic flow are more likely to be dropped when
congestion occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow as they move across the DiffServ
network.
Figure 254 DeffServ Network
40.2 Activating DiffServ
Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802.1p priority mapping on the selected port(s).
Click IP Application > DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 255 IP Application > DiffServ
Chapter 40 Differentiated Services
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
341
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
40.3 DSCP Settings
You can configure the DSCP to IEEE 802.1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic based on
the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802.1p mapping table.
The following table shows the default DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mapping.
40.3.1 Configuring DSCP Settings
To change the DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mapping, click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the
screen as shown next.
Figure 256 IP Application > DiffServ > DSCP Setting
Table 170 IP Application > DiffServ
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select Active to enable DiffServ on the port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 171 Default DSCP-IEEE 802.1p Mapping
DSCP VALUE 0 – 7 8 – 15 16 – 23 24 – 31 32 – 39 40 – 47 48 – 55 56 – 63
IEEE 802.1p01234567
Chapter 40 Differentiated Services
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
342
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 172 IP Application > DiffServ > DSCP Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
0 … 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number.
To set the IEEE 802.1p priority mapping, select the priority level from the drop-down list box.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
343
CHAPTER 41
DHCP
41.1 DHCP Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual computers to
obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. If you configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent,
then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network. If you don’t configure the
Switch as a DHCP relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast domain of the client
computers or else the client computers must be configured manually.
41.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the DHCPv4 Status screen (Section 41.3 on page 344) to display the relay mode.
• Use the DHCPv4 Relay screen (Section 41.4 on page 344) to enable and configure global DHCPv4
relay.
• Use the VLAN Setting screen (Section 41.4.6 on page 349) to configure your DHCPv4 settings based on
the VLAN domain of the DHCPv4 clients.
• Use the DHCPv6 Relay screen (Section 41.5 on page 352) to enable and configure DHCPv6 relay.
41.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on DHCP that can help you configure the screens in this chapter.
DHCP Modes
If there is already a DHCP server on your network, then you can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay
agent. When the Switch receives a request from a computer on your network, it contacts the DHCP
server for the necessary IP information, and then relays the assigned information back to the computer.
DHCPv4 Configuration Options
The DHCPv4 configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens. The screen you should
use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on your network.
Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria:
•Global - The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server.
•VLAN - The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis. The Switch can be configured to relay
DHCP requests to different DHCP servers for clients in different VLAN.
Chapter 41 DHCP
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
344
41.2 DHCP Configuration
Click IP Application > DHCP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. Click the link next to
DHCPv4 to open screens where you can enable and configure DHCPv4 relay settings and create option
82 profiles. Click the link next to DHCPv6 to open a screen where you can configure DHCPv6 relay
settings.
Figure 257 IP Application > DHCP
41.3 DHCPv4 Status
Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the navigation panel. The DHCP Status screen displays.
Figure 258 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
41.4 DHCPv4 Relay
Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same
broadcast domain. During the initial IP address leasing, the Switch helps to relay network information
(such as the IP address and subnet mask) between a DHCP client and a DHCP server. Once the DHCP
client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network, network information renewal is done
between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch.
The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay. This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP
requests from all domains to the same DHCP server. You can also configure the Switch to relay DHCP
information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients.
Table 173 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Relay
Status
This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch’s DHCP relay mode.
Relay
Mode
This field displays:
None - if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent.
Global - if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only.
VLAN - followed by a VLAN ID or multiple VLAN IDs if it is configured as a relay agent for specific
VLAN(s).
Chapter 41 DHCP
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
345
41.4.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information
The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server
by adding Relay Agent Information. This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests.
The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information. Please refer to RFC 3046 for
more details.
The DHCP Relay Agent Information feature adds an Agent Information field (also known as the Option
82 field) to DHCP requests. The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that
the Switch relays to a DHCP server.
Relay Agent Information can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this option. You can
change the System Name in Basic Settings > General Setup.
The following describes the DHCP relay agent information that the Switch sends to the DHCP server:
41.4.1.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information Format
A DHCP Relay Agent Information option has the following format.
i1, i2 and iN are DHCP relay agent sub-options, which contain additional information about the DHCP
client. You need to define at least one sub-option.
41.4.1.2 Sub-Option Format
There are two types of sub-option: “Agent Circuit ID Sub-option” and “Agent Remote ID Sub-option”.
They have the following formats.
The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub-option and 2 identifies this as an Agent
Remote ID sub-option. The next field specifies the length of the field.
Table 174 Relay Agent Information
FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION
Slot ID (1 byte) This value is always 0 for stand-alone switches.
Port ID (1 byte) This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to.
VLAN ID (2 bytes) This is the VLAN that the port belongs to.
Information (up to 64 bytes) This optional, read-only field is set according to system name set in Basic
Settings > General Setup.
Table 175 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option Format
Code
(82)
Length
(N)
i1 i2
...
iN
Table 176 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub-option Format
SubOpt Code Length Value
1
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
Slot ID, Port ID, VLAN ID, System Name or String
Table 177 DHCP Relay Agent Remote ID Sub-option Format
SubOpt Code Length Value
2
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
MAC Address or String
Chapter 41 DHCP
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
346
41.4.2 DHCPv4 Option 82 Profile
Use this screen to create DHCPv4 option 82 profiles. Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the
navigation panel and click the Option 82 Profile link to display the screen as shown.
Figure 259 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Option 82 Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 178 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Option 82 Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes. You can use up to 32 ASCII
characters. Spaces are allowed.
Circuit-ID Use this section to configure the Circuit ID sub-option to include information that is specific to
the relay agent (the Switch).
Enable Select this option to have the Switch add the Circuit ID sub-option to client DHCP requests that it
relays to a DHCP server.
slot-port Select this option to have the Switch add the number of port that the DHCP client is connected
to.
vlan Select this option to have the Switch add the ID of VLAN which the port belongs to.
hostname This is the system name you configure in the Basic Setting > General Setup screen.
Select this option for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it
relays to a DHCP server.
string Enter a string of up to 64 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the client DHCP requests.
Spaces are allowed.
Remote-ID Use this section to configure the Remote ID sub-option to include information that identifies the
relay agent (the Switch).
Enable Select this option to have the Switch append the Remote ID sub-option to the option 82 field of
DHCP requests.
mac Select this option to have the Switch add its MAC address to the client DHCP requests that it
relays to a DHCP server.
string Enter a string of up to 64 ASCII characters for the remote ID information in this field. Spaces are
allowed.
Chapter 41 DHCP
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
347
41.4.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Global Relay
Use this screen to configure global DHCPv4 relay. Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the
navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown.
Figure 260 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile. Click the name to change the settings.
Circuit-ID
Enable This field displays whether the Circuit ID sub-option is added to client DHCP requests.
Field This field displays the information that is included in the Circuit ID sub-option.
Remote-ID
Enable This field displays whether the Remote ID sub-option is added to client DHCP requests.
Field This field displays the information that is included in the Remote ID sub-option.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check box(es).
Table 178 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Option 82 Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 179 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable DHCPv4 relay.
Remote DHCP
Server 1 .. 3
Enter the IP address of a DHCPv4 server in dotted decimal notation.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCPv4 option 82 profile that the Switch applies to all ports. The Switch
adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-option specified in the profile to DHCP
requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 41 DHCP
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
348
41.4.4 DHCPv4 Global Relay Port Configure
Use this screen to apply a different DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports on the Switch. To open this
screen, click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global > Port.
Figure 261 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 180 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Enter the number of port(s) to which you want to apply the specified DHCP option 82 profile.
You can enter multiple ports separated by (no space) comma (,) or hyphen (-). For example,
enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the specified port(s). The
Switch adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-option specified in the profile to
DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
The profile you select here has priority over the one you select in the DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global
screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected entry or, if not applicable, to
clear the fields above.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each entry. Click an index number to change the
settings.
Port This field displays the port(s) to which the Switch applies the settings.
Profile Name This field displays the DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the port(s).
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button to remove the
selected entry(ies) from the table.
Cancel Click this to clear the check boxes above.
Chapter 41 DHCP
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
349
41.4.5 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example
The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the
VLAN1 and VLAN2 domains. There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both
domains.
Figure 262 Global DHCP Relay Network Example
Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown. Make sure you select a DHCP option 82 profile (default1 in
this example) to set the Switch to send additional information (such as the VLAN ID) together with the
DHCP requests to the DHCP server. This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address
according to the VLAN ID.
Figure 263 DHCP Relay Configuration Example
41.4.6 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings
Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients. Click IP
Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the navigation panel, then click the VLAN link In the DHCP Status screen
that displays.
Note: You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN that you want to configure
DHCP settings for on the Switch. See Section 5.1.3 on page 61 for information on how to
do this.
Chapter 41 DHCP
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
350
Figure 264 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
41.4.7 DHCPv4 VLAN Port Configure
Use this screen to apply a different DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports in a VLAN. To open this screen,
click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN > Port.
Table 181 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings apply.
Relay Use this section if you want to configure the Switch to function as a DHCP relay for this VLAN.
Remote DHCP
Server 1 .. 3
Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to all ports in this VLAN. The
Switch adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-option specified in the profile to
DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply.
Type This field displays Relay for the DHCP mode.
DHCP Status For DHCP server configuration, this field displays the starting IP address and the size of the IP
address pool.
For DHCP relay configuration, this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 41 DHCP
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
351
Figure 265 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
41.4.8 Example: DHCP Relay for Two VLANs
The following example displays two VLANs (VIDs 1 and 2) for a campus network. Two DHCP servers are
installed to serve each VLAN. The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms
(VLAN 1) to the DHCP server with an IP address of 192.168.1.100. Requests from the academic buildings
(VLAN 2) are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172.16.10.100.
Table 182 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN you want to configure here.
Port Enter the number of port(s) to which you want to apply the specified DHCP option 82 profile.
You can enter multiple ports separated by (no space) comma (,) or hyphen (-). For example,
enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the specified port(s) in this
VLAN. The Switch adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-option specified in the
profile to DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
The profile you select here has priority over the one you select in the DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN
screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected entry or, if not applicable, to
clear the fields above.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each entry. Click an index number to change the
settings.
VID This field displays the VLAN to which the port(s) belongs.
Port This field displays the port(s) to which the Switch applies the settings.
Profile Name This field displays the DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the port(s) in this VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button to remove the
selected entry(ies) from the table.
Cancel Click this to clear the check boxes above.
Chapter 41 DHCP
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
352
Figure 266 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs
For the example network, configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown.
Figure 267 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example
41.5 DHCPv6 Relay
A DHCPv6 relay agent is on the same network as the DHCPv6 clients and helps forward messages
between the DHCPv6 server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-
known multicast address to locate a DHCPv6 server on its network, it then needs a DHCPv6 relay agent
to send a message to a DHCPv6 server that is not attached to the same network.
The DHCPv6 relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID
option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string, such
as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the VLAN ID to
the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply messages before the
relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCPv6 server copies the interface-ID option from the
Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to the relay agent. The interface-ID
should not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Use this screen to configure DHCPv6 relay settings for a specific VLAN on the Switch. Click IP Application
> DHCP > DHCPv6 in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Chapter 41 DHCP
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
353
Figure 268 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 183 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN you want to configure here.
Helper Address Enter the remote DHCPv6 server address for the specified VLAN.
Options
Interface ID Select this option to have the Switch add the interface-ID option in the DHCPv6 requests from
the clients in the specified VLAN before the Switch forwards them to a DHCPv6 server.
Remote ID Enter a string of up to 64 printable characters to be carried in the remote-ID option. The Switch
adds the remote-ID option in the DHCPv6 requests from the clients in the specified VLAN before
the Switch forwards them to a DHCPv6 server.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID number. Click the VLAN ID to change the settings.
Helper Address This field displays the IPv6 address of the remote DHCPv6 server for this VLAN.
Interface ID This field displays whether the interface-ID option is added to DHCPv6 requests from clients in this
VLAN.
Remote ID This field displays whether the remote-ID option is added to DHCPv6 requests from clients in this
VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
354
CHAPTER 42
ARP Setup
42.1 ARP Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to
a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area
network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The ARP
table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
42.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the ARP Learning screen (Section 42.2.1 on page 356) to configure ARP learning mode on a per-
port basis.
42.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on ARP that can help you configure the screen in this chapter.
42.1.2.1 How ARP Works
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch, the
Switch looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address, it sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN. The
Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP address of
the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field
(FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either the IP address of
the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the
target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the
requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the
MAC address that replied.
42.1.2.2 ARP Learning Mode
The Switch supports three ARP learning modes: ARP-Reply, Gratuitous-ARP, and ARP-Request.
ARP-Reply
The Switch in ARP-Reply learning mode updates the ARP table only with the ARP replies to the ARP
requests sent by the Switch. This can help prevent ARP spoofing.
In the following example, the Switch does not have IP address and MAC address mapping information
for hosts A and B in its ARP table, and host A wants to ping host B. Host A sends an ARP request to the
Switch and then sends an ICMP request after getting the ARP reply from the Switch. The Switch finds no
Chapter 42 ARP Setup
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
355
matched entry for host B in the ARP table and broadcasts the ARP request to all the devices on the LAN.
When the Switch receives the ARP reply from host B, it updates its ARP table and also forwards host A’s
ICMP request to host B. After the Switch gets the ICMP reply from host B, it sends out an ARP request to
get host A’s MAC address and updates the ARP table with host A’s ARP reply. The Switch then can
forward host B’s ICMP reply to host A.
Gratuitous-ARP
A gratuitous ARP is an ARP request in which both the source and destination IP address fields are set to
the IP address of the device that sends this request and the destination MAC address field is set to the
broadcast address. There will be no reply to a gratuitous ARP request.
A device may send a gratuitous ARP packet to detect IP collisions. If a device restarts or its MAC address
is changed, it can also use gratuitous ARP to inform other devices in the same network to update their
ARP table with the new mapping information.
In Gratuitous-ARP learning mode, the Switch updates its ARP table with either an ARP reply or a
gratuitous ARP request.
ARP-Request
When the Switch is in ARP-Request learning mode, it updates the ARP table with both ARP replies,
gratuitous ARP requests and ARP requests.
Chapter 42 ARP Setup
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
356
Therefore in the following example, the Switch can learn host A’s MAC address from the ARP request
sent by host A. The Switch then forwards host B’s ICMP reply to host A right after getting host B’s MAC
address and ICMP reply.
42.2 ARP Setup
Click IP Application > ARP Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. Click the link
next to ARP Learning to open a screen where you can set the ARP learning mode for each port.
Figure 269 IP Application > ARP Setup
42.2.1 ARP Learning
Use this screen to configure each port’s ARP learning mode. Click the link next to ARP Learning in the IP
Application > ARP Setup screen to display the screen as shown next.
Chapter 42 ARP Setup
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
357
Figure 270 IP Application > ARP Setup > ARP Learning
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 184 IP Application > ARP Setup > ARP Learning
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set
the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
ARP Learning
Mode
Select the ARP learning mode the Switch uses on the port.
Select ARP-Reply to have the Switch update the ARP table only with the ARP replies to the ARP
requests sent by the Switch.
Select Gratuitous-ARP to have the Switch update its ARP table with either an ARP reply or a
gratuitous ARP request.
Select ARP-Request to have the Switch update the ARP table with both ARP replies, gratuitous
ARP requests and ARP requests.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
358
CHAPTER 43
Maintenance
43.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration
files.
43.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Maintenance screen (Section 43.2 on page 358) to erase running configuration, save a
configuration file or restart the Switch.
• Use the Firmware Upgrade screen (Section 43.6 on page 362) to upload the latest firmware.
• Use the Restore Configuration screen (Section 43.7 on page 364) to upload a stored device
configuration file.
• Use the Backup Configuration screen (Section 43.8 on page 364) to save your configurations for later
use.
• Use the Auto Configuration screen (Section 43.9 on page 365) to overwrite the running configuration
stored in the Switch’s RAM.
• Use the Erase Running-Configuration screen (Section 43.3 on page 360) to reset the configuration to
the Zyxel default configuration settings.
• Use the Save Configuration screen (Section 43.4 on page 360) to save the current configuration
settings to a specific configuration file on the Switch.
• Use the Reboot System screen (Section 43.5 on page 361) to restart the Switch without physically
turning the power off and load a specific configuration file.
• Use the Tech-Support screen (Section 43.10 on page 366) to create reports for customer support if
there are problems with the Switch.
• Use the Certificates screen (Section 43.11 on page 368) to import the Switch's CA-signed certificates.
43.2 The Maintenance Screen
Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files. Click Management > Maintenance in
the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Chapter 43 Maintenance
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
359
Figure 271 Management > Maintenance
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 185 Management > Maintenance
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Firmware
Upgrade
Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen.
Restore
Configuration
Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen.
Backup
Configuration
Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen.
Auto
Configuration
Click Click Here to go to the Auto Configuration screen.
Erase Running-
Configuration
Click Click Here to reset the current configuration of the Switch. Note that this will not reset the
configuration to the factory default settings.
Save
Configuration
Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 1 on the Switch.
Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch.
Click Custom Default to save the current configuration settings to a custom default file on the
Switch.
Reboot System Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the Switch.
Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the Switch.
Click Factory Default to reboot the system and load the default configuration settings on the
Switch.
Click Custom Default to reboot the system and load a saved custom default file on the Switch.
This will save the custom default configuration settings to both Configuration 1 and
Configuration 2. If a custom default file was not saved, clicking Custom Default loads the
factory default configuration on the Switch.
Note: Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the
current configuration on the Switch.
Current This field displays which configuration (Configuration 1 or Configuration 2) is currently operating
on the Switch.
Chapter 43 Maintenance
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
360
43.3 Erase Running-Configuration
Follow the steps below to clear current configuration on the Switch. Note that this will NOT reset the
Switch back to its factory defaults. If you want to change the Switch to its factory default mode, click
the Factory Default button in Reboot System.
1In the Maintenance screen, click the Click Here button next to Erase Running-Configuration to clear all
Switch configuration information you configured you configured on the Switch.
2 Click OK to remove the running configuration on the Switch.
Figure 272 Erase Running-Configuration: Confirmation
3In the web configurator, click the Save button in the top of the screen to make the changes take effect.
If you want to access the Switch web configurator again, you may need to change the IP address of
your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address (192.168.1.1 or DHCP-
assigned IP).
43.4 Save Configuration
Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to configuration one on the
Switch.
Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings permanently to configuration two on the Switch.
Click Custom Default to save the current configuration settings permanently to a custom default file on
the Switch. If configuration changes cause the Switch to behave abnormally, click Custom Default (next
to Reboot System) to have the Switch automatically reboot and restore the saved Custom Default
configuration file.
Alternatively, click Save on the top right-hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes
to the current configuration.
Note: Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently. All
unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the Switch.
Tech-Support Click Click Here to see the Tech-Support screen. You can set CPU and memory thresholds for
log reports and download related log reports for issue analysis. Log reports include CPU history
and utilization, crash and memory.
Certificates Click Click Here to see the Certificates screen and import the Switch's CA-signed certificates.
Table 185 Management > Maintenance (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 43 Maintenance
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
361
43.5 Reboot System
Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off. It also allows you
to load configuration one (Config 1), configuration two (Config 2), a Custom Default or Factory Default
when you reboot. Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch.
1In the Maintenance screen, click a configuration button next to Reboot System to reboot and load that
configuration file. The following screen displays.
Figure 273 Reboot System: Confirmation
2Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart. This takes up to two minutes. This does not affect
the Switch’s configuration.
Click Config 1 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration one on the Switch.
Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the Switch.
Click Factory Default and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load default configuration settings on the
Switch.
Click Custom Default and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load Custom Default configuration settings on
the Switch. This will save the custom default configuration settings to both Configuration 1 and
Configuration 2.
Note: If a customized default file was not saved, clicking Custom Default loads the factory
default configuration on the Switch.
43.5.1 Factory Default
Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults.
1Click the Factory Default button.
2Click OK to continue or Cancel to abort.
Figure 274 Load Factory Default: Confirmation
Chapter 43 Maintenance
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
362
If you want to access the Switch web configurator again, you may need to change the IP address of
your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address (192.168.1.1 or DHCP-
assigned IP).
43.5.2 Custom Default
Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the Custom Default configuration file you created.
This will save the custom default configuration settings to both Configuration 1 and Configuration 2.
1Click the Custom Default button.
2Click OK to continue or Cancel to abort.
Note: If you did not save a custom default file in the web configurator, then the factory
default file is restored after you press click Custom Default (next to Reboot System) on
the Switch. You will then have to make all your configurations again on the Switch.
Figure 275 Load Custom Default: Confirmation
43.6 Firmware Upgrade
The Switch supports dual firmware images, Firmware 1 and Firmware 2. Use this screen to specify which
image is updated when firmware is uploaded using the web configurator and to specify which image is
loaded when the Switch starts up.
Make sure you have downloaded (and unzipped) the correct model firmware and version to your
computer before uploading to the device.
Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong
model firmware may damage your device.
Click Management > Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to view the screen as shown next.
Chapter 43 Maintenance
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
363
Figure 276 Management > Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
The top of firmware upgrade screen shows which firmware version is currently running on the Switch.
Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path text box
or click Choose File or Browse to locate it (Firmware upgrades are only applied after a reboot). Click
Upgrade to load the new firmware.
After the firmware upgrade process is complete, see the System Info screen to verify your current
firmware version number.
Table 186 Management > Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This is the name of the Switch that you’re configuring.
Version The Switch has two firmware sets, Firmware 1 and Firmware 2, residing in flash.
•Running shows the version number (and model code) and MM/DD/YYYY creation date
of the firmware currently in use on the Switch (Firmware 1 or Firmware 2). The firmware
information is also displayed at System Information in Basic Settings.
•Firmware 1 shows its version number (and model code) and MM/DD/YYYY creation
date.
•Firmware 2 shows its version number (and model code) and MM/DD/YYYY creation
date.
Current Boot Image This displays which firmware is currently in use on the Switch (Firmware 1 or Firmware 2).
Config Boot Image Select which firmware (Firmware 1 or Firmware 2) should load, click Apply and reboot the
Switch to see changes, you will also see changes in the Current Boot Image field above as
well.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Firmware Choose to upload the new firmware to (Firmware) 1 or (Firmware) 2.
File Path Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File
Path text box or click Choose File or Browse to locate it.
Upgrade Click Upgrade to load the new firmware. Firmware upgrades are only applied after a
reboot. To reboot, go to Management > Maintenance > Reboot System and click Config 1,
Config 2 or Factory Default (Config 1, Config 2 and Factory Default are the configuration
files you want the Switch to use when it restarts).
Chapter 43 Maintenance
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
364
43.7 Restore Configuration
Use this screen to restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch.
Figure 277 Management > Maintenance > Restore Configuration
Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click
Choose File or Browse to locate it. After you have specified the file, click Restore. "config" is the name of
the configuration file on the Switch, so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when
you restore using this screen.
43.8 Backup Configuration
Backing up your Switch configurations allows you to create various “snap shots” of your device from
which you may restore at a later date.
Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen.
Figure 278 Management > Maintenance > Backup Configuration
Follow the steps below to back up the current Switch configuration to your computer in this screen.
1Select which Switch configuration file you want to download to your computer.
2Click Backup.
3If the current configuration file is open and/or downloaded to your computer automatically, you can
click File > Save As to save the file to a specific place.
If a dialog box pops up asking whether you want to open or save the file, click Save or Save File to
download it to the default downloads folder on your computer. If a Save As screen displays after you
click Save or Save Fil e, choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop-down
list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box. Click Save to save the configuration
file to your computer.
Chapter 43 Maintenance
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
365
43.9 Auto Configuration
The Switch can download an pre-saved auto configuration file automatically when you reboot the
Switch using the DHCP or HTTPS mode. This will overwrite the running configuration stored in the Switch’s
RAM instead of the startup configuration stored in the Switch’s flash memory.
Figure 279 Management > Maintenance > Auto Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 187 Management > Maintenance > Auto Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Use this section to view the auto configuration status after you restarted the Switch.
Mode This field shows the mode (DHCP or HTTPS) that is used for auto configuration after you enabled
auto configuration and restarted the Switch.
It shows None if auto configuration was not enabled.
State This field shows whether auto configuration was executed successfully the last time the Switch
rebooted.
None - Auto configuration was disabled and not executed.
Success - An auto configuration file was downloaded successfully to the Switch.
Un-success - An auto configuration file was not downloaded to the Switch.
Filename This field displays the name of the auto configuration file that was downloaded the last time the
Switch rebooted.
It shows None if auto configuration was not enabled or not executed successfully.
Use this section to enable auto configuration and select the mode that you want to use for auto configuration.
Active Select the check box to enable auto configuration.
Mode Select DHCP to have the Switch use the TFTP server IP address and auto configuration file name
assigned by a DHCP server to download a pre-saved configuration file when the Switch
reboots.
Note: The Switch should act as a DHCP client to send a DHCP request so that it can
get the TFTP server address and configuration file name from the DHCP server.
See Section 6.4 on page 70 for more information about how to use auto
configuration.
Select HTTPS to have the Switch use the URL you specified in the HTTPS URL field to access a web
server and download the auto configuration file using HTTPS.
DHCP VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID of the DHCP server that assigns the TFTP server IP address and auto
configuration file name to the Switch.
Chapter 43 Maintenance
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
366
43.10 Tech-Support
The Tech-Support feature is a log enhancement tool that logs useful information such as CPU utilization
history, memory and Mbuf (Memory Buffer) log and crash reports for issue analysis by customer support
should you have difficulty with your Switch. The Tech Support menu eases your effort in obtaining reports.
Click Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support to see the following screen.
Figure 280 Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support
HTTPS URL Type the URL that can be used to access and download the auto configuration file from a web
server using HTTPS. For example, https://webserverIPaddress/configfilename.cfg.
Note: You must fill in this field if you select HTTPS in the Mode field. Otherwise, auto
configuration won’t work.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 187 Management > Maintenance > Auto Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 43 Maintenance
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
367
You may need WordPad or similar software to see the log report correctly. The table below describes
the fields in the above screen.
43.10.1 Tech-Support Download
When you click Download to save your current Switch configuration to a computer, the following screen
appears. When the log report has downloaded successfully, click Back to return to the previous screen.
Figure 281 Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support: Download
Table 188 Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support
LABEL DESCRIPTION
CPU Type a number ranging from 50 to 100 in the CPU threshold box, and type another
number ranging from 5 to 60 in the seconds box then click Apply.
For example, 80 for CPU threshold and 5 for seconds means a log will be created when
CPU utilization reaches over 80% and lasts for 5 seconds.
The log report holds 7 days of CPU log data and is stored in volatile memory (RAM). The
data is lost if the Switch is turned off or in event of power outage. After 7 days, the logs
wrap around and new ones and replace the earliest ones.
The higher the CPU threshold number, the fewer logs will be created, and the less data
technical support will have to analyze and vice versa.
Mbuf Type a number ranging from 50 to 100 in the Mbuf (Memory Buffer) threshold box. The
Mbuf log report is stored in flash (permanent) memory.
For example, Mbuf 50 means a log will be created when the Mbuf utilization is over 50%.
The higher the Mbuf threshold number, the fewer logs will be created, and the less data
technical support will have to analyze and vice versa.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
All Click Download to see all the log report and system status. This log report is stored in flash
memory. If the All log report is too large, you can download the log reports separately
below.
Crash Click Download to see the crash log report. The log will include information of the last
crash and is stored in flash memory.
CPU history Click Download to see the CPU history log report. The 7-days log is stored in RAM and you
will need to save it, otherwise it will be lost when the Switch is shutdown or during power
outage.
Memory Section Click Download to see the memory section log report. This log report is stored in flash
memory.
Mbuf Click Download to see the Mbuf log report. The log includes Mbuf over threshold
information. This log report is stored in flash memory.
ROM Click Download to see the Read Only Memory (ROM) log report. This report is stored in
flash memory.
Chapter 43 Maintenance
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
368
43.11 Certificates
The Switch can use HTTPS certificates that are verified by a third party to create secure HTTPS
connections between your computer and the Switch. This way, you may securely access the Switch
using the web configurator. See Section 44.7.3 on page 386 for more information about HTTPS.
Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner’s identity
and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.
Click Management > Maintenance > Certificates to open the following screen. Use this screen to import
the Switch's CA-signed certificates.
Figure 282 Management > Maintenance > Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 189 Management > Maintenance > Certificates
LABEL DESCRIPTION
File Path Click Choose File or Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload.
Password Type the certificate file’s password that was created when the PKCS #12 file was exported. The
password consists of up to 32 ASCII characters.
Import Click this button to save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority
from your computer to the Switch.
Service This field displays the service type that this certificate is for.
Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN (Common
Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C
(Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.
Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification authority,
such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and
country.
Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.
Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry.
Delete Click this button to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a
certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
Chapter 43 Maintenance
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
369
43.11.1 HTTPS Certificates
Use this screen to view the HTTPS certificate details. Click a hyperlink in the Service column in the
Management > Maintenance > Certificates screen to open the following screen.
Figure 283 Management > Maintenance > Certificates > HTTPS
43.12 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
43.12.1 FTP Command Line
This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP
commands. First, understand the filename conventions.
Chapter 43 Maintenance
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
370
43.12.2 Filename Conventions
The configuration file (also known as the romfile or ROM) contains the factory default settings in the
screens such as password, Switch setup, IP Setup, and so on. Once you have custom the Switch’s
settings, they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing.
ZyNOS (Zyxel Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the “ras” file) is the system firmware
and has a “bin” filename extension.
43.12.2.1 Example FTP Commands
ftp> put firmware.bin ras
This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file "firmware.bin" to the Switch.
ftp> get config config.cfg
This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called “config.cfg” on your
computer.
If your (T)FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source, you will
need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes “config” and “ras”. Be sure you keep unaltered
copies of both files for later use.
Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong
model firmware may damage your device.
43.12.3 FTP Command Line Procedure
1Launch the FTP client on your computer.
2Enter open, followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch.
3Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username.
4Enter your password as requested (the default is “1234”).
5Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary.
Table 190 Filename Conventions
FILE TYPE INTERNAL NAME EXTERNAL NAME DESCRIPTION
Configuration File config *.cfg This is the configuration filename on the
Switch. Uploading the config file replaces
the specified configuration file system,
including your Switch configurations,
system-related data (including the default
password), the error log and the trace log.
Firmware ras *.bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS
firmware on the Switch.
Chapter 43 Maintenance
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
371
6Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch, for example, put firmware.bin ras transfers
the firmware on your computer (firmware.bin) to the Switch and renames it to “ras”. Similarly, put
config.cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer (config.cfg) to the Switch and
renames it to “config”. Likewise get config config.cfg transfers the configuration file on the Switch
to your computer and renames it to “config.cfg”. See Table 190 on page 370 for more information on
filename conventions.
7Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt.
43.12.4 GUI-based FTP Clients
The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI-based FTP clients.
43.12.5 FTP Restrictions
FTP will not work when:
• FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen.
• The IP address(es) in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address. If it does
not match, the Switch will disconnect the FTP session immediately.
General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Host Address Enter the address of the host server.
Login Type Anonymous.
This is when a user I.D. and password is automatically supplied to the server for
anonymous access. Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator
has enabled this option.
Normal.
The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login.
Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII (plain text format) or in binary mode. Configuration and
firmware files should be transferred in binary mode.
Initial Remote Directory Specify the default remote directory (path).
Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory (path).
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
372
CHAPTER 44
Access Control
44.1 Access Control Overview
This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch.
A console port and FTP are allowed one session each. Telnet and SSH share nine sessions. Up to five Web
sessions (five different user names and passwords) and/or limitless SNMP access control sessions are
allowed.
A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi-login
is disabled. See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on disabling multi-login.
44.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Access Control screen (Section 44.2 on page 372) to display the main screen.
• Use the SNMP screen (Section 44.3 on page 373) to configure your SNMP settings.
• Use the Trap Group screen (Section 44.3.1 on page 374) to specify the types of SNMP traps that should
be sent to each SNMP manager.
• Use the User Information screen (Section 44.3.3 on page 376) to create SNMP users for authentication
with managers using SNMP v3 and associate them to SNMP groups.
• Use the Logins screens (Section 44.4 on page 378) to assign which users can access the Switch via
web configurator at any one time.
• Use the Service Access Control screen (Section 44.5 on page 380) to decide what services you may
use to access the Switch.
• Use the Remote Management screen (Section 44.6 on page 380) to specify a group of one or more
“trusted computers” from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch.
44.2 The Access Control Main Screen
Use this screen to display the main screen.Click Management > Access Control in the navigation panel
to display the main screen as shown.
Table 191 Access Control Overview
Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP
One session Share up to nine sessions One session Up to five accounts No limit
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
373
Figure 284 Management > Access Control
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
44.3 Configuring SNMP
Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings.
Click Management > Access Control > SNMP to view the screen as shown.
Figure 285 Management > Access Control > SNMP
Table 192 Management > Access Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SNMP Click this link to configure your SNMP settings.
Logins Click this link to assign which users can access the Switch via web configurator at any one
time.
Service Access
Control
Click this link to decide what services you may use to access the Switch.
Remote
Management
Click this link to specify a group of one or more “trusted computers” from which an
administrator may use a service to manage the Switch.
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
374
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
44.3.1 Configuring SNMP Trap Group
From the SNMP screen, click Trap Group to view the screen as shown. Use the Trap Group screen to
specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager.
Table 193 Management > Access Control > SNMP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General Setting Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community (password) values.
Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch. The SNMP version on the Switch must match the
version on the SNMP manager. Choose SNMP version 2c (v2c), SNMP version 3 (v3) or both
(v3v2c).
SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1.
Get Community Enter the Get Community string, which is the password for the incoming Get- and GetNext-
requests from the management station.
The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower.
Set Community Enter the Set Community, which is the password for incoming Set- requests from the
management station.
The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower.
Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP
manager.
The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower.
Trap Destination Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch.
Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages.
IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to.
Port Enter the port number upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps.
Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap.
This username must match an existing account on the Switch (configured in Management >
Access Control > Logins screen).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
375
Figure 286 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
44.3.2 Enabling/Disabling Sending of SNMP Traps on a Port
From the SNMP > Trap Group screen, click Port to view the screen as shown. Use this screen to set
whether a trap received on the port(s) would be sent to the SNMP manager.
Table 194 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Trap Destination IP Select one of your configured trap destination IP addresses. These are the IP addresses of the
SNMP managers. You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP Setting
screen.
Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch sends to that SNMP manager.
Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager.
Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station. See SNMP Traps
on page 383 for individual trap descriptions.
The traps are grouped by category. Selecting a category automatically selects all of the
category’s traps. Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the Switch
to send to the SNMP station. Clearing a category’s check box automatically clears all of the
category’s trap check boxes (the Switch only sends traps from selected categories).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
376
Figure 287 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
44.3.3 Configuring SNMP User
From the SNMP screen, click User to view the screen as shown. Use the User screen to create SNMP users
for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 and associate them to SNMP groups. An SNMP user is
an SNMP manager.
Table 195 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Option Select the trap type you want to configure here.
Port This field displays a port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some of the settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable the trap type of SNMP traps on this port.
Clear this check box to disable the sending of SNMP traps on this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
377
Figure 288 Management > Access Control > SNMP > User
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 196 Management > Access Control > SNMP > User
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Information Note: Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this
screen to create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager.
Username Specify the username of a login account on the Switch.
Security Level Select whether you want to implement authentication and/or encryption for SNMP
communication from this user. Choose:
•noauth -to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager. This is
equivalent to the Get, Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c. This is the lowest security
level.
•auth - to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this user.
•priv - to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this user.
This is the highest security level.
Note: The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or
higher than the security level settings on the Switch.
Authentication Select an authentication algorithm. MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm)
are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data. SHA authentication is generally
considered stronger than MD5, but is slower.
Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for SNMP user authentication.
Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user. You can choose one
of the following:
•DES - Data Encryption Standard is a widely used (but breakable) method of data
encryption. It applies a 56-bit key to each 64-bit block of data.
•AES - Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses
a secret key. AES applies a 128-bit key to 128-bit blocks of data.
Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for encrypting SNMP packets.
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
378
44.4 Logins
Up to five people (one administrator and four non-administrators) may access the Switch via web
configurator at any one time.
• An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes. The username for the
Administrator is always admin. The default administrator password is 1234.
Note: It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password (1234).
• A non-administrator (username is something other than admin) is someone who can view and/or
configure Switch settings. The configuration right varies depending on the user’s privilege level.
Click Management > Access Control > Logins to view the screen as shown.
Group SNMP v3 adopts the concept of View-based Access Control Model (VACM) group. SNMP
managers in one group are assigned common access rights to MIBs. Specify in which SNMP
group this user is.
admin - Members of this group can perform all types of system configuration, including the
management of administrator accounts.
readwrite - Members of this group have read and write rights, meaning that the user can
create and edit the MIBs on the Switch, except the user account and AAA configuration.
readonly - Members of this group have read rights only, meaning the user can collect
information from the Switch.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is a read-only number identifying a login account on the Switch. Click on an index number
to view more details and edit an existing account.
Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch.
Security Level This field displays whether you want to implement authentication and/or encryption for SNMP
communication with this user.
Authentication This field displays the authentication algorithm used for SNMP communication with this user.
Privacy This field displays the encryption method used for SNMP communication with this user.
Group This field displays the SNMP group to which this user belongs.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 196 Management > Access Control > SNMP > User (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
379
Figure 289 Management > Access Control > Logins
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 197 Management > Access Control > Logins
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Administrator
This is the default administrator account with the “admin” user name. You cannot change the default administrator
user name.
Old Password Type the existing system password (1234 is the default password when shipped).
New Password Enter your new system password.
Retype to
confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation.
Edit Logins
You may configure passwords for up to four users. These users can have read-only or read/write access. You can
give users higher privileges via the web configurator.
User Name Set a user name (up to 32 ASCII characters long).
Password Enter your new system password.
Retype to
confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation.
Privilege Type the privilege level for this user. At the time of writing, users may have a privilege level of 0,
3, 13, or 14 representing different configuration rights as shown below.
• 0 - Display basic system information.
• 3 - Display configuration or status.
• 13 - Configure features except for login accounts, SNMP user accounts, the
authentication method sequence and authorization settings, multiple logins, administrator
and enable passwords, and configuration information display.
• 14 - Configure login accounts, SNMP user accounts, the authentication method sequence
and authorization settings, multiple logins, and administrator and enable passwords, and
display configuration information.
Users can run command lines if the session’s privilege level is greater than or equal to the
command’s privilege level. The session privilege initially comes from the privilege of the login
account. For example, if the user has a privilege of 5, he/she can run commands that requires
privilege level of 5 or less but not more.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
380
44.5 Service Access Control
Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch. You may
also change the default service port and configure “trusted computer(s)” for each service in the
Remote Management screen (discussed later). Click Access Control to go back to the main Access
Control screen.
Figure 290 Management > Access Control > Service Access Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
44.6 Remote Management
Use this screen to specify a group of one or more “trusted computers” from which an administrator may
use a service to manage the Switch.
Table 198 Management > Access Control > Service Access Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here.
Active Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the Switch.
Service Port For Telnet, SSH, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS services, you may change the default service port by typing
the new port number in the Service Port field. If you change the default port number then you
will have to let people (who wish to use the service) know the new port number for that
service.
Timeout Type how many minutes (from 1 to 255) a management session can be left idle before the
session times out. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle
timeouts may have security risks.
Note: The timeout period you specified for Telnet sessions also applies to SSH
sessions. Likewise, the HTTP and HTTPS sessions are set to use the same timeout
value.
Login Timeout Type how many seconds (from 30 to 300) the Switch waits before stopping a computer’s
failed attempt to log in and access the Switch.
Note: The login timeout period you specified for Telnet sessions also applies to SSH
sessions.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
381
Click Management > Access Control > Remote Management to view the screen as shown next.
You can specify a group of one or more “trusted computers” from which an administrator may use a
service to manage the Switch. Click Access Control to return to the Access Control screen.
Figure 291 Management > Access Control > Remote Management
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
44.7 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
Table 199 Management > Access Control > Remote Management
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Entry This is the client set index number. A “client set” is a group of one or more “trusted computers”
from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch.
Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set. Clear the check box if you wish to
temporarily disable the set without deleting it.
Start Address
End Address
Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this Switch.
The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches
the range set here. The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match.
Telnet/FTP/
HTTP/ICMP/
SNMP/SSH/
HTTPS
Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the specified trusted computers.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
382
44.7.1 About SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol used to manage and
monitor TCP/IP-based devices. SNMP is used to exchange management information between the
network management system (NMS) and a network element (NE). A manager station can manage and
monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version 1 (SNMPv1), SNMP version 2c or SNMP version
3. The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. SNMP is only available if TCP/IP is
configured.
Figure 292 SNMP Management Model
An SNMP managed network consists of two main components: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed Switch (the Switch). An agent
translates the local management information from the managed Switch into a form compatible with
SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management
functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of
information to be collected about a Switch. Examples of variables include number of packets received,
node port status and so on. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects.
SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects.
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager
issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
SNMP v3 and Security
SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management. SNMP managers can be required to authenticate
with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions.
Table 200 SNMP Commands
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In
SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a
Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.
Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
383
Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers.
Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages. When the contents of the SNMP messages are
encrypted, only the intended recipients can read them.
Supported MIBs
MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance.
The Switch supports the following MIBs:
• SNMP MIB II (RFC 1213)
• RFC 1157 SNMP v1
• RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs
• RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs
• RFC 1155 SMI
• RFC 2674 SNMPv2, SNMPv2c
• RFC 1757 RMON
• SNMPv2, SNMPv2c or later version, compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP, RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB
for TCP, RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP
SNMP Traps
The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs. The following tables outline the
SNMP traps by category.
Table 201 SNMP System Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
coldstart coldStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 This trap is sent when the Switch is turned
on.
warmstart warmStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 This trap is sent when the Switch restarts.
poe
(For PoE models
only)
pethPsePortOnOffNotificatio
n
1.3.6.1.2.1.105.0.1 This trap is sent when the PoE port delivers
power or delivers no power to a PD.
pethMainPowerUsageOnNo
tification
1.3.6.1.2.1.105.0.2 This trap is sent when the usage power is
above the usage indication threshold.
pethMainPowerUsageOffNo
tification
1.3.6.1.2.1.105.0.3 This trap is sent when the usage power is
below the usage indication threshold.
Table 202 SNMP Interface Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
linkup linkUp 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is
up.
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
384
linkdown linkDown 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is
down.
lldp lldpRemTablesChange 1.0.8802.1.1.2.0.0.1 The trap is sent when entries in the
remote database have any updates.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP),
defined as IEEE 802.1ab, enables LAN
devices that support LLDP to exchange
their configured settings. This helps
eliminate configuration mismatch issues.
Table 202 SNMP Interface Traps (continued)
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
Table 203 SNMP AAA Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
authentication authenticationFailure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5 This trap is sent when authentication
fails due to incorrect user name and/or
password.
Table 204 SNMP IP Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
ping pingProbeFailed 1.3.6.1.2.1.80.0.1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails.
pingTestFailed 1.3.6.1.2.1.80.0.2 This trap is sent when a ping test (consisting of a series of
ping probes) fails.
pingTestCompleted 1.3.6.1.2.1.80.0.3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed.
traceroute traceRouteTestFailed 1.3.6.1.2.1.81.0.2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails.
traceRouteTestCompleted 1.3.6.1.2.1.81.0.3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed.
Table 205 SNMP Switch Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
stp STPNewRoot 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes.
STPTopologyChange 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes.
rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.1 This trap is sent when a variable goes over the RMON
"rising" threshold.
RmonFallingAlarm 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.2 This trap is sent when the variable falls below the RMON
"falling" threshold.
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
385
44.7.2 SSH Overview
Unlike Telnet or FTP, which transmit data in clear text, SSH (Secure Shell) is a secure communication
protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted
communication between two hosts over an unsecured network.
Figure 293 SSH Communication Example
44.7.2.1 How SSH works
The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts.
Figure 294 How SSH Works
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
386
1Host Identification
The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server. The server identifies itself with a host key. The
client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result
back to the server.
The client automatically saves any new server public keys. In subsequent connections, the server public
key is checked against the saved version on the client computer.
2Encryption Method
Once the identification is verified, both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption
method to use.
3Authentication and Data Transmission
After the identification is verified and data encryption activated, a secure tunnel is established between
the client and the server. The client then sends its authentication information (user name and password)
to the server to log in to the server.
44.7.2.2 SSH Implementation on the Switch
Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods (DES, 3DES
and Blowfish). The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file transfer on
port 22. Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time.
44.7.2.3 Requirements for Using SSH
You must install an SSH client program on a client computer (Windows or Linux operating system) that is
used to connect to the Switch over SSH.
44.7.3 Introduction to HTTPS
HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL) is a web protocol that
encrypts and decrypts web pages. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an application-level protocol that
enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality (an unauthorized party cannot read the
transferred data), authentication (one party can identify the other party) and data integrity (you know if
data has been changed).
It relies upon certificates, public keys, and private keys.
HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web configurator. The
SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server (the Switch) must always authenticate itself to the SSL client (the
computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Switch), whereas the SSL client only should
authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so. Authenticating client certificates is optional
and if selected means the SSL-client must send the Switch a certificate. You must apply for a certificate
for the browser from a Certificate Authority (CA) that is a trusted CA on the Switch.
Please refer to the following figure.
1HTTPS connection requests from an SSL-aware web browser go to port 443 (by default) on the Switch’s
WS (web server).
2HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 (by default) on the Switch’s WS (web
server).
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
387
Figure 295 HTTPS Implementation
Note: If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen, then the Switch blocks all HTTP
connection attempts.
44.7.3.1 HTTPS Example
If you haven’t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch, then in your browser enter “https://Switch
IP Address/” as the web site address where “Switch IP Address” is the IP address or domain name of the
Switch you wish to access.
Internet Explorer Warning Messages
Internet Explorer 6
When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server, a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust
the server certificate.
You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer. Select Yes to proceed to the web
configurator login screen; if you select No, then web configurator access is blocked.
Figure 296 Security Alert Dialog Box (Internet Explorer 6)
Internet Explorer 7 later version
When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server, a screen with the message "There is a problem
with this website's security certificate." may display. If that is the case, click Continue to this website (not
recommended) to proceed to the web configurator login screen.
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
388
Figure 297 Security Certificate Warning (Internet Explorer 11)
After you log in, you will see the red address bar with the message Certificate Error. Click on Certificate
Error next to the address bar and click View certificates.
Figure 298 Certificate Error (Internet Explorer 11)
Click Install Certificate... and follow the on-screen instructions to install the certificate in your browser.
EXAMPLE
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
389
Figure 299 Certificate (Internet Explorer 11)
Mozilla Firefox Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server, a This Conne ction is Unstructed or Your connection
is not secure screen may display. If that is the case, click I Understand the Risks or Advanced and then
the Add Exception... button.
Figure 300 Security Alert (Mozilla Firefox 53.0)
Confirm the HTTPS server URL matches. Click Confirm Security Exception to proceed to the web
configurator login screen.
EXAMPLE
Chapter 44 Access Control
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
390
Figure 301 Security Alert (Mozilla Firefox 53.0)
44.7.4 Google Chrome Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server, a Your connection is not private screen may
display. If that is the case, click Advanced and then Proceed to x.x.x.x (unsafe) to proceed to the web
configurator login screen.
EXAMPLE
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
391
Figure 302 Security Alert (Google Chrome 58.0.3029.110)
44.7.4.1 The Main Screen
After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password, the Switch main screen
appears. The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar or next to the website address
denotes a secure connection.
Figure 303 Example: Lock Denoting a Secure Connection
Chapter 45 Diagnostic
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
392
CHAPTER 45
Diagnostic
45.1 Overview
This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen. You can use this screen to help you identify problems.
45.2 Diagnostic
Click Management > Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use this screen to ping IP
addresses, run a traceroute, perform port tests or show the Switch’s location between devices.
Figure 304 Management > Diagnostic
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
393
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 206 Management > Diagnostic
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ping Test
IPv4 Select this option if you want to ping an IPv4 address. Select - to send ping requests to all
VLANs on the Switch.
IPv6 Select this option if you want to ping an IPv6 address. You can also select vlan and specify
the ID number of the VLAN to which the Switch is to send ping requests. Otherwise, select - to
send ping requests to all VLANs on the Switch.
IP Address/Host
Name Type the IP address or host name of a device that you want to ping in order to test a
connection.
Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address.
Count Enter the number of ICMP Echo Request (ping) messages the Switch continuously sends.
Trace Route Test
IPv4 Select this option if you want to trace the route packets take to a device with an IPv4
address. Select - to trace the path on any VLAN.
Note: The device to which you want to run a traceroute must belong to the VLAN
you specify here.
IPv6 Select this option if you want to trace the route packets take to a device with an IPv6
address.
IP Address/Host
Name Enter the IP address or host name of a device to which you want to perform a traceroute.
Click Trace Route to have the Switch perform the traceroute function. This determines the
path a packet takes to the specified device.
TTL Enter the Time To Live (TTL) value for the ICMP Echo Request packets. This is to set the
maximum number of the hops (routers) a packet can travel through. Each router along the
path will decrement the TTL value by one and forward the packets. When the TTL value
becomes zero and the destination is not found, the router drops the packets and informs the
sender.
Wait Time Specify how many seconds the Switch waits for a response to a probe before running
another traceroute.
Queries Specify how many times the Switch performs the traceroute function.
Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test.
Cable Diagnostics Enter an Ethernet port number and click Diagnose to perform a physical wire-pair test of the
Ethernet connections on the specified port(s). The following fields display in the Diagnostic
field when you diagnose a port.
This field is available only on the Switch that has one or more copper Ethernet ports (except
the MGMT port).
Note: The Switch measures the cable length by sending an electric signal through
the cable and reading the signal that is reflected back. To prevent possible
interference from a connected device, it's suggested that you disconnect
the other end of the Ethernet cable which is connected to the specified
port.
Port This is the number of the physical Ethernet port on the Switch.
Locator LED Enter a time interval (in minutes) and click Blink to show the actual location of the Switch
between several devices in a rack.
The default time interval is 30 minutes.
Click Stop to have the Switch terminate the blinking locater LED.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
394
CHAPTER 46
System Log
46.1 Overview
A log message stores the information for viewing.
46.2 System Log
Click Management > System Log in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use this screen to check
current system logs.
Note: When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages
automatically overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log
message first.
Figure 305 Management > System Log
The summary table shows the time the log message was recorded and the reason the log message was
generated. Click Refresh to update this screen. Click Clear to clear the whole log, regardless of what is
currently displayed on the screen. Click Download to save the log to your computer.
Chapter 47 Syslog Setup
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
395
CHAPTER 47
Syslog Setup
47.1 Syslog Overview
This chapter explains the syslog screens.
The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog
servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog message and
send it to a syslog server.
Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related
information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog facility
identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details. The
following table describes the syslog severity levels.
47.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Syslog Setup screen (Section 47.2 on page 395) to configure the device’s system logging
settings and configure a list of external syslog servers.
47.2 Syslog Setup
The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server. Use this screen to configure the device’s
system logging settings and configure a list of external syslog servers.
Click Management > Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen.
Table 207 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE SEVERITY
0 Emergency: The system is unusable.
1 Alert: Action must be taken immediately.
2 Critical: The system condition is critical.
3 Error: There is an error condition on the system.
4 Warning: There is a warning condition on the system.
5 Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system.
6 Informational: The syslog contains an informational message.
7 Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes.
Chapter 47 Syslog Setup
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
396
Figure 306 Management > Syslog Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 208 Management > Syslog Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog (system logging) and then configure the syslog setting
Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate.
Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category.
Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the
documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Syslog Server Setup
Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server. Clear the check box
if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it (you can
edit the entry later).
Server Address Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the syslog server.
UDP Port The default syslog server port is 514. If your syslog server uses a different port, configure the
one it uses here.
Log Level Select the severity level(s) of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server.
The lower the number, the more critical the logs are.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
397
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry. Click this number to edit the entry.
Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server. No displays if the
device is not to send logs to the syslog server.
IP Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server.
UDP Port This field displays the port of the syslog server.
Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry(ies).
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 208 Management > Syslog Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 48 Cluster Management
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
398
CHAPTER 48
Cluster Management
48.1 Cluster Management Overview
This chapter introduces cluster management.
Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one Switch, called the cluster manager.
The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to
communicate with one another.
In the following example, switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the
upper floors of the building are cluster members.
Figure 307 Clustering Application Example
Table 209 Zyxel Clustering Management Specifications
Maximum number of cluster members 24
Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with Zyxel cluster management implementation.
Cluster Manager The switch through which you manage the cluster member switches.
Cluster Members The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch.
Chapter 48 Cluster Management
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
399
48.1.1 What You Can Do
• Use the Cluster Management screen (Section 48.2 on page 399) to view the role of the Switch within
the cluster and to access a cluster member switch’s web configurator.
• Use the Clustering Management Configuration screen (Section 48.1 on page 398) to configure
clustering management.
48.2 Cluster Management Status
Use this screen to view the role of the Switch within the cluster and to access a cluster member switch’s
web configurator.
Click Management > Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen.
Note: A cluster can only have one manager.
Figure 308 Management > Cluster Management: Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 210 Management > Cluster Management: Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status This field displays the role of this Switch within the cluster.
Manager
Member (you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via
the cluster manager)
None (neither a manager nor a member of a cluster)
Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch’s hardware MAC address.
The Number of
Member
This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster. The following fields describe
the cluster member switches.
Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch. Each number in the
Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch’s web configurator (see Figure
310 on page 402).
MacAddr This is the cluster member switch’s hardware MAC address.
Name This is the cluster member switch’s System Name.
Chapter 48 Cluster Management
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
400
48.3 Clustering Management Configuration
Use this screen to configure clustering management. Click Management > Cluster Management >
Configuration to display the next screen.
Figure 309 Management > Cluster Management > Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Model This field displays the model name.
Status This field displays:
Online (the cluster member switch is accessible)
Error (for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the
manager and so left the member list, etc.)
Offline (the switch is disconnected - Offline shows approximately 1.5 minutes after the link
between cluster member and manager goes down)
Table 210 Management > Cluster Management: Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 211 Management > Cluster Management > Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clustering Manager
Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch. A cluster can only
have one manager. Other (directly connected) switches that are set to be cluster
managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list. If a switch that was previously a
cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager, then its Status is displayed as Error
in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon ( ) appears in the member
summary list below.
Chapter 48 Cluster Management
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
401
48.4 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager. You may use up to 32 printable characters
(spaces are allowed).
VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802.1Q VLAN. All switches must
be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster. Switches
that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list. This field
is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port-based VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clustering
Candidate
The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members.
List A list of suitable candidates found by auto-discovery is shown here. The switches must be
directly connected. Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not
be visible in the Clustering Candidate list. Switches that are not in the same management
VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list.
Password Each cluster member’s password is its web configurator password. Select a member in the
Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password. If that switch
administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards, then it cannot be
managed from the Cluster Manager. Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster
Management Status screen.
If multiple devices have the same password then hold [SHIFT] and click those switches to
select them. Then enter their common web configurator password.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto-discovery again to list potential cluster members.
The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured.
Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch.
MacAddr This is the cluster member switch’s hardware MAC address.
Name This is the cluster member switch’s System Name.
Model This is the cluster member switch’s model name.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Remove Click the Remove button to remove the selected cluster member switch(es) from the
cluster.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 211 Management > Cluster Management > Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 48 Cluster Management
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
402
48.4.1 Cluster Member Switch Management
Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index
hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch's web configurator home page.
This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you'd see if you accessed it
directly are different.
Figure 310 Cluster Management: Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen
48.4.1.1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch
You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as
shown in the following example.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
403
Figure 311 Example: Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch
The following table explains some of the FTP parameters.
C:\>ftp 192.168.1.1
Connected to 192.168.1.1.
220 Switch FTP version 1.0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00:58:46 1970
User (192.168.0.1:(none)): admin
331 Enter PASS command
Password:
230 Logged in
ftp> ls
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for LIST
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 3042210 Jul 01 12:00 ras
-rw-rw-rw- 1 owner group 393216 Jul 01 12:00 config
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
-rw-rw-rw- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 config-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
226 File sent OK
ftp: 297 bytes received in 0.00Seconds 297000.00Kbytes/sec.
ftp> bin
200 Type I OK
ftp> put 460ABQF0.bin fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for STOR fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
226 File received OK
ftp: 262144 bytes sent in 0.63Seconds 415.44Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
Table 212 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example
FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
User Enter “admin”.
Password The web configurator password default is 1234.
ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch’s firmware and
configuration file.
460ABQF0.bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member
switch.
fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46 This is the cluster member switch’s firmware name as seen in the cluster
manager switch.
config-00-a0-c5-01-23-46 This is the cluster member switch’s configuration file name as seen in the cluster
manager switch.
Chapter 49 MAC Table
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
404
CHAPTER 49
MAC Table
49.1 MAC Table Overview
This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen.
The MAC Table screen (a MAC table is also known as a filtering database) shows how frames are
forwarded or filtered across the Switch’s ports. It shows what device MAC address, belonging to what
VLAN group (if any) is forwarded to which port(s) and whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by
the Switch) or static (manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
49.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the MAC Table screen (Section 49.2 on page 405) to check whether the MAC address is dynamic or
static.
49.1.2 What You Need to Know
The Switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames. See the following figure.
1The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came.
2The Switch checks to see if the frame's destination MAC address matches a source MAC address
already learned in the MAC table.
• If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, then it forwards the frame to that port.
• If the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address, then the frame is flooded to all
ports. Too much port flooding leads to network congestion.
• If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, but the destination port is the same as
the port it came in on, then it filters the frame.
Chapter 49 MAC Table
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
405
Figure 312 MAC Table Flowchart
49.2 Viewing the MAC Table
Use this screen to check whether the MAC address is dynamic or static.
Click Management > MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen.
Figure 313 Management > MAC Table
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
406
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 213 Management > MAC Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Condition Select one of the buttons and click Search to only display the data which matches the criteria
you specified.
Select All to display any entry in the MAC table of the Switch.
Select Static to display the MAC entries manually configured on the Switch.
Select MAC and enter a MAC address in the field provided to display a specified MAC entry.
Select VID and enter a VLAN ID in the field provided to display the MAC entries belonging to the
specified VLAN.
Select Port and enter a port number in the field provided to display the MAC addresses which
are forwarded on the specified port.
Select Trunk and type the ID of a trunk group to display all MAC addresses learned from the
port(s) in the trunk group.
Sort by Define how the Switch displays and arranges the data in the summary table below.
Select MAC to display and arrange the data according to MAC address.
Select VID to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group.
Select PORT to display and arrange the data according to port number.
Transfer Type Select Dynamic to MAC forwarding and click the Transfer button to change all dynamically
learned MAC address entries in the summary table below into static entries. They also display in
the Static MAC Forwarding screen.
Select Dynamic to MAC filtering and click the Transfer button to change all dynamically learned
MAC address entries in the summary table below into MAC filtering entries. These entries will then
display only in the Filtering screen and the default filtering action is Discard source . The MAC
address(es) will be removed from the MAC table and all traffic sent from the MAC address(es)
will be blocked by the Switch.
Search Click this to search data in the MAC table according to your input criteria.
Transfer Click this to perform the MAC address transferring you selected in the Transfer Type field.
Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values.
Index This is the incoming frame index number.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came.
VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs.
Port This is the port where the above MAC address is forwarded.
Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the Switch) or static (manually
entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
Chapter 50 ARP Table
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
407
CHAPTER 50
ARP Table
50.1 ARP Table Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to
a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area
network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The ARP
Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
50.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the ARP Table screen (Section 50.2 on page 407) to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s).
50.1.2 What You Need to Know
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch, the
Switch's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address, it sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN. The
Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP address of
the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field
(FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either the IP address of
the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the
target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the
requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the
MAC address that replied.
50.2 Viewing the ARP Table
Use the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s) and remove specific dynamic ARP entries.
Click Management > ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
408
Figure 314 Management > ARP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 214 Management > ARP Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Condition Specify how you want the Switch to remove ARP entries when you click Flush.
Select All to remove all of the dynamic entries from the ARP table.
Select IP Address and enter an IP address to remove the dynamic entries learned with the
specified IP address.
Select Port and enter a port number to remove the dynamic entries learned on the specified port.
Flush Click Flush to remove the ARP entries according to the condition you specified.
Cancel Click Cancel to return the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the ARP table entry number.
IP Address This is the IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with the corresponding MAC address
below.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the corresponding IP address above.
VID This field displays the VLAN to which the device belongs.
Port This field displays the port to which the device connects. CPU means this IP address is the Switch’s
management IP address.
Age(s) This field displays how long (in seconds) an entry can still remain in the ARP table before it ages out
and needs to be relearned. This shows 0 for a static entry.
Type This shows whether the IP address is dynamic (learned by the Switch) or static (manually
configured in the Basic Setting > IP Setup or IP Application > ARP Setup > Static ARP screen).
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
409
CHAPTER 51
Path MTU Table
51.1 Path MTU Overview
This chapter introduces the IPv6 Path MTU table.
The largest size (in bytes) of a packet that can be transferred over a data link is called the maximum
transmission unit (MTU). The Switch uses Path MTU Discovery to discover Path MTU (PMTU), that is, the
minimum link MTU of all the links in a path to the destination. If the Switch receives an ICMPv6 Packet Too
Big error message after sending a packet, it fragments the next packet according to the suggested MTU
in the error message.
51.2 Viewing the Path MTU Table
Use this screen to view IPv6 path MTU information on the Switch. Click Management > Path MTU Table in
the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 315 Management > Path MTU Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 215 Management > Path MTU Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Path MTU
aging time
This field displays how long an entry remains in the Path MTU table before it ages out and needs to
be relearned.
Index This field displays the index number of each entry in the table.
Destination
Address
This field displays the destination IPv6 address of each path/entry.
MTU This field displays the maximum transmission unit of the links in the path.
Expire This field displays how long (in minutes) an entry can still remain in the Path MTU table before it
ages out and needs to be relearned.
Chapter 52 Configure Clone
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
410
CHAPTER 52
Configure Clone
52.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports.
52.2 Configure Clone
Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or
ports. Click Management > Configure Clone to open the following screen.
Chapter 52 Configure Clone
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
411
Figure 316 Management > Configure Clone
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 216 Management > Configure Clone
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Source/
Destination
Port
Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label. These are the ports which are going
to have the same attributes as the source port. You can enter individual ports separated by a
comma or a range of ports by using a hyphen. For example, 2, 4, 6 indicates that ports 2, 4 and 6
are the destination ports. 2-6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports.
* Select this check box to select all port settings.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
412
Basic Setting Select which port settings (you configured in the Basic Setting menus) should be copied to the
destination port(s).
Advanced
Application
Select which port settings (you configured in the Advanced Application menus) should be copied
to the destination ports.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 216 Management > Configure Clone (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 53 IPv6 Neighbor Table
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
413
CHAPTER 53
IPv6 Neighbor Table
53.1 IPv6 Neighbor Table Overview
This chapter introduces the IPv6 neighbor table.
An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor table. If there is an address to be resolved or verified, the
Switch sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the Switch receives a neighbor advertisement
in response, it stores the neighbor’s link-layer address in the neighbor table. You can also manually
create a static IPv6 neighbor entry using the Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor
Setup screen.
When the Switch needs to send a packet, it first consults other table to determine the next hop. Once
the next hop IPv6 address is known, the Switch looks into the neighbor table to get the link-layer address
and sends the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the Switch cannot find an entry in the
neighbor table or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address resolution process. This
helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages.
53.2 Viewing the IPv6 Neighbor Table
Use this screen to view IPv6 neighbor information on the Switch. Click Management > IPv6 Neighbor
Table in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 317 Management > IPv6 Neighbor Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 217 Management > IPv6 Neighbor Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Sort by Select this to display and arrange the data according to IPv6 address (Address), MAC address
(MAC) or IPv6 interface (Interface). The information is then displayed in the summary table below.
Index This field displays the index number of each entry in the table.
Address This field displays the IPv6 address of the Switch or a neighboring device.
MAC This field displays the MAC address of the IPv6 interface on which the IPv6 address is configured or
the MAC address of the neighboring device.
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
414
Status This field displays whether the neighbor IPv6 interface is reachable. In IPv6, “reachable” means an
IPv6 packet can be correctly forwarded to a neighbor node (host or router) and the neighbor
can successfully receive and handle the packet. The available options in this field are:
• reachable (R): The interface of the neighboring device is reachable. (The Switch has received
a response to the initial request.)
• stale (S): The last reachable time has expired and the Switch is waiting for a response to
another initial request. The field displays this also when the Switch receives an unrequested
response from the neighbor’s interface.
• delay (D): The neighboring interface is no longer known to be reachable, and traffic has been
sent to the neighbor recently. The Switch delays sending request packets for a short to give
upper-layer protocols a chance to determine reachability.
• probe (P): The Switch is sending request packets and waiting for the neighbor’s response.
• invalid (IV): The neighbor address is with an invalid IPv6 address.
• unknown (?): The status of the neighboring interface can not be determined for some reason.
• incomplete (I): Address resolution is in progress and the link-layer address of the neighbor has
not yet been determined. The interface of the neighboring device did not give a complete
response.
Type This field displays the type of an address mapping to a neighbor interface. The available options in
this field are:
• other (O): none of the following type.
• local (L): A Switch interface is using the address.
• dynamic (D): The IP address to MAC address can be successfully resolved using IPv6 Neighbor
Discovery protocol. Is it similar as IPv4 ARP (Address Resolution protocol).
• static (S): The interface address is statically configured.
Interface This field displays the ID number of the IPv6 interface on which the IPv6 address is created or
through which the neighboring device can be reached.
Table 217 Management > IPv6 Neighbor Table (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 54 Port Status
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
415
CHAPTER 54
Port Status
54.1 Overview
This chapter introduces the port status screens.
54.2 Port Status
This screen displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details. To view
the port statistics, click Status in all web configurator screens and then the Port Status link in the Quick
Links section of the Status screen to display the Port Status screen as shown next. You can also click
Management > Port Status to see the following screen.
Figure 318 Port Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 218 Port Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This identifies the Ethernet port.
Click a port number to display the Port Details screen (refer to Figure 319 on page 417).
Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting > Port Setup screen.
Chapter 54 Port Status
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
416
54.2.1 Port Details
Click a number in the Port column in the Port Status screen to display individual port statistics. Use this
screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the Switch.
Link This field displays the speed (either 100M for 100Mbps or1G for 1 Gbps) and the duplex (F for full
duplex or H for half). It also shows the cable type (Copper or Fiber) for the combo ports. This field
displays Down if the port is not connected to any device.
State If STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) is enabled, this field displays the STP state of the port. See Chapter
13 on page 138 for more information.
If STP is disabled, this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up, otherwise, it displays STOP.
When LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol), STP, and dot1x are in blocking state, it displays
Blocking.
LACP This fields displays whether LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) has been enabled on the
port.
TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port.
RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port.
Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port.
Tx KB/s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port.
Rx KB/s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port.
Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours, minutes and seconds the port has been up.
Clear Counter Select Port, enter a port number and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical
information for that port, or select Any to clear statistics for all ports.
Table 218 Port Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 54 Port Status
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
417
Figure 319 Port Status > Port Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 219 Port Status: Port Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Info
Port NO. This field displays the port number you are viewing.
Name This field displays the name of the port.
Link This field displays the speed (either 100M for 100Mbps or 1G for 1 Gbps) and the duplex (F for full
duplex or H for half). It also shows the cable type (Copper or Fiber) for the combo ports. This field
displays Down if the port is not connected to any device.
State If STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) is enabled, this field displays the STP state of the port. See Chapter
13 on page 138 for more information.
If STP is disabled, this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up, otherwise, it displays STOP.
When LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol), STP, and dot1x are in blocking state, it displays
Blocking.
LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not.
TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port
RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port
Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port.
Tx KB/s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port.
Tx
Utilization% This field shows the percentage of actual transmitted frames on this port as a percentage of the
Link speed.
Chapter 54 Port Status
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
418
Rx KB/s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port.
Rx
Utilization% This field shows the percentage of actual received frames on this port as a percentage of the Link
speed.
Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up.
Tx Packet
The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted.
Unicast This field shows the number of good unicast packets transmitted.
Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted.
Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted.
Pause This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause packets transmitted.
Tagged This field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags transmitted.
Rx Packet
The following fields display detailed information about packets received.
Unicast This field shows the number of good unicast packets received.
Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received.
Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received.
Pause This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause packets received.
Control This field shows the number of control packets received (including those with CRC error) but it
does not include the 802.3x Pause packets.
TX Collision
The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting.
Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one
collision.
Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more
than one collision.
Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions. Excessive
collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset.
Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected, that is, after 512 bits of the packets have
already been transmitted.
Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error.
RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check) error(s).
Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range.
Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short (shorter than 64 octets),
including the ones with CRC errors.
Distribution
64 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in
length.
65-127 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65
and 127 octets in length.
128-255 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128
and 255 octets in length.
256-511 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256
and 511 octets in length.
512-1023 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512
and 1023 octets in length.
Table 219 Port Status: Port Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 54 Port Status
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
419
54.2.2 DDMI
Use this screen to view the SFP (Small Form Factor Pluggable) transceiver information. Click
Management > Port Status > DDMI to see the following screen.
Figure 320 Management > Port Status > DDMI
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
54.2.3 DDMI Details
Use this screen to view the real-time SFP (Small Form Factor Pluggable) transceiver information and
operating parameters on the SFP port. The parameters include, for example, transmitting and receiving
power, and module temperature.
1024-1518 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024
and 1518 octets in length.
Giant This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1519
octets and the maximum frame size.
The maximum frame size varies depending on your switch model.
Table 219 Port Status: Port Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 220 Management > Port Status > DDMI
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This identifies the SFP port.
Vendor This displays the vendor name of the optical transceiver.
Part Number This displays the part number of the optical transceiver.
Serial Number This displays the serial number of the optical transceiver.
Revision This displays the revision number of the optical transceiver.
Date Code This displays the date when the optical transceiver was manufactured.
Transceiver This displays whether the connection to the optical network is up or down.
Chapter 54 Port Status
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
420
Click a number in the Port column in the DDMI screen to view current transceivers’ status.
Figure 321 DDMI Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 221 DDMI Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Transceiver Information
Port No This identifies the SFP port.
Connector Type This displays the connector type of the optical transceiver.
Vendor This displays the vendor name of the optical transceiver.
Part Number This displays the part number of the optical transceiver.
Serial Number This displays the serial number of the optical transceiver.
Revision This displays the revision number of the optical transceiver.
Date Code This displays the date when the optical transceiver was manufactured.
Transceiver This displays details about the type of transceiver installed in the SFP slot.
DDMI Information
Type This displays the DDMI parameter.
Temperature
(C) This displays the temperature inside the SFP transceiver in degrees Celsius.
Voltage (V) This displays the level of voltage being supplied to the SFP transceiver.
TX Bias (mA) This displays the milliamps (mA) being supplied to the SFP transceiver’s Laser Diode Transmitter.
TX Power
(dbm) This displays the amount of power the SFP transceiver is transmitting.
RX Power
(dbm) This displays the amount of power the SFP transceiver is receiving from the fiber optic cable.
Current This displays the current status for each monitored DDMI parameter.
High Alarm
Threshold
This displays the high value alarm threshold for each monitored DDMI parameter. An alarm
signal is reported to the Switch if the monitored DDMI parameter reaches this value.
High Warn
Threshold
This displays the high value warning threshold for each monitored DDMI parameter. A warning
signal is reported to the Switch if the monitored DDMI parameter reaches this value.
Low Warn
Threshold
This displays the low value warning threshold for each monitored DDMI parameter. A warning
signal is reported to the Switch if the monitored DDMI parameter reaches this value.
Low Alarm
Threshold
This displays the low value alarm threshold for each monitored DDMI parameter. An alarm
signal is reported to the Switch if the monitored DDMI parameter reaches this value.
Chapter 54 Port Status
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
421
54.2.4 Port Utilization
This screen displays the percentage of actual transmitted or received frames on a port as a percentage
of the Link speed. To view port utilization, click Management > Port Status > Port Utilization to see the
following screen. Alternatively, click Status from any Web Configurator screen and then the Port Status
link in the Quick Links section of the Status screen to display the Port Status screen and then click the
Utilization link tab.
Figure 322 Management > Port Status > Utilization
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 222 Port Status: Utilization
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This identifies the Ethernet port.
Link This field displays the speed (either 100M for 100Mbps or 1G for 1 Gbps) and the duplex (F for full
duplex or H for half). It also shows the cable type (Copper or Fiber) for the combo ports. This field
displays Down if the port is not connected to any device.
Tx kB/s This field shows the transmission speed of data sent on this port in kilobytes per second.
Tx Utilization% This field shows the percentage of actual transmitted frames on this port as a percentage of the
Link speed.
Rx KB/s This field shows the transmission speed of data received on this port in kilobytes per second.
Rx Utilization% This field shows the percentage of actual received frames on this port as a percentage of the Link
speed.
422
PART III
Troubleshooting and
Appendices
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
423
CHAPTER 55
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are
divided into the following categories.
•Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
•Switch Access and Login
•Switch Configuration
55.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The Switch does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
1Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Switch.
2Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Switch and plugged in to an appropriate
power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
3Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch.
4If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
1Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 3.3 on page 41.
2Check the hardware connections. See Section 55.1 on page 423.
3Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
4Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch.
5If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
Chapter 55 Troubleshooting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
424
55.2 Switch Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the Switch.
1The default IP address is http://DHCP-assigned IP or 192.168.1.1.
2If the Switch is removed from a site in Nebula, all the settings in the configuration file are reset to the
Nebula factory defaults except for the IP address. If you changed the default dynamic IP address to a
static IP address while the Switch was in a site in Nebula, the Switch will retain that static IP address after
you remove it from the site in Nebula.
3Use the NCC, the ZON utility, or the console port to find the IP address. The Switch must be registered
and added to a site in Nebula in order for it to be managed using Nebula.
4If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 4.7 on page 56.
I forgot the username and/or password.
1The default username is admin and the default password is 1234.
2If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 4.7 on page 56.
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
1Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address is http://DHCP-assigned IP or 192.168.1.1.
• If you changed the IP address, use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I
forgot the IP address for the Switch.
2Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Section 3.3
on page 41.
3Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java
enabled.
4Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch. (If you know that there are routers
between your computer and the Switch, skip this step.)
5Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Switch with the default IP address. See
Section 4.7 on page 56.
6If the problem continues, contact the vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions.
Chapter 55 Troubleshooting
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
425
Advanced Suggestions
• Try to access the Switch using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Switch, check the
remote management settings to find out why the Switch does not respond to HTTP.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Switch.
1Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default user name is admin,
and the default password is 1234. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
2You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions. Close other Telnet
session(s) or try connecting again later.
Check that you have enabled logins for HTTP or Telnet. If you have configured a secured client IP
address, your computer’s IP address must match it. Refer to the chapter on access control for details.
3Disconnect and re-connect the cord to the Switch.
4If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 4.7 on page 56.
Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
There is unauthorized access to my Switch via telnet, HTTP and SSH.
To avoid unauthorized access, configure the secured client setting in the Management > Access
Control > Remote Management screen for telnet, HTTP and SSH (see Section 44.6 on page 380).
Computers not belonging to the secured client set cannot get permission to access the Switch.
55.3 Switch Configuration
I lost my configuration settings after I restart the Switch.
Make sure you save your configuration into the Switch’s
nonvolatile memory each time you make changes. Click
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
427
APPENDIX A
Customer Support
In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If
you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a Zyxel office for the region in which you bought the
device.
See https://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml and also
https://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml for the latest information.
Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.
Required Information
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)
Taiwan
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com
Asia
China
• Zyxel Communications (Shanghai) Corp.
Zyxel Communications (Beijing) Corp.
Zyxel Communications (Tianjin) Corp.
• https://www.zyxel.com/cn/zh/
India
•Zyxel Technology India Pvt Ltd
• https://www.zyxel.com/in/en/
Kazakhstan
•Zyxel Kazakhstan
• https://www.zyxel.kz
Appendix A Customer Support
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
428
Korea
• Zyxel Korea Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.kr
Malaysia
• Zyxel Malaysia Sdn Bhd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.my
Pakistan
• Zyxel Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.pk
Philippines
• Zyxel Philippines
• http://www.zyxel.com.ph
Singapore
• Zyxel Singapore Pte Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.sg
Taiwan
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/tw/zh/
Thailand
• Zyxel Thailand Co., Ltd
• https://www.zyxel.com/th/th/
Vietnam
• Zyxel Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office
• https://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi
Europe
Belarus
•Zyxel BY
• https://www.zyxel.by
Belgium
• Zyxel Communications B.V.
• https://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/
Appendix A Customer Support
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
429
• https://www.zyxel.com/be/fr/
Bulgaria
•Zyxel България
• https://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/
Czech Republic
• Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o
• https://www.zyxel.com/cz/cs/
Denmark
• Zyxel Communications A/S
• https://www.zyxel.com/dk/da/
Estonia
• Zyxel Estonia
• https://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/
Finland
• Zyxel Communications
• https://www.zyxel.com/fi/fi/
France
•Zyxel France
• https://www.zyxel.fr
Germany
•Zyxel Deutschland GmbH
• https://www.zyxel.com/de/de/
Hungary
• Zyxel Hungary & SEE
• https://www.zyxel.com/hu/hu/
Italy
• Zyxel Communications Italy
• https://www.zyxel.com/it/it/
Latvia
•Zyxel Latvia
• https://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/
Appendix A Customer Support
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
430
Lithuania
•Zyxel Lithuania
• https://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/
Netherlands
• Zyxel Benelux
• https://www.zyxel.com/nl/nl/
Norway
• Zyxel Communications
• https://www.zyxel.com/no/no/
Poland
• Zyxel Communications Poland
• https://www.zyxel.com/pl/pl/
Romania
• Zyxel Romania
• https://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro
Russia
• Zyxel Russia
• https://www.zyxel.com/ru/ru/
Slovakia
• Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka
• https://www.zyxel.com/sk/sk/
Spain
• Zyxel Communications ES Ltd
• https://www.zyxel.com/es/es/
Sweden
• Zyxel Communications
• https://www.zyxel.com/se/sv/
Switzerland
•Studerus AG
• https://www.zyxel.ch/de
• https://www.zyxel.ch/fr
Appendix A Customer Support
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
431
Turkey
• Zyxel Turkey A.S.
• https://www.zyxel.com/tr/tr/
UK
• Zyxel Communications UK Ltd.
• https://www.zyxel.com/uk/en/
Ukraine
•Zyxel Ukraine
• http://www.ua.zyxel.com
South America
Argentina
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
Brazil
• Zyxel Communications Brasil Ltda.
• https://www.zyxel.com/br/pt/
Colombia
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
Ecuador
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
South America
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
Middle East
Israel
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• http://il.zyxel.com/
Appendix A Customer Support
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
432
Middle East
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/me/en/
North America
USA
• Zyxel Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters
• https://www.zyxel.com/us/en/
Oceania
Australia
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/au/en/
Africa
South Africa
• Nology (Pty) Ltd.
• https://www.zyxel.com/za/en/
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
433
APPENDIX B
Common Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers.
For a comprehensive list of port numbers, ICMP type/code numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet
Assigned Number Authority) web site.
•Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one,
if you like.
•Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service uses the
same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is User-Defined, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not
the port number.
•Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port
numbers.
•If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
•If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
•Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which
this service is used.
Table 223 Commonly Used Services
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 51 The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling
protocol uses this service.
AIM/New-ICQ TCP 5190 AOL’s Internet Messenger service. It is also used as a
listening port by ICQ.
AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers.
BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME TCP
UDP
7648
24032
A popular videoconferencing solution from White
Pines Software.
DNS TCP/UDP 53 Domain Name Server, a service that matches web
names (for example www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers.
ESP (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol)
tunneling protocol uses this service.
FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can
be used to find out if a user is logged on.
FTP TCP
TCP
20
21
File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast transfer
of files, including large files that may not be possible by
e-mail.
H.323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server protocol
for the world wide web.
HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-
commerce.
Appendix B Common Services
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
434
ICMP User-Defined 1Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for
diagnostic or routing purposes.
ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program.
IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined 2Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when
sending packets to a specific group of hosts.
IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key
distribution and management.
IRC TCP/UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program.
MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks’ messenger service uses this
protocol.
NEW-ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program.
NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups.
NFS UDP 2049 Network File System - NFS is a client/server distributed
file service that provides transparent file sharing for
network environments.
NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery
mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service.
PING User-Defined 1Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out
ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote
host is reachable.
POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer
get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary
connection (TCP/IP or other).
PPTP TCP 1723 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure
transfer of data over public networks. This is the control
channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined 47 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables
secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the
data channel.
RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time
sound over the web.
REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login.
RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet.
RTSP TCP/UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol
(RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the
Internet.
SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol.
SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange
standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move
messages from one e-mail server to another.
SNMP TCP/UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
SQL-NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access
data on many different types of database systems,
including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems
and network servers.
Table 223 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
Appendix B Common Services
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
435
SSH TCP/UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server.
TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access
Controller Access Control System).
TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol
common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It
operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to
allow users to log into remote host systems.
TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer
protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User
Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP (Transmission
Control Protocol).
VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution.
Table 223 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
436
APPENDIX C
IPv6
Overview
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in
IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses.
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an
example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be
written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6
prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the
network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
Link-local Address
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a “private IP
address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a device. A link-
local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast address format is as
follows.
Table 224 Link-local Unicast Address Format
Global Address
A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a “public IP address” in IPv4. A
global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3.
1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID
10 bits 54 bits 64 bits
Appendix C IPv6
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
437
Unspecified Address
An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does not have
its own address. It is similar to “0.0.0.0” in IPv4.
Loopback Address
A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to “127.0.0.1”
in IPv4.
Multicast Address
In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses. Broadcasting is
not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group.
Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a
predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses.
The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a
multicast group.
Table 225 Predefined Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local node.
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local node.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local connected link.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local connected link.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local site.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 All DHCP severs on a local site.
Table 226 Reserved Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Appendix C IPv6
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
438
Subnet Masking
Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into
eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character
(1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example,
FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
Interface ID
In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an Ethernet
port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One interface should
have a unique interface ID.
EUI-64
The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6-byte)
Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes
of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address. See the
following example.
Stateless Autoconfiguration
With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated.
Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful
autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses don’t need to be maintained by a DHCP server.
Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when IPv6 is initiated
on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own Ethernet MAC
address, see Interface ID and EUI-64) to form a complete IPv6 address.
When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address (beginning
with fe80).
When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the Switch is set to automatically obtain
an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates 3another address which combines
its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router. This is a routable global IP
address.
DHCPv6
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol that
allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other configuration
information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP.
Table 227
MAC 00 : 13 : 49 : 12 : 34 : 56
Table 228
EUI-64 02: 13 : 49 : FF : FE : 12 : 34 : 56
3. In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses.
Appendix C IPv6
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
439
Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for identification
when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC address, time,
vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number registered with the IANA. It should not
change over time even after you reboot the device.
Identity Association
An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which the
server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with exactly
one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP
server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information.
The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an identity
association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary addresses.
An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The DHCPv6 server uses T1
and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any
addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client sends the server (S1) (from which
the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If the time T2 is reached and the server
does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the
client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's discretion.
DHCP Relay Agent
A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between
the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-known multicast
address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to
a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network.
The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID option
to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string, such as the
system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the VLAN ID to the
DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply messages before the relay
agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the interface-ID option from the Relay-
Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to the relay agent. The interface-ID should
not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Prefix Delegation
Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the ISP (or
a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The Switch uses the received IPv6 prefix (for example, 2001:db2::/
48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements (RAs) regularly by multicast,
the Switch passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts then can use the prefix to
generate their IPv6 addresses.
T1
T2
Renew Rebind
Rebind
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
to S2
to S2
Appendix C IPv6
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
440
ICMPv6
Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443. ICMPv6 has
a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4.
ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet
processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping".
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)
The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track
neighbor’s reachability in a network. An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types:
• Neighbor solicitation: A request from a host to determine a neighbor’s link-layer address (MAC
address) and detect if the neighbor is still reachable. A neighbor being “reachable” means it
responds to a neighbor solicitation message (from the host) with a neighbor advertisement message.
• Neighbor advertisement: A response from a node to announce its link-layer address.
• Router solicitation: A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and
forward packets.
• Router advertisement: A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from
a router to advertise its presence and other parameters.
IPv6 Cache
An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache, destination cache, prefix list and default router list.
The Switch maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from response
messages. In IPv6, the Switch configures a link-local address automatically, and then sends a neighbor
solicitation message to check if the address is unique. If there is an address to be resolved or verified, the
Switch also sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the Switch receives a neighbor
advertisement in response, it stores the neighbor’s link-layer address in the neighbor cache. When the
Switch uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and receives a router advertisement
message, it adds the router’s information to the neighbor cache, prefix list and destination cache. The
Switch creates an entry in the default router list cache if the router can be used as a default router.
When the Switch needs to send a packet, it first consults the destination cache to determine the next
hop. If there is no matching entry in the destination cache, the Switch uses the prefix list to determine
whether the destination address is on-link and can be reached directly without passing through a router.
If the address is onlink, the address is considered as the next hop. Otherwise, the Switch determines the
next-hop from the default router list or routing table. Once the next hop IP address is known, the Switch
looks into the neighbor cache to get the link-layer address and sends the packet when the neighbor is
reachable. If the Switch cannot find an entry in the neighbor cache or the state for the neighbor is not
reachable, it starts the address resolution process. This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and
advertisement messages.
Multicast Listener Discovery
The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's Internet
Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather than IGMP
message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3.
MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive
multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network.
Appendix C IPv6
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
441
MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4.
MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join.
MLD Messages
A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast
forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report message
for that address.
An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave a
multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then sends a
group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices
connected to this port should remain in the group.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista
By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the ipv6
install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the ipconfig
command to see auto-generated IP addresses.
IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check your
automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the
interface on your computer.
Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP
Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment, you have
to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use static IP addresses
or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore this section.)
This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:
1Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer.
C:\>ipv6 install
Installing...
Succeeded.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.46
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.254
Appendix C IPv6
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
442
2After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client Install as service.
3Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
4Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client.
5Click Start and then OK.
6Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7
Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7
computer.
To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:
1Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection.
Appendix C IPv6
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
443
2Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it.
3Click OK to save the change.
4Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen.
5Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
6Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global address
(2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IPv6 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 2001:b021:2d::1000
Link-local IPv6 Address . . . . . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11
IPv4 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 172.16.100.61
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11
172.16.100.254
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
444
APPENDIX D
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2019 by Zyxel Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any
language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of Zyxel Communications Corporation.
Published by Zyxel Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
Zyxel does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any
license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. Zyxel further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein
without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Regulatory Notice and Statement
United States of America
The following information applies if you use the product within USA area.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) EMC Statement
• This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Canada
The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area
Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada ICES Statement
CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3(A)
European Union
The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union.
CE EMC statement
WARNING: This equipment is compliant with Class A of EN55032. In a residential environment this equipment may cause radio interference.
Appendix D Legal Information
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
445
List of National Codes
Safety Warnings
• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Do not obstruct the device ventillation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device. For example, do not place the device in an
enclosed space such as a box or on a very soft surface such as a bed or sofa.
• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified
service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North
America or 230V AC in Europe).
• DO NOT remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself; always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting it to
a power outlet.
• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor
or cord.
• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source.
• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• DO NOT use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY (on the motherboard) IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES
ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment.
For detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the
store where you purchased the product.
• Use ONLY power wires of the appropriate wire gauge for your device. Connect it to a power supply of the correct voltage.
• Fuse Warning! Replace a fuse only with a fuse of the same type and rating.
• The POE (Power over Ethernet) devices that supply or receive power and their connected Ethernet cables must all be completely indoors.
• This equipment must be grounded. Never defeat the ground conductor or operate the equipment in the absence of a suitably installed
ground conductor. Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are uncertain that suitable grounding is
available.
• When connecting or disconnecting power to hot-pluggable power supplies, if offered with your system, observe the following guidelines:
- Install the power supply before connecting the power cable to the power supply.
- Unplug the power cable before removing the power supply.
- If the system has multiple sources of power, disconnect power from the system by unplugging all power cables from the power supply.
• The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the equipment or where the plug on the power
supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device,
- For PERMANENTLY CONNECTED EQUIPMENT, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the equipment;
- For PLUGGABLE EQUIPMENT, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
• CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
• APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASS 1
• PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11.
• PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040.10 ET 1040.11.
COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
Austria AT Liechtenstein LI
Belgium BE Lithuania LT
Bulgaria BG Luxembourg LU
Croatia HR Malta MT
Cyprus CY Netherlands NL
Czech Republic CR Norway NO
Denmark DK Poland PL
Estonia EE Portugal PT
Finland FI Romania RO
France FR Serbia RS
Germany DE Slovakia SK
Greece GR Slovenia SI
Hungary HU Spain ES
Iceland IS Sweden SE
Ireland IE Switzerland CH
Italy IT Turkey TR
Latvia LV United Kingdom GB
Appendix D Legal Information
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
446
Environment Statement
European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information
The symbol below means that according to local regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic
waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate collection of
your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable development.
Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gemäß den örtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmüll entsorgt
werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum Zeitpunkt der
Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natürliche Ressourcen zu sparen und die Umwelt
und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schützen.
El símbolo de abajo indica que según las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batería deberán depositarse como basura separada de la
doméstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida útil, llévelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el
producto, la recogida por separado éste y/o su batería ayudará a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y
medioambiental.
Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les réglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent être éliminés séparément des ordures
ménagères. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le à un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la collecte séparée
de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera à économiser les ressources naturelles et protéger l'environnement et la santé humaine.
Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti domestici.
Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello smaltimento, la raccolta
separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente e la salute umana.
Symbolen innebär att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat från hushållsavfallet. När den här produkten når
slutet av sin livslängd ska du ta den till en återvinningsstation. Vid tiden för kasseringen bidrar du till en bättre miljö och mänsklig hälsa genom att
göra dig av med den på ett återvinningsställe.
台灣
以下訊息僅適用於產品銷售至台灣地區
• 這是甲類的資訊產品，在居住的環境中使用時，可能會造成射頻干擾，在這種情況下，使用者會被要求採取某些適當的對策。
安全警告
為了您的安全，請先閱讀以下警告及指示 :
• 請勿將此產品接近水、火焰或放置在高溫的環境。
• 避免設備接觸
任何液體 - 切勿讓設備接觸水、雨水、高濕度、污水腐蝕性的液體或其他水份。
灰塵及污物 - 切勿接觸灰塵、污物、沙土、食物或其他不合適的材料。
• 雷雨天氣時，不要安裝，使用或維修此設備。有遭受電擊的風險。
• 切勿重摔或撞擊設備，並勿使用不正確的電源變壓器。
• 若接上不正確的電源變壓器會有爆炸的風險。。
• 請勿隨意更換產品內的電池。
• 如果更換不正確之電池型式，會有爆炸的風險，請依製造商說明書處理使用過之電池。
• 請將廢電池丟棄在適當的電器或電子設備回收處。
• 請勿將設備解體。
• 請勿阻礙設備的散熱孔，空氣對流不足將會造成設備損害。
• 請插在正確的電壓供給插座 ( 如 : 北美 / 台灣電壓 110V AC，歐洲是 230V AC)。
• 假若電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線損壞，請從插座拔除，若您還繼續插電使用，會有觸電死亡的風險。
• 請勿試圖修理電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線，若有毀損，請直接聯絡您購買的店家，購買一個新的電源變壓器。
• 請勿將此設備安裝於室外，此設備僅適合放置於室內。
• 請勿隨一般垃圾丟棄。
• 請參閱產品背貼上的設備額定功率。
Appendix D Legal Information
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
447
• 請參考產品型錄或是彩盒上的作業溫度。
• 設備必須接地，接地導線不允許被破壞或沒有適當安裝接地導線，如果不確定接地方式是否符合要求可聯繫相應的電氣檢驗機構檢驗。
• 如果您提供的系統中有提供熱插拔電源，連接或斷開電源請遵循以下指導原則
- 先連接電源線至設備連，再連接電源。
- 先斷開電源再拔除連接至設備的電源線。
- 如果系統有多個電源，需拔除所有連接至電源的電源線再關閉設備電源。
• 產品沒有斷電裝置或者採用電源線的插頭視為斷電裝置的一部分，以下警語將適用 :
- 對永久連接之設備， 在設備外部須安裝可觸及之斷電裝置；
- 對插接式之設備， 插座必須接近安裝之地點而且是易於觸及的。
About the Symbols
Various symbols are used in this product to ensure correct usage, to prevent danger to the user and others, and to prevent property damage.
The meaning of these symbols are described below. It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand the
contents.
Explanation of the Symbols
Viewing Certifications
Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this product’s documentation and certifications.
Zyxel Limited Warranty
Zyxel warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the
Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized Zyxel local
distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product
have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, Zyxel will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or
components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to
proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value,
and will be solely at the discretion of Zyxel. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by
an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties,
express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. Zyxel shall in no event be held
liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the
device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at
www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (Zyxel Network Operating System) and ZON (Zyxel One Network)are registered trademarks of Zyxel Communications, Inc. Other
trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
SYMBOL EXPLANATION
Alternating current (AC):
AC is an electric current in which the flow of electric charge periodically reverses direction.
Direct current (DC):
DC if the unidirectional flow or movement of electric charge carriers.
Earth; ground:
A wiring terminal intended for connection of a Protective Earthing Conductor.
Class II equipment:
The method of protection against electric shock in the case of class II equipment is either double insulation
or reinforced insulation.
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
448
Index
Numbers
802.1P priority 90
A
AAA 224
accounting 224, 225
authentication 224, 225
authorization 224, 225
external server 224
RADIUS 224
AAA (Authentication, Authorization and Accounting) 225
access control
limitations 372
login account 378
remote management 380
service port 380
SNMP 382
accounting
setup 229
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) 354, 407, 410, 411
administrator password 379
aging time 85
anti-arpscan 317
blocked hosts 318
host threshold 320
status 318
trusted hosts 319
applications
bridging 26
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN 27
switched workgroup 27
ARP
how it works 354
learning mode 354
overview 354
setup 356
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) 407
ARP inspection 237, 265
and MAC filter 265
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
449
configuring 266
syslog messages 266
trusted ports 266
ARP scan 317
ARP-Reply 354
ARP-Request 355
authentication
setup 229
authentication, authorization and accounting 224
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting, see AAA 225
authorization
privilege levels 231
setup 229
automatic VLAN registration 111
B
bandwidth control 159
egress rate 160
ingress rate 160
setup 159
basic settings 80
basic setup tutorial 63
binding 237
binding table 237
building 237
BPDU 322
BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) 322
BPDU guard 322
and Errdisable Recovery 322
port status 322
BPDUs 139
Bridge Protocol Data Units 322
Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) 139
broadcast storm control 161
C
cable diagnostics 393
CDP 275
certifications
viewing 447
CFI 111
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
450
CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) 111
changing the password 55
Cisco Discovery Protocol, see CDP
CIST 158
Class of Service (CoS) 339
classifier 185
and QoS 185
editing 190
example 192
logging 191
match order 191
overview 185
setup 186, 190
status 185
viewing 190
cloning a port See port cloning
cluster management 398
and switch passwords 401
cluster manager 398, 400
cluster member 398, 401
cluster member firmware upgrade 402
network example 398
setup 400
specification 398
status 399
switch models 398
VID 401
web configurator 402
cluster manager 398
cluster member 398
command interface 29
Common and Internal Spanning Tree, See CIST 158
configuration 336
change running config 361
configuration file 57
restore 57, 364
saving 360
configuration, saving 56
console port
settings 39
contact information 427
copying port settings, See port cloning
copyright 444
CPU management port 128
CPU protection 285
current date 83
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
451
current time 83
customer support 427
D
daylight saving time 84
DHCP
configuration options 343
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 343
modes 343
Relay Agent Information format 345
setup 344
DHCP relay option 82 264
DHCP snooping 63, 237, 263
configuring 264
DHCP relay option 82 264
trusted ports 263
untrusted ports 263
DHCP snooping database 264
DHCPv4
global relay 347
global relay example 349
Option 82 345
option 82 profiles 346
Relay Agent Information 345
DHCPv4 relay 344
DHCPv6 relay 352
interface-ID 352
remote-ID 352
diagnostics 392
Ethernet port test 393
ping 393
Differentiated Service (DiffServ) 339
DiffServ 339
activate 340
DS field 339
DSCP 339
network example 339
PHB 339
disclaimer 444
DNS 107
DNS (Domain Name System) 107
Domain Name System 107
DS (Differentiated Services) 339
DSCP
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
452
service level 339
what it does 339
DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) 339
dual firmware images 362
dynamic link aggregation 165
E
egress rate, and bandwidth control 160
errdisable status 288
error disable 285
control packets 287
CPU protection 288
detect 289
recovery 290
status 286
error-disable recovery 285
Ethernet broadcast address 354, 407
Ethernet MAC 81
Ethernet OAM 325
Ethernet port test 393
Ethernet ports
default settings 38
external authentication server 225
F
FCC interference statement 444
file transfer using FTP
command example 370
filename convention, configuration
configuration
file names 370
filtering 136
rules 136
filtering database, MAC table 404
firmware 81
upgrade 362, 402
flow control
back pressure 90
IEEE802.3x 90
forwarding
delay 148
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
453
frames
tagged 119
untagged 119
front panel 35
FTP 29, 369
file transfer procedure 370
restrictions over WAN 371
G
GARP 111
GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) 111
GARP timer 85, 112
general setup 82
getting help 58
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) 84
gratuitous ARP 355
green Ethernet 293
and uplink port 293
auto power down 293
EEE 293
short reach 293
GVRP 112, 118, 119
and port assignment 119
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) 112
H
hardware installation 30
mounting 32
hardware monitor 81
hardware overview 35
hello time 147
HTTPS 386
certificates 386
implementation 386
public keys, private keys 386
HTTPS example 387
I
IEEE 802.1x
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
454
activate 174
port authentication 172
reauthentication 176
IEEE 802.3az 293
IGMP filtering
profile 210
IGMP leave timeout
fast 208
mormal 208
IGMP snooping 202
MVR 203
IGMP throttling 208
ingress rate, and bandwidth control 160
initial setup 59
Installation
Rack-mounting 31
installation
freestanding 30
precautions 31
installation scenarios 30
Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6
introduction 21
IP address 87
IP setup 86
IP source guard 237
ARP inspection 237, 265
DHCP snooping 237, 263
static bindings 237
IP subnet mask 87
IPv6 28, 436
addressing 436
EUI-64 438
global address 436
interface ID 438
link-local address 436
Neighbor Discovery Protocol 28, 436
neighbor table 413
ping 28, 436
prefix 436
prefix length 436
stateless autoconfiguration 438
unspecified address 437
IPv6 interface 96
DHCPv6 client 106
enable 101
global address 103
link-local address 102
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
455
neighbor discovery 103
neighbor table 104
stateless autoconfiguration 101
IPv6 multicast
211
status 211
IPv6 neighbor table 413
L
L2PT 273
access port 274
CDP 273
configuration 274
encapsulation 273
example 273
LACP 274
MAC address 273, 275
mode 274
overview 273
PAgP 274
point to point 274
STP 273
tunnel port 274
UDLD 274
VTP 273
LACP 165, 276
system priority 169
timeout 170
Layer 2 protocol tunneling, see L2PT
LEDs 41
link aggregation 165
dynamic 165
ID information 166
setup 167
traffic distribution algorithm 167
traffic distribution type 168
trunk group 165
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) 165
Link Layer Discovery Protocol 295
LLDP 295
Basic TLV 310
global settings 309
local port status 299
organization-specific TLV 311
status of remote device 303
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
456
TLV 295
LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) 295
LLDP-MED 296
classes of endpoint devices 296
example 296
lockout 56
log message 394
login 43
password 55
login account
Administrator 378
non-administrator 378
login accounts 378
configuring via web configurator 378
multiple 378
number of 378
login password 379
loop guard 267
examples 268
port shut down 268
setup 269
vs. STP 267
M
MAC 81
MAC (Media Access Control) 81
MAC address 81, 407
maximum number per port 182
MAC address learning 85, 182
specify limit 182
MAC filter
and ARP inspection 265
MAC table 404
display criteria 406
how it works 404
sorting criteria 406
transfer type 406
viewing 405
maintanence
firmware 362
restoring configuration 364
maintenance 358
current configuration 359
main screen 359
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
457
Management Information Base (MIB) 382
management IP address 86
managing the device
good habits 29
using FTP. See FTP.
using SNMP. See SNMP.
using Telnet. See command interface.
using the command interface. See command interface.
using the web configurator. See web configurator.
man-in-the-middle attacks 265
maximum transmission unit 409
Mbuf 367
Mbuf (Memory Buffer) 367
Media Access Control 81
Memory Buffer 367
MIB
and SNMP 382
supported MIBs 383
MIB (Management Information Base) 382
mini GBIC ports 36
transceiver installation 36
transceiver removal 37
mirroring ports 163
MLD filtering profile 217
MLD snooping-proxy 212
filtering 216
filtering profile 217
port role 214
VLAN ID 213
monitor port 163
mounting brackets 32
MST Instance, See MSTI 157
MST region 157
MSTI 148, 157
MSTI (Multiple Spanning Tree Instance) 148
MSTP 138, 140
bridge ID 151
configuration digest 152
forwarding delay 148
Hello Time 151
hello time 147
Max Age 148, 151
maximum hops 148
revision level 148
status 150
MTU 409
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
458
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 84
multicast
IGMP throttling 208
IP addresses 201
setup 205
multicast group 210
multicast MAC address 133
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol, See MSTP 138, 140
Multiple STP 140
Multi-Tenant Unit 84
MVR 203
configuration 218
network example 203
MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration) 203
N
network management system (NMS) 382
NTP (RFC-1305) 83
O
OAM 325
details 326
discovery 325
port configuration 325
remote loopback 325
remote-loopback 331
one-time schedule 183
Operations, Administration and Maintenance 325
Option 82 345
P
PAGP 276
password 55
administrator 379
Path MTU 409
Path MTU Discovery 409
PHB (Per-Hop Behavior) 339
ping, test connection 393
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
459
PoE
PD priority 94
power management mode 94
policy 194
and classifier 194
and DiffServ 194
configuration 194
example 197
overview 194
rules 194
Port Aggregation Protocol, see PAgP
port authentication 172
guest VLAN 176
IEEE802.1x 174
MAC authentication 178
method 174
port cloning 410, 411
advanced settings 410, 411
basic settings 410, 411
port details 416
port mirroring 163
port redundancy 165
port security 181
limit MAC address learning 182
MAC address learning 181
overview 181
setup 181
port setup 88
port status 415
port details 416
port utilization 421
port utilization 421
port VLAN ID, see PVID 119
port VLAN trunking 112
port-based VLAN 128
ports
diagnostics 393
mirroring 163
speed/duplex 89
standby 165
power
voltage 82
power module
disconnecting 41
power status 82
PPPoE IA 277
agent sub-options 279
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
460
configuration 279
drop PPPoE packets 281
port state 279
sub-option format 278
tag format 277
trusted ports 279
untrusted ports 279
VLAN 283
PPPoE Intermediate Agent 277
priority level 86
priority queue assignment 86
product registration 447
PVID 111
Q
QoS
and classifier 185
queue weight 199
queuing 198
SPQ 198
WRR 198
queuing method 198, 200
R
RADIUS 225
advantages 225
and tunnel protocol attribute 232
setup 226
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, See RSTP. 138
reboot
load configuration 361
reboot system 361
recurring schedule 183
registration
product 447
remote management 380
service 381
trusted computers 381
resetting 56, 360, 361, 362
to custom default settings 362
to factory default settings 360, 361
restoring configuration 56, 364
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
461
RFC 3164 395
Round Robin Scheduling 198
RSTP 138
configuration 142
status 144
running configuration 360
erase 360
reset 360
S
save configuration 56, 360
schedule
one-time 183
recurring 183
type 184
Secure Shell See SSH
service access control 380
service port 380
Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP
SNMP 29, 382
agent 382
and MIB 382
authentication 377, 378
communities 374
management model 382
manager 382
MIB 383
network components 382
object variables 382
protocol operations 382
security 377, 378
setup 373
traps 374
users 376
version 3 and security 382
versions supported 382
SNMP traps 383
supported 383, 384
Spanning Tree Protocol, See STP. 138
SPQ (Strict Priority Queuing) 198
SSH
encryption methods 386
how it works 385
implementation 386
SSH (Secure Shell) 385
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
462
SSL (Secure Socket Layer) 386
standby ports 165
static bindings 237
static MAC address 131
static MAC forwarding 131
static multicast address 133
static multicast forwarding 133
static route
enable 337
metric 337
static routes 336
static VLAN 116
control 117
tagging 117
status 74
LED 41
MSTP 150
port 415
power 82
RSTP 144
VLAN 114
STP 138, 275
bridge ID 145, 155
bridge priority 143, 154
designated bridge 139
edge port 144, 154
forwarding delay 144
Hello BPDU 139
Hello Time 143, 145, 154, 155
how it works 139
Max Age 143, 145, 154, 155
path cost 139, 144, 154
port priority 144, 154
port role 146, 156
port state 140, 145, 156
root port 139
status 141
terminology 139
vs. loop guard 267
subnet based VLANs 119
switch lockout 56
switch reset 56
switch setup 85
syslog 266, 395
protocol 395
settings 395
setup 395
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
463
severity levels 395
system information 80
system reboot 361
T
TACACS+ 225
advantages 225
setup 227
tagged VLAN 111
Tech-Support 366
log enhancement 366
temperature indicator 82
time
current 83
Time (RFC-868) 83
time range 183
time server 83
time service protocol 83
format 83
trademarks 447
transceiver
installation 36
removal 37
traps
destination 374
trunk group 165
trunking 165
trusted ports
ARP inspection 266
DHCP snooping 263
PPPoE IA 279
tunnel protocol attribute
and RADIUS 232
tutorials 63
DHCP snooping 63
Type of Service (ToS) 339
U
UDLD 276
UniDirectional Link Detection, see UDLD
untrusted ports
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
464
ARP inspection 266
DHCP snooping 263
PPPoE IA 279
user profiles 225
V
Vendor Specific Attribute, See VSA 231
VID 114
number of possible VIDs 111
priority frame 111
VID (VLAN Identifier) 111
Virtual Local Area Network 84
VLAN 84
acceptable frame type 119
automatic registration 111
ID 111
ingress filtering 119
introduction 84, 111
number of VLANs 114
port settings 118
port-based VLAN 128
PVID 119
static VLAN 116
status 114, 115
subnet based 119
tagged 111
terminology 112
trunking 112, 119
type 85, 113
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) 84
VLAN ID 88, 111
VLAN mapping 270
activating 271
configuration 271
example 270
priority level 270
tagged 270
traffic flow 270
untagged 270
VLAN ID 270
VLAN terminology 112
VLAN trunking 119
VLAN Trunking Protocol, see VTP
Voice VLAN 123
VSA 231
Index
GS2220 Series User’s Guide
465
VTP 275
W
warranty 447
note 447
web configurator 28, 43
getting help 58
layout 51
login 43
logout 57
navigation panel 52
weight, queuing 199
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) 199
WRR (Weighted Round Robin Scheduling) 198
Z
ZON Utility 46
ZULD 332
example 332
probe time 334
status 333
ZULD (Zyxel Unidirectional Link Detection) 332
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) 370
Zyxel Unidirectional Link Detection 332
Zyxel Unidirectional Link Detection (ZULD) 332